Cornell XHniverstt^ Xibrarip OF THE 1Rew JPorfe State College of agriculture Cornell University Library QD 253.M2 A text-book of organic ch S" l *!^ m !|55™ u 3 1924 002 971 723 Cornell University Library The original of this book is in the Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924002971723 A TEXT-BOOK OF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY THE MACMILLAN COMPANY NEW YORK • BOSTON • CHICAGO • DALLAS ATLANTA " SAN FRANCISCO MACMILLAN & CO., Limited LONDON • BOMBAY • CALCUTTA MELBOURNE THE MACMILLAN CO. OF CANADA, Ltd. TORONTO A TEXT-BOOK or ORGANIC CHEMISTRY FOR STUDENTS OF MEDICINE AND BIOLOGY BT E. V. McCOLLUM, Ph.D. PROFESSOR OF BIOCHEMISTRY, SCHOOL OP HYGIENE, JOHNS HOPKINS MEDICAL SCHOOL J FORMERLY PROFESSOR OF AGRICULTURAL CHEMISTRY, UNIVERSITY OF WISCONSIN THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 1917 All rights reserved Copyright, 1916, By THE MAOMILLAN COMPANY. Set up and electrotyped. Published October, 1916. Reprinted July, 1917. Wottoo'oU $rtss J. S. dishing Co. —Berwick & Smith Co. Norwood, Mass., U.S.A. PREFACE • In preparing this text-book the aim has been to re- strict its contents to a degree which should make it suitable for a course continuing through a half of an academic year. The book embodies the substance of the discussion of organic chemistry presented with the author's course in the chemistry of nutrition during the last eight years, and emphasizes the biological rather than the synthetic and technical viewpoint. It is hoped, therefore, that it should serve as a satisfactory text for students of medicine and others who can give but a semester to this subject, and whose interest is in some field of biology. The text-books ordinarily placed in the hands of stu- dents contain more matter than can be assimilated in an academic year, and make necessary some omissions. They reflect the special interests of their writers in extending the subject matter relating to methods of synthesis, with an undesirable multiplication of indi- vidual compounds described, or in restricting these, and extending the description of technical processes- It has not infrequently been the case that in text-books designed for medical students the other extreme has been reached, and wholly inadequate evidence has been offered in support of the structural formulas , pre- sented. The book then consists of a description of VI Preface the biologically important compounds, burdened with formidable formulas in which the student sees no meaning. It is the belief of the author that, if properly pre- sented, the theory of organic chemistry never fails to arouse the interest of a bright-minded student. To be appreciated by the beginner it must be shorn as far as possible of details which burden the memory. The aim has been to present a complete line of reasoning, based upon the properties of the substances considered, in support of the validity of every formula employed. This end has been attained except in the case of the terpenes and a few alkaloids. In all cases the effort has been made to select for purposes of illustration those compounds which have biological importance rather than technical. The course here offered will, it is hoped, serve to fit the student for intelligent work in physiological chemistry by giving him an apprecia- tion of the spirit of organic chemistry and an under- standing of the relationships and transformations which go on in the plant and animal world. Since the book is not intended to serve as a guide to manipulation the usual introductory chapter on methods of laboratory work is omitted. Such infor- mation is now readily available in a number of labora- tory manuals. E. V. McCOLLUM. TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER I PAGES The Saturated Fatty Hydrocarbons (1-11) . . . 1-22 Methane, 1. Derivatives of methane, 3. Structure of methane, 6. Chlor derivatives, 7. Methyl iodide, 10. Ethane, 10. Nomenclature of the hydrocarbons, 14. Petroleum, 15. Isomerism of the hydrocarbons, 17. CHAPTER II The Alcohols (12-27) 23-43 Nomenclature of the alcohols, 23. Ethyl alcohol, 24. Alcoholates, 26. Alcoholic beverages, 27. Homologues of ethyl alcohol, 28. Propyl, butyl, and amyl alcohols, 28. Isomerism of the amyl alcohols, 31. Higher alco- hols, 36. Diatomic alcohols, 37. Triatomic alcohols, 39. Tetratomic alcohols, 42. Mercaptans, 42. CHAPTER III Ethers and Esters (28-29) 44-55 Ethyl sulphuric acid, 44. Esters of sulphurous acid, 46. Ethers of sulphurous acid, 47. Ethyl nitrate and ethyl nitrite, 48. Amyl nitrite, 48. Structure of the ethers, 51. Methyl and ethyl ether, 50. Mixed ethers, 52. CHAPTER IV Aldehydes and Ketones (30-39) 56-76 Constitution of aldehydes and acids, 56. Properties of the aldehydes, 67. Formaldehyde, 63. Acetalde- viii Table of Contents hyde, 65. Chloral,- 66. Glycol aldehyde, 67. Glycer- aldehyde, 68. Ketones, 68. Methods of formation and structure, 69. Properties, 70. Acetone, 73. Dihydroxy acetone, 75. CHAPTER V The Niteiles and their Reduction Products. The Amines (40-49) 77-95 Structure of the nitriles and isonitriles as shown by their modes of formation and chemical behavior, 77. Cyananiide, 83. Primary, secondary, and tertiary amines, 84. Methods of preparation of amines, 86. Isomerism of the amines, 89. Methyl amine, 90. Ethyl amine, 91. Choline, 92. Physiological proper- ties of the amines, 94. CHAPTER VI The Eatty Acids (50-77) . . . - . . . . 96-152 Eormic acid, 96. Acetic acid, 99. Acid chlorides, 103. Acid amides, 104. Chlor acetic acids, 107. Hy- droxy acids, 108. Amino acids, 109. Urea, 111. Thio- urea, 115. Esters of carbamic acids, 116. Urethanes, 117. Guanidine, 117. Arginine, 118. Glycocoll, 120. Creatine and creatinine, 123. Sarcosine, 124. Betaines, 125. Acid anhydrides, 126. Propionic acid, and its derivatives, lactic and pyruvic acids, cystine and ala- nine, 127. Stereochemistry of the lactic acids, 131. Butyric acids, 140. Valerianic acid and valine, 142. The caproic acids and their derivatives, lysine, leucine, and isoleucine, 146. The higher fatty acids, 149. CHAPTER 'vil The Olefines and Acetylenes (78-88) .... 153-174 Methylene, 153. Ethylene, 154. Propylene, 159. Propylidene, 160. Diolefines, 161. Acetylene, 162. Substitution products of the unsaturated hydrocarbons, Table of Contents ix 167. Allyl alcohol, 167. Acrolein, 168. Acids of the oleic acid series, acrylic, and crotonic,. 169. Oleic acid, 172. Acids with two and three double bonds, 173. CHAPTER VIII ' The Fats and Waxes and Related Compounds (89-99) 176-198 The animal fats, 175. The vegetable fats, 176. Soaps, 179. The cleansing action of soaps, 181. Methods of characterization of the fats, 183. Waxes, 190. Leci- thins and phosphatides, 193. Neurine, 195. Cerebro- sides, 197. Sterols, 197. CHAPTER IX The Dibasic Acids (100-108) 199-209 Oxalic acid, 199. Malonic acid, 202.' Succinic acid, 205. Aspartic acid and asparagine, 206.' Glutaric acid and its derivatives, glutamic acid and glutamine, 207. Adipic; pimelic, and suberic acids, 208. CHAPTER X Cyclo Paraffins and Pyrrole Derivatives (109-120) . 210-224 Trimethylene, tetramethylene, pentamethylene, hexa- methylene, and heptamethylene, 210. Anhydrides of the dibasic axids, 215. Succinimide and glutarimide, 216. Pyrrole and pyrrolidine, 216. Proline, 223. Oxy- proline, 224. Pyrrolidine carboxylic acid, 224. CHAPTER XI Hydroxy and Ketone Acids (121-132) .... 226-246 Tartronic, malic, and tartaric acids, 225. Oxybutyric acid, 235. '7-hydroxy acids, 236. 7-amino acids, 237. Acetoacetic acid, 237. Mesoxalic acid, 242. Levulinic acid, 243. Oxalacetic acid, 243. Acetone dicarboxylic acid, 244. Citric acid, 245. Table of Contents CHAPTER XII FA.QE8 Maleic and Eumaric Acids and their Isomerism (133) 247-262 The isomerism due to the double bond, 247. Trans- formation of the malenoid into the fumaroid form and the reverse transformation, 251. The biological proper- ties of the cis and trans isomers, 252. CHAPTER xni The Ureides (134-140) 263-263 Acetyl urea, 253. Diacetyl urea, 253. Glycoluric acid, 254. Hydantoin, 255. Allantoin, 256. Histidine and urocanic acid, 257. Pyrazole, 259. Oxaluric and parabanic acids, 259. Alloxan, 262. CHAPTER XIV The Pyrimidines, Pyrazines, and Pcrines (141-149) . 264-282 Pyrimidines, 264. Thymine, 265. Cytosine, 265. Uracil, 266. Pyrazines, 266. Piperazine, 269. Diketo ( piperazines, 270. The purines, 270. Uric acid, 271. Purine, 275. Hypoxanthine and xanthine, 277. Ade- nine and guanine, 278. The nucleic acids, 280. Methyl purines — theobromine and caffeine, 281. CHAPTER XV The Carbohydrates (150-163) 283-337 Composition, 283. Determination of structure, 285. Synthesis of carbohydrates, 288. Determination of con- figuration, 297. Pentoses, 301. Methyl pentoses, 303. Structure of the hexoses, 303. Ketoses, 307. Special properties of the hexoses, 311. Action of alkalies on glucose, 314. Disaccharides, 318. Importance of stereo- chemistry in relation to the biological values of the sugars, 321. Rafnnose, 323. Glucosides, 323. Polysac- charides, 329. Chitin and glucosamine, 334. Inulin, 336. Table of Contents XI CHAPTER XVI PAGES ?he Chemical Changes Involved in the Fermentation of the Sugaks (164-165) 338-346 Alcoholic fermentation, 338. Lactic acid fermenta- tion, 342. Butyric acid fermentation, 342. The rela- tion of the intermediary products of fermentation to the formation of fats in the animal body, 343. CHAPTER XVII Jenzene and its Dekivatives (166-214) .... Structure of benzene, 347. Determination of the position of substituting groups, 350. Physiological properties of benzene, 353. Homologues, 353. Tolu- ene, 353. Structure of the chlor derivatives of toluene, 355. The xylenes, 356. Mesitylene, 356. Halogen de- rivatives of benzene, 358. Nitrobenzene, 359. Aniline, 359. Acetanilide, 361. Alkyl anilines, 361. Diphenyl amine, 361. Diazobenzene, 362. Benzene sulphonic acid, 364. Phenol, 365. Phenol sulphuric acid, 366. Phenol sulphonic acid, 366. Phenol ethers, 367. Cre- sols, 367. Picric acid, 368. Tyrosine, 368. Tyramine, 370. Dihydroxy benzenes, 371. Guiacol and veratrol, 371. Quinone, 372. Trihydroxy benzenes, 373. Ino- site, 373. Thymol and carvacrol, 374. Protocatechuic acid, 374. Veratric acid, vanillin, and coniferyl alcohol, 374. Homogentisic acid, 375. Adrenin, 376. Benzoic acid, 377. Saccharin, 378. Hippuric acid, 378. Benzyl alcohol, 379. Benzaldehyde, 379. Phenyl acetic acid and phenyl alanine, 380. Cinnamic acid, 381. Salicylic aldehyde and salicylic acid, 381. Aspirin, 381. Salol, 382. Gallic and tannic acids, 382. Tannins, 382. 347-383 CHAPTER XVIII Jondensed Benzene Rings (215-216) Naphthalene, 384. Anthracene, 385. . 384-386 xii Table of Contents CHAPTER XIX The Dtes (217-219) 387-390 Alizerin, 387. Triphenyl methane dyes, 388. The azo dyes, 390. CHAPTER XX Heterocyclic Compounds (220-227) .... 391-399 Pyridine, 391. Picolines, 393. Nicotinic acid, 393. Quinolinic acid, 394. Quinoline, 394. Indole and its derivatives, indole, scatole, indoxyl, and indigo, 396. Tryptophane, 398. Transformation products of tryp- tophane, 399. CHAPTER XXI The Terpenes (228-229) . . . . . . . 400-405 Addition products of the terpenes with nitrosyl chlo- ride and ozone, 400. Citronellol, geraniol, linalobl, and myrcene, 402. Cymene, menthene, and menthane, 403. Pinene, borneol, and camphor, 403. The cholesterols, 404. CHAPTER XXII The Alkaloids (230-239) 406-410 Piperine, 406. Coniine, 406. Nicotine, 407. Hygrine, 408. Atropine and hyoscy amine, 408. Cocaine, 409. Cinchonine, 410. Strychnine, 410. Morphine, 410. Pa- paverine, 410. Narcotine, narceine, and laudanosine, 410. CHAPTER XXIII Organic Arsenic Compounds (240-242) .... 411-413 Cacodylic acid and cacodyl oxide, 411. Arrhenal, 412. Atoxyl, 412. Salvarsan, 413. Arsenobenzene, 414. Table of Contents xiii CHAPTER XXIV The Proteins (243). 414-416 The physical properties of the proteins, 414. Nature of the "peptide" union, 415. Di-, tri-, tetra-, etc., peptides, 415. Yields of indiyidual amino acids by 'various proteins, 416. The conjugated proteins, 416. ORGANIC CHEMISTRY FOE STUDENTS OF MEDICINE THE FATTY COMPOUNDS CHAPTER I THE SATURATED HYDROCARBONS 1. The simplest of the compounds composed of carbon and hydrogen is methane, CH*. The compounds con- taining only these two elements are called hydrocarbons. It occurs widely distributed in nature, in the gases evolved from volcanoes, and in those which escape from coal mines, where it is called fire damp, and as the principal constituent of natural gas. Coal gas contains consider- able amounts of this compound (30-40%), since it results from the destructive distillation of many kinds of or- ganic matter. Methane also results from the degradation of vegetable matter, especially cellulose, by certain kinds of microorganisms. In this way it is produced by the fermentation of vegetable tissues under water in marshes, and derived its older name of marsh gas^'m. this way. It is an ever present constituent of the gases in the intestines and is normally found in small amounts in the respired air, some of the methane produced by fermentation in the intestines being absorbed into the circulation and eliminated through the lungs. 2 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Preparation : (a) When a mixture of carbon monoxide and hydrogen is passed through a tube containing reduced nickel, heated to 200° C, there is produced methane and water : CO + 3 H 2 = CH* + H 2 (b) At somewhat higher temperatures (230°-300° C.) carbon dioxide is likewise reduced by hydrogen in the presence of finely divided nickel, the latter undergoing no change: C02 + 4 H 2 = CH4 + 2 H 2 (c) Hydrogen sulphide and ' carbon disulphide, when passed through a tube containing heated copper, react to form copper sulphide and methane : 2 H 2 S + CS 2 + 4 Cu = 4 CuS + CH4 Other methods will be described for the formation of methane from certain of its derivatives later. Properties : Methane is a colorless and odorless gas. Its specific gravity is 0.559, air being taken as 1. When subjected to a pressure of 140 atmospheres it liquefies at 0° C. Its boiling point is -162° C. and it solidifies at -186° C. The electric sparks from an induction coil de- compose methane into carbon, which is deposited as a black soot, and hydrogen gas. The strongest oxidizing agents, such as nitric and chromic acids, scarcely attack it, and concentrated sulphuric acid and alkalies have no action upon it. It is therefore one of the most stable and inert of chemical compounds. On being led through a red-hot tube it is split up in part into its elements, The Fatty Compounds 3 carbon and hydrogen, but in part forms more complex hydrocarbons containing carbon chains, which will be described later (6). It burns with a faintly luminous flame. When mixed with air or oxygen it forms a vio- lently explosive mixture, carbon dioxide and water being formed: CH4 + 2 Ok- CQi + 2 H,0 This is the reaction which occurs when the fire damp of mines explodes. 2. Formation of Derivatives of Methane. — Chlorine or bromine react with methane forming respectively chlor and brom methanes. Methane mixed with chlorine is easily exploded. If two atoms of chlorine (one mole- cule) be present in the mixture for each molecule of me- thane, the following products represent the principal reaction : ^ + ^ = ^^ + HQ Methyl chloride The methane molecule less one H atom is known as the methyl group or radical. Methyl chloride is, a colorless gas of a pleasant ethereal odor which boils at -23.7° C. It is slightly soluble in water (4 volumes in 1 of H 2 0) and can be easily freed from hydrochloric acid by washing. Methyl chloride is used for producing low temperatures artificially. When strongly compressed the volume of the gas is greatly decreased and it becomes hot. If it is cooled as it is compressed until it is under a great pressure and is at the ordinary tempera- ture, and is then relieved of its pressure, it expands again and its temperature falls far below the surroundings. 4 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Water in contact with pipes in which the expansion is allowed to take place is frozen. Methyl chloride is a good solvent for the ethereal oils and is employed for extracting the odors from flowers. Its extraordinary volatility makes it possible to separate the solvent from the extracted odorous substances, which are themselves very volatile. Methyl chloride may also be called chlormethane. Either of these names gives an idea of the nature of the substance and from what mother substance it is derived. The chlorine atom in methyl chloride behaves very dif- ferently from* that in the halides of the metals. The latter give with silver nitrate a precipitate of silver halide. Methyl chloride gives a precipitate of silver chloride only very slowly when left long in contact with silver nitrate in solution. This difference in behavior is due to the fact that in solutions of the metallic halides the chlorine is dissociated from the metal to a considerable extent as chlorine ion : NaCl^Na++ Cl- in the dissociated condition the chlorine ion carries a charge of negative electricity, and when a current of elec- tricity is passed through a solution of sodium chloride the Na + ion migrates to the negative pole and the CI - ion to the positive pole, thus transporting the charges which they carry. They are therefore conductors of electricity. Methyl chloride is not appreciably ionized when in solu- tion, and does not therefore conduct the electric current. Its low rate of reactivity with AgN0 3 is also the result of The Fatty Compounds 5 its nearly undissociated condition. In general molecules do not react with each other, but chemical change is usually the result of the property of compounds which causes them to dissociate into simpler parts which are in a much more active state chemically than the molecule from which they were formed. Since methyl chloride does react very slowly with AgN0 3 it is believed by many chemists to be in a very slight degree dissociated. A compound such as CH*, in which all the valences of each of the atoms it contains are saturated, should theo- retically show no tendency to react with other chemical substances. The reason why, e.g., chlorine does react with methane is best explained by the theory elaborated by Nef, which postulates a very slight dissociation of methane into methylene and hydrogen : CH4^CH 2 + \ H These components are in dynamic equilibrium with each other. This means that any agent which removes one of the dissociation products will induce the further dissocia- tion of a part of the CH4 molecules to maintain certain relationships with respect to the three components of the system. Only the dissociation products are active chemi- cally so that the speed of reaction will be determined by the degree of dissociation of the methane. This is greater at higher temperatures than at lower, so that reactions of this sort are greatly accelerated by heat. According to this theory the reaction of methane with chlorine takes place in the following way : 6 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine CH*: / *CH 2 \ Methylene H H CI H H + 1 ; 1 + 1=1+1 H H CI CI CI / H / CI . CH 2 + I = CH3CI; CH 2 + I = CH 2 C1 2 \ CI \ CI Methyl Methylene chloride chloride (chlormethane) (dichlormethane) Simultaneously some of the active methylene groups should theoretically react with each other forming molecules with two carbon atoms, etc. This theory is in accord with the observed facts, viz. that the reaction of methane with chlorine does not lead to the formation of a single prod- uct, but of several products simultaneously. In repre- senting the reactions between organic compounds among themselves and with inorganic substances, the equation written represents the principal reaction only. Further evidence in support of this belief will be presented later. 3. The Geometrical Structure of Methane. — The ex- perience of many chemists has shown that the relationship which exists be- tween the very numerous organic com- pounds can be expressed in a very useful way by assuming that the atoms which make up the molecules occupy definite relations to each other in space. The carbon atom is conceived to have its four affinities directed toward the angles of a regular four-sided figure (tetrahedron), the C atom it- self occupying the center (Fig. 1). Fig. The Fatty Compounds Methane is expressed by the spatial formula shown in Figure 2, the hydrogen atoms forming a system of satellites Fig. 2 Fig. 3 about the C atom which may be likened to the sun and the planets of the solar system. Chlormethane or methyl chloride is represented by the structure in Figure 3. H H l H-C-H I H (6) CH 4 (d) This formula is, however, so cumbersome to write that in ordinary practice it is not employed. Figure 4 shows the various types of simplified figures employed to describe the carbon atom and its many derivatives produced by the 8 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine substitution of its hydrogen atoms by other elements or complexes. Of these symbols CH4 is employed in all ordinary cases in writing formulae. It is known as the empirical formula, the geometrical arrangement being employed only for special demonstration. The student should accustom himself to visualize the spatial formulae. Now in Figure 2 each of the four hydrogen atoms occu- pies the same relative position with respect to the C atom and it should make no difference whether, in making chlormethane, we substitute one hydrogen atom, or an- other, by the chlorine. The methyl chloride should have the same configuration in each case, which is equivalent to saying that only one methyl chloride is possible. This is in accord with experience. No matter how methyl chloride be prepared, and there are several methods for its preparation, the product always has the same specific gravity, boiling point, and other physical properties. In assigning four valences to carbon, it should be borne in mind that there is one very common compound, carbon monoxide, CO, in which carbon must exist in the divalent state, or with two of its valences polarized or latent. In a number of its compounds carbon shows a marked tendency to pass from the tetravalent into the divalent state, or vice versa. This is seen in the relation between carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide (also called carbonic oxide). At ordinary temperatures CO2 is a stable gas, but under the influence of the silent electrical ' discharge it tends to change into CO + O. Carbon monoxide on the other The Fatty Compounds 9 hand can readily add on certain elements, as chlorine, and pass back into the tetravalent state. CO+O =C02 CO + Cl 2 = COCl 2 Garbonyl chloride The latter reaction takes place very slowly in the dark, but is greatly accelerated by sunlight. Most organic substances exhibit this tendency to pass in some degree into labile active forms. 4. If in a mixture of methane and chlorine the latter is present in excess two, three, or four hydrogen atoms are substituted by chlorine. These are called dichlor, trichlor, and tetrachlor methane,, respectively. Since the group CH2 is termed methylene (2), dichlormethane is sometimes called methylene chloride. Trichlormethane is chloroform, a familiar substance employed as an anesthetic. Tetra- chlormethane is familiarly known as carbon tetrachloride. It is much employed as a solvent for fats and oils, and is used in the dry cleaning of clothes. Its action is to dis- solve the grease from spots and when the latter is removed from the fabric the dirt which adhered to the grease readily separates. Both chloroform and carbon tetra- chloride are non-inflammable. There are bromine and iodine substitution products of methane, entirely analogous to the chlorine compounds. Some of these are of great interest and value in synthetic work. While chlorine reacts with methane at ordinary temperatures, forming substitution products and hydro- chloric acid, bromine must be heated in a sealed tube before 10 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine any reaction will take place, and iodine will not react with methane, even under pressure and at high temperatures, to form substitution products. 5. Methyl Iodide. — For the preparation of the iodine derivatives advantage is taken of the greater affinity of the v mono- and divalent metals for chlorine than has the methyl radical, thus : CH3CI + KI = CH3I + KC1 Methyl iodide Methyl iodide is a heavy liquid with a pleasant ethereal odor, boiling at 43° C. Its specific gravity is 2. 19. It is so unstable that on keeping it decomposes, setting free iodine. 6. Ethane, C 2 H 6 . PIT \ Zinc methyl: „„ /Zn is a derivative of methane which is formed when methyl iodide is warmed with a mixture of zinc and copper in a powdered form. The reaction may be represented as follows : CH3I + Zn = CH 3 — Zn— I 2CH3— Zn— I = Znl 2 + cH)> Zn Zinc methyl is a colorless liquid boiling at 46° C, which is so unstable that it explodes when exposed to the oxygen of the air. It is therefore a highly reactive substance and can be used to build up synthetically other hydrocarbons from methane. Zinc methyl reacts readily with methyl iodide to form ethane : £5 3 \Zn + CH3J = Znl 2 + 2 CHa-CH* ^-tl3/ CH3I Ethane The Fatty Compounds 11 It can also be prepared by the reaction of Wurtz and Fittig, in which methyl iodide is allowed to react with metallic sodium : 2 CH3I + 2 Na = CH3— CHs + 2 Nal Certain metallic derivatives of methane and ethane are of biological importance. Animals poisoned with tellu- rium or selenium compounds eliminate in the breath di- methyl telluride CH3 — Te — -CH3 and dimethyl selenide CH3 — Se — CH3 respectively. These possess characteristic odors, that of dimethyl telluride resembling garlic. The organism is thus capable of employing the methyl radical to combine with these toxic elements in order to produce volatile derivatives which can be eliminated. Dimethyl telluride is a heavy yellow oil which boils at 82°. Dimethyl selenide is a liquid. When certain molds, especially Penicillium brevicaule, are grown upon media containing arsenic, they produce volatile diethyl arsine, ~fi 8 J^J >AsH, which has a garlic-like odor. CH.3 — L/XI2/ The test is so delicate that even 0.00001 gram of arsenic can be detected with certainty. It is through the agency of such molds that poisoning with arsenic has resulted from the use of wall paper printed with arsenic-containing pigments. From its method of formation ethane is therefore believed to be made up of a methane molecule in which one hydro- gen atom is substituted by a methyl group. Its structure Note. — Unless otherwise specified all temperatures refer to the Centigrade scale. 12 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine is assumed to be that shown in Figure 5 (a) and (b), but for simplicity the formulae (c), (d), or (e) are employed. Ethane may be regarded as methyl methane and is occasionally spoken of as dimethyl. It is a colorless and odorless gas which is liquefied at 4° by 46 atmospheres pressure. It is slightly more soluble than methane in water and alcohol. It occurs with methane in natural gas and is present in petroleum.' The property of the carbon atom of combining with other carbon atoms in a very firm union to form carbon chains *^A* H I H-C-H CH S „ ■ I I C 2 H 6 H-C-H CH. I 3 H H H ih\ H (6) (c) Fig. 5. (rf) (O is unique among the elements. Ethane and its homologues are very stable substances and very resistant to reagents; Ethyl chloride, CH3 — CH 2 C1, can be prepared by the action of chlorine on ethane : CH 3 — CH 3 + 2C1 = CH 3 — CH 2 C1 + HC1 The ethane molecule less one hydrogen atom is called the ethyl radical or group. Methyl, ethyl, and their higher homologues are frequently called alkyl radicals or groups, and their halogen derivatives alkyl halides. The Fatty Compounds 13 Ethyl chloride is a sweet-smelling liquid boiling at 12.5°. In a manner entirely analogous to the forma- tion of methyl iodide, ethyl iodide can be produced from the chloride : CHs— CH.C1.+ KI = CH3— CH 2 I + KC1 Ethyl iodide Ethyl iodide boils at 72°. It can react with methyl iodide to produce a hydrocarbon containing three carbon atoms, called propane : CHs— CH 2 I + CHal + 2Na = CH3— CH 2 — CH 3 Propane This synthesis can also be effected by the action of zinc methyl on ethyl iodide : CH3 Ny ICH2 CH3 CH3' CH 2 CH3 ">Zn + + Znl 2 CHs/^ ICH 2 — CH3 CH3 — CH 2 — CH3 If metallic sodium be allowed to act on ethyl iodide, two ethyl radicals are combined to form butane : CH3— CH 2 I + ICH 2 — CH3 = CH3— CH 2 — CH 2 — CH 3 Butane Since it will be necessary later to speak of the dihalogen derivatives of ethane in illustrating, the structure of certain compounds (aldehydes), mention should here be made of the nomenclature of these. When two of the hydrogen atoms of ethane are replaced by halogen, two compounds are possible according to whether the halogen atoms are attached to the same or to different carbon atoms. 14 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine CH 2 C1 CH3 I and I CH 2 C1 CHC1 2 Ethylene Ethylidene, chloride chloride The symmetrical isomer is distinguished by the ending ene and the unsymmetrical isomer by the ending idene pre- ceded by the prefix denoting the hydrocarbon from which it was derived. Compounds of this class will be con- sidered later (31). 7. Starting with methane, therefore, it is possible to build up a series of hydrocarbons each differing from the next lower one by a CH 2 group. Their formulae, CH4, C 2 H 6 , C3H8, C4H10, C5H12, C 6 Hh, etc., all correspond to the general ex- pression C„H 2i h- 2 . i They have the general name of saturated hydrocarbons, because all the valences of the carbon atoms not holding other carbon atoms are saturated with hydro- gen, so that they cannot take up any more of the latter. Nomenclature. — The saturated hydrocarbons are de- signated by the termination " ane." Methane, ethane, pro- pane, and butane, have special names. The higher ones are denoted by the Greek or Latin numeral signifying the number of carbon atoms they contain. Thus, C 6 Hi4 is called hexane ; Ci H 22 , decane ; Ci 6 H 3 4, hexadecane ; etc. The groups of atoms which are derived from the. hydro- carbons, by the removal of a hydrogen atom are termed alkyl groups ; they are denoted by changing, the ending " ane " to " yl." Thus CH 3 — , is methyl ; C 2 H 6 — , ethyl ; C3H5 — , propyl; C4H9 — , butyl; etc. Properties of the paraffins. The compounds of this series containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms are gases ; those The Fatty Compounds 15 with 5 to 16 carbon atoms, liquids at ordinary temperatures and pressures; while those having more than 16 carbon atoms in the molecule are solids. Members containing from 1 to 60 carbon atoms are actually known. 8. Crude Petroleum, which occurs in nature in enor- mous quantities, consists of a mixture of all the members of the series from the lowest to the highest. When distilled the lower members volatilize first, the temperature in the still rising as the distillation proceeds. The lightest fraction which is collected distills at 0° and consists of gases, chiefly butane, which are liquefied under pressure and employed for the production of cold by evaporation. As a rule the distillate is collected until the product coming over has a specific gravity of .729. This is reached at a temperature of about 150°, at which point chiefly nonane and decane distill. All the product so obtained is known as crude naphtha. This is redistilled and separated into rhigolene B. P. 18°, petfoleum ether or naphtha B. P. 50-60, containing chiefly CsH^ and C 6 Hu; benzine B. P. 70- 90°, chiefly C 6 H M and C 7 Hi 6 ; ligroin B. P. 90-120°, and petroleum benzine B. P. 120-150°, chiefly mixtures of C 7 Hi6 and C 8 H 18 . From 150-300° there is collected the "burning oil distillate," which is redistilled into several grades of kerosene. The safety of these oils depends on their volatility, for their vapors mixed with air form explosive mixtures. Their use is attended with consider- able danger. The quality of the product is determined by the flash point said "burning point." These are deter- mined by heating a sample in a dish and at intervals bring- ing a small flame near the surface. When vapors are 16 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine given off rapidly enough to form a combustible mixture, there is a flash, which is at once extinguished. At a higher temperature vapors are given off rapidly enough to support a flame.' This is known as the burning point. Most states require a flash point of at least 110° F. and a burning point of 110 to 150° F. Above 300° F. there are distilled various grades of lubricating oils. From the residues vaseline and paraffin are separated, the latter by chilling. The physical constants of a number of the normal hydrocarbons are given below : Table I Melting Point Boiling Point Specific Gravity CH4 Methane -184° - 164° .415 at 16.4° C2I16 Ethane - 172.1 -84.1 .446 C3I18 Propane -45 -44.5 .535 40° C4H10 Butane — - 1 .600 C5H12 Pentane — 36.3 .454 CeHi4 Hexane — 69 .660 C7H16 Heptane — 98.3 .683 at 20° CsHis Octane — 125.8 .702 C16H34 Hexadecane 18 287 .775 C17H36 Heptadecane 22 303 .777 C18H38 Octadecane 28 317 .777 C27H 5 6 Heptacosane 60 270 .780 At the M. P. C31H64 Hentriacontane 68 302 At .781 C32H66 Dotriacontane 70 310 f 15 mm. .781 C35H72 Pentatriacon- pressure tane 75 331 .782 The Fatty Compounds 17 9. Isomerism. — Just as in the case of methane, there is but one substance known having the formula CH4, so there is but one compound having the formula C 2 H 6 (ethane), and one having the formula C 3 H 8 (propane). Butane, C4H10, however, exists in two forms. They have the same percentage composition with respect to carbon and hydrogen, and the same molecular weight, but differ in their boiling points and specific gravities. Both are H H H I l I H-C-H H-C-H H-C-H I I I H-C-H H-C-H H-C-Cl I I I H-C-H H-C-H H-C-H I I I H CI H A (a) (6) (c) id) Fig. 6. gases, but one is liquefied at — 1° while the other remains a gas until cooled to — 17°. The existence of two or more compounds having the same chemical formula but different physical properties is explained by the structural formulas. Thus while all the hydrogen atoms in methane and ethane are alike with respect to the remainder of the molecule ; in propane and butane and the higher homologues this is not the case, as is illustrated in Figure 6. If in (b) a chlorine atom should be substituted for a hydrogen atom, the same chlor propane or propyl chloride should result whichever one of the hydrogen atoms attached to either end carbon atom might be replaced, 18 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine but a different compound should result provided the chlorine should be substituted for a hydrogen attached to the middle carbon atom. This C atom differs from the two end ones in that two of its valences are in union with A Y Normal butane Isobutane H ,1 H-C-H I H-C-H H-C-H I . H-C-H I H Normal butane (methyl-ethyl- methane) H I H-C-H I - H-C-CH 3 I H-C-H I H Isobutane (trimethyl methane) Fig. 7. methyl groups, while the others are each linked to carbon by only one bond. Theory calls therefore for only one propane, and only one is known, while it calls for two mono-chlor propanes and both of these are known. Nor- mal propyl chloride, CH 3 — CH 2 — CH 2 CI, abbreviated The Fatty Compounds 19 n-pfopyl chloride, boils at 46.4°, while isopropyl chloride, CH3— CHC1— CH3, boils at 36.5°. We should expect in the case of butane two forms corre- sponding to the propyl chlorides, the methyl group occupy- ing the position of the chlorine atoms (Fig. 7). Isobutane consists of a branched chain of carbon atoms, normal butane does not. Such a difference in structure is called isomerism and the compounds so related are isomers. Normal butane may be looked upon as methyl- ethyl-methane, since two hydrogens are respectively substituted by a methyl and an ethyl radical. Three pentanes should exist if our theory of structure is correct and as a matter of fact three are known : CH3 CH3 CH3 I \/ CH2 CH CH3 CH3 I I \ / CH 2 CH 2 >C< CH2 CH3 CH3 CH3 I CH 3 n-pentane (methyl- Dimethyl-ethyl- Tetramethyl-methane propyl-methane) methane The boiling points of the normal hydrocarbons are always higher than those of the isomers, and the boiling point becomes continuously lowered the more the carbon chain is branched, i.e. the more the methyl groups are gathered together in the molecule. The constitution of the hydrocarbons of the paraffin series can be arrived at only by their synthetical formation 20 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine from simpler ones of known structure. Thus, by the Wurtz reaction one molecule of normal propyl iodide and one of ethyl iodide can yield one molecule of normal pentane (1) ; one molecule of isopropyl iodide and one of ethyl iodide can yield dimethyl-ethyl-methane (2) ; and from one of the isobutyl iodides and methyl iodide are obtained tetramethyl methane (3) : (1) CH3— CH 2 — CH 2 I + ICH 2 — CH 3 + 2 Na = CH 3 — CH 2 — CH 2 — CH 2 — CH3 + 2 Nal CH 3 (2) \cHI + ICH 2 — CH 3 + 2 Na CH3 CH 3 \ >CH— CH 2 — CH 3 + 2 Nal CHsX CH 3 I CH 3 CH 3 \ / \ / (3) >C< +ICH3+2Na= \c< / \ / \ CH3 CH 3 CH 3 CH 3 The number of possible isomers increases very rapidly with increasing carbon atoms. The following table shows the number theoretically possible for some of them : Number of Isomeks Hexane C 6 Hi 4 5 Decane Ci H 22 75 Heptane C 7 Hi 6 9 Undecane CnH 24 159 Octane C 8 Hi 8 18 Dodecane Ci 2 H 2 6 354 Nonane C 9 H 20 35 Tridecane Ci 3 H 28 802 The Fatty Compounds 21 Most of these compounds have never been prepared because they are not of sufficient importance to induce chemists to give the necessary effort. The methods of forming them are well understood and it is quite possible to produce large numbers of them synthetically. 10. A carbon atom which is only linked to one other carbon atom is called primary ; one which is linked to two carbon atoms is secondary ; one linked to three is tertiary ; and to four, quaternary. When situated at the end of a chain a carbon atom is called terminal. The carbon atoms of a chain are designated by numbers, the terminal one being denoted by 1, the next by 2, etc., for example : CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — CH2 — CH2 ••• 12 3 4 5 Frequently the longer chains are written CH3 — (CH2)„ — CH3. The terminal carbon atom is frequently denoted by &>, the Greek letter omega, the next by « (alpha) and the succeeding ones by /3, 7, etc. Methane and its homo- logues are collectively spoken of as the methane series, or the paraffin hydrocarbons. 11. The assumption that the four valences of the carbon atom are directed toward the angles of a regular tetrahe- dron does not necessitate regarding their positions with respect to each other as fixed. There is good reason to believe that they may revolve around a position of equi- librium without changing the order of succession. • CHAPTER II THE ALCOHOLS 12. The Monatomic Alcohols. — When methyl chloride, bromide, or iodide is warmed with water, halogen acid and a new substance, methyl alcohol, are formed. It may be looked upon as water in which one H atom is replaced by the CH3 radical. CH3CI + HOH = CH3OH + HC1 Methyl alcohol Its synthetic formation has only a scientific interest, for in practice it is always obtained as a by-product of wood distillation. The alcohols and the corresponding alkyl halides are in general mutually transformable into each other. Thus on treatment with phosphorus pentachloride the alcohols are converted into alkyl chlorides, the OH group being replaced by CI : CH 3 — CH 2 OH + PCI5 = CH3.— CH 2 C1 ■ + POCl 3 + HC1 Phosphorus oxy chloride It is customary in illustrating reactions which, like this one, are characteristic of a series by employing the symbol R in place of the alkyl group attached to carbinol, as : R— CH 2 OH + PC1 5 = R— CH 2 C1 + P0C1 3 + HC1 22 The Alcohols 23 Methyl alcohol is known as wood alcohol because it is produced when wood is heated out of contact with the oxy- gen of the air to a temperature sufficient to decompose it. Properties. The methyl alcohol of commerce is obtained in this way. It is a colorless liquid which is neutral in reaction ; that is, it does not dissociate H + or OH - ions, a fact which is shown by its failure to act on indicators such as litmus, or to conduct the electric current. It is soluble in water in all proportions, has a burning taste, and boils at 64.5°. Methyl alcohol is the lowest member of a homologous series of alcohols derived from the hydrocarbons of the methane series, the second member being ethyl alcohol CH3— CH 2 OH. 13. Nomenclature of the Alcohols. — Certain of the more common alcohols have received special names which they retain as the result of long usage. In the systematic nomenclature usually employed they are regarded as derivatives of carbinol or methyl alcohol. This system is of especial utility in indicating the structures of the isomeric alcohols. Thus ethyl alcohol is methyl carbinol, CH 3 CH 2 OH, and the two primary butyl al- cohols are propyl carbinol and isppropyl carbinol. Further examples are given in connection with the amyl alcohols (20). Another system of nomenclature which is frequently employed is that of using the name of the hydrocarbon with the same number of carbon atoms and employing the suffix -ol to indicate the alcohol. Thus methyl alcohol is methanol; ethyl alcohol, ethanol; etc. 24 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine The relationship of the first five alcohols to the cor- responding hydrocarbons is illustrated by the following formulae : Methyl alcohol Ethyl alcohol CH3OH CH 3 — CH 2 OH Methanol, carbinol. Ethanol, methyl car- binol. Propyl alcohol CH 3 — CH 2 — CH 2 OH Propanol, ethyl car- binol. ?i-Butyl alcohol Isobutyl alcohol CH 3 — (CH 2 )2CH 2 OH >CH— CH2OH CH 3 / Butanol, ?i-Propyl car- la inol. Isobutanol, Isopropyl carbinol. n-Pentyl alcohol (Amyl alcohol) CH 3 — (CH 2 ) 3 — CH 2 OH ra-Pentanol, ra-Butyl carbinol. 14. Ethyl Alcohol, ethanol, methyl carbinol. — This is the ordinary alcohol obtained by fermentation of sugar by yeasts. It occurs in all fermented liquids such as wine and beer. It is made chiefly from potatoes, grains, and molasses. The starch is converted into sugar and the latter into alcohol and carbon dioxide. The chemical reactions involved in this process will be described in con- nection with the fermentation of sugars (164). Ethyl alcohol is prepared technically by distilling fer- mented solutions. It is a liquid of agreeable odor, which boils at 78° ; and although the fermented liquids never contain more than 18% of alcohol, by carrying out the distillation in a fractionating column alcohol of 84 to 90% strength may be obtained. The fractionating column is an apparatus in which a relatively large cooling surface is offered and a considerable time is allowed for the condensation of the less volatile liquid. There are The Alcohols 25 ordinarily placed in the vapors ascending from the still, obstructions such as glass beads or platinum gauze, to retard their escape, thus giving greater opportunity for the condensation of the higher boiling liquid of the mixture, which then runs back into the still. The lower boiling constituent escapes condensation and passes over into the receiver. On redistilling the alcohol thus obtained in an efficient rectifying apparatus a product containing but 4% of water is obtained. This strength of alcohol is much used in the arts as a solvent. Absolute alcohol is obtained by treating 96 % alcohol with quicklime, which removes the water, forming calcium hydrate, Ca(OH) 2 . The alcohol is then rectified again. The product so obtained contains about .5 % of water. This is the commercial absolute alcohol. Pure absolute alcohol is obtained by treating the latter with a small amount of metallic sodium or calcium and distilling again. Traces of water in alcohol can be readily detected by placing in it a small amount of copper sulphate from which the water of crystallization has been driven off by heating. This is a white powder. The anhydrous CuSC>4 takes up even very slight traces of water from the alcohol and forms the deep blue hydrated salt. Among inorganic substances alcohol dissolves the halo- gens, sulphur and phosphorus to some extent, boracic acid, the hydrates of potassium and sodium, the chlorides of calcium and strontium, ferric chloride and mercuric chloride. It is also a solvent for many organic acids, bases, and neutral substances, the resins, soaps, and fats. Alco- 26 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine holic solutions of substances employed in medicine are called essences, spirits, and tinctures. Certain proteins of the cereal grains readily dissolve in 70 % alcohol, but most proteins are precipitated from their solutions by alcohol. For use in the arts alcohol is now sold without the pay- ment of the internal revenue tax which is levied on all alcoholic beverages. Such alcohol to be tax free must be denatured or rendered unfit for drinking by the addition of poisonous and distasteful substances. The regulations of the United Stated Commissioner of Internal Revenue prescribe the addition of 10 parts of methyl alcohol and 1 part of benzine to each 100 parts of alcohol. Another formula which may be used requires the addition of 2 parts of wood alcohol and 1 or 2 parts of pyridine. , Ethyl alcohol is widely distributed in nature. Small amounts of it are found in the distillate from leaves, flowers, in the ethereal oils, and in humus-rich soil. Traces occur in bread made with yeast. Very small amounts are regularly found in the blood and tissues of animals. Indeed there are strong reasons for believing that in the destruction of sugar through the normal physiological processes, ethyl alcohol is an intermediate product. 15. The Alcoholates. — Metallic sodium reacts with great energy on .alcohol, forming sodium ethylate and hydrogen : C 2 H 6 OH + Na = C 2 H 5 ONa + H Sodium ethylate is readily soluble in alcohol and forms a crystalline compound C 2 H 5 ONa + 2C 2 H 6 OH. This loses its alcohol at 200°, leaving the sodium ethylate as a white powder. It is very useful in synthetic work. The Alcohols 27 Potassium acts violently on alcohol, forming potassium ethylate. 16. Alcoholic Beverages. — There are two classes of alcoholic beverages in use: those which are the direct product of fermentation by yeast ; and those which are prepared by distilling the fermented liquid, as molasses or extracts, prepared by conversion of the starches of certain grains, potatoes, etc., into sugar, and dissolving out the latter. The undistilled beverages contain much less alcohol than the distilled. Beer is prepared by fermenting malted (i.e. sprouted) grains. It contains 3 to 5 per cent of alcohol and derives its bitter taste from the addition of an infusion of hops. Wine and champagne are fermented fruit juices, prin- cipally grape juice. As fermented, a beverage never con- tains more than about 15 to 18 per cent of alcohol, but wines are frequently " fortified " by the addition of alco- hol to a content of 20 %. Whiskey is prepared by the fermentation of malted grains. After the fermentation by yeast is completed, the product is distilled and the distillate condensed. Ordina- rily it is twice distilled and water is added to the distillate to make a solution containing about 50 to 58 % of alcohol by volume. Brandy is made by distilling wines or fermented peach, apple, or other juices. Its alcohol content varies from 44 to 55 %. Gin is whiskey which has been distilled with aromatic substances such as juniper berries, anise seed, etc., which give it its peculiar flavor. 28 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Rum is made from fermented molasses. It not infre- quently contains enough of the higher alcohols, butyl and amyl alcohols and their esters, to render it more toxic than ordinary whiskey prepared from grains. 17. Higher Homologues of Ethyl Alcohol. — CH 4 CH 3 — CH 3 CH3— CH 2 — CH 3 Methane Ethane Propane CH 3 — OH CH 3 — CH 2 OH CH 3 — CH 2 —CH 2 OH Methyl alcohol Ethyl alcohol Propyl alcohol CH3 (CH^ CH3 CH3 (CH2) 3 CH3 Butane Pentane CH 3 — (CH 2 ) 2 — CH 2 OH CH3— (CH 2 ) 3 — CH 2 OH Butyl alcohol Amyl alcohol Being derived from the hydrocarbons of the C„H 2n+2 series by the replacement of H by OH these alcohols have the general formula C„H 2n+ iOH. Those derived from the normal hydrocarbons are normal alcohols. If the OH group is attached to an end carbon atom it is known as a primary; if to a secondary carbon atom, a secondary; and if to a tertiary carbon atom, a tertiary alcohol. Those derived from branched chain hydrocarbons are iso alco- hols, and may be primary or secondary : CH 3 — CH 2 — CH 2 OH CH 3 — CH(OH)— CH 3 Primary propyl alcohol (normal) Secondary propyl alcohol (iaopropyl alcohol) 18. The Butyl Alcohols. — C4H9OH. Specific Boiling Gbavitt Point at 20° 1. CH3— CH 2 — CH 2 — CH 2 OH 117° .810 Normal butyl alcohol (primary) (Propyl carbinol) The Alcohols 29 2. CHs v >CH— CH 2 OH 107° .806 CH3 Isobutyl alcohol (primary) (Isopropyl carbinol) 3. CH3— CH 2 \ >CHOH 100° .808 CH 3 /. Normal secondary butyl alcohol (Methyl ethyl carbinol) 4. CHsX CH3— ^COH 83° .786 CHs/ Tertiary butyl alcohol (Trimethyl carbinol) Normal primary butyl alcohol occurs in fusel oil to a small extent, but has little biological importance. It is produced, together with a number of other products, by Bacillus butylicus, growing on glycerin and various sugars and related substances (see butyric acid fermentation, 164). The most important butyl alcohol is isopropyl carbinol. It is produced by yeasts during fermentation of sugar into ethyl alcohol and carbon dioxide. It has its origin not from sugar, but from one of the protein digestion products, valin. It is formed in relatively large amounts when potatoes are malted and fermented by yeasts, be- cause the mother substance valin (73) is present in greater amount than in the malted grains. 30 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine The remaining two butyl alcohols have been prepared synthetically, but do not occur in nature. Physiological properties. — The butyl alcohols are all distinctly poisonous both to plants and animals. The toxic action of monatomic alcohols increases with higher carbon content and with increasing molecular weight. This is the Rule of Richardson. The normal primary al- cohol is more toxic than isopropyl carbinol, and the latter is more toxic than secondary and tertiary butyl alcohols. 19. The Amyl Alcohols. — s a §*« !<2 M ^ 1. Normal primary CH 3 -CH 2 -CH 2 -CH 2 -CH 2 OH 138° .817 (butyl carbinol) 2. Isobutyl carbinol r -rr \ (primary) £J£ ^CH-CH 2 -CH 2 OH 130° .810 , (Active amyl alcohol) 3. Secondary butyl CH3\ CH _ CH20H 12g0 gl6 carbinol (primary) CH3 — Cti 2 / 4. Tertiary butyl §Js^C-CH 2 OH 113° - carbmol (primary) p-rr / CH 3 5. Methyl propyl ^>CHOH 119° — carbinol (secondary) CH3— CH 2 — CH 2 CH 3v 6. Methyl isopropyl CH 3 \ ^CHOH 112° .819 carbinol (second- /QH ary) CH3' CH-CH, CH3— CH2/ V 7. Diethyl carbinol >CHOH 117° — The Alcohols 31 OH *. 8. Dimethyl ethyl gh^C-OH 102° - carbinol (tertiary) „„ _prT / The only two -amyl alcohols which are of any great im- portance in biological processes are primary isobutyl carbinol and secondary butyl carbinol. These both occur in fusel oil through the life processes of yeasts, and, like isobutyl alco- hol, are derived from the cleavage products of proteins (75). Physiological Properties. — All have disagreeable smells and produce headache. Normal amyl alcohol is about four times as toxic as ethyl alcohol. A .5 % solution quickly destroys infusoria, and a 1 % solution kills algae within a day. In dilutions as great as .1 % certain bac- teria can use it as a source of carbon. A saturated (2.5 %) solution of isoamyl alcohol exerts a powerful bactericidal action. The toxicity of the amyl alco- hols is distinctly greater than that of the lower members of the series. A ^n solution is as destructive to B. pyogenes as a Tsn solution of butyl, a T^n solution of propyl, a l^n solution of ethyl, and a 2-J-ra solution of methyl alcohol. 20. Isomerism of the Amyl Alcohols. — One of the amyl alcohols, secondary butyl carbinol, also called active or fermentation amyl alcohol, presents a very interesting case of isomerism. Three isomers of this one alcohol are known, but they have all the same chemical and, with a single exception, the same physical properties. This exception is found in their action on polarized light. The ray of polarized light may be likened to a ribbon of light, as con- trasted with a ray of ordinary light the waves of which are vibrating in every direction at right angles to the path 32 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine of the ray. In the polarized ray the vibrations all lie in the same plane. When such a ray is passed into either of two of these amyl alcohols the ray is rotated by one of them to the right and by the other to the left. One is said to be dextrorotatory, the other levorotatory. The third pro- duces no rotation at all. Two are said to be optically active ; the other, inactive. The effect is as if the ray had received .a twist in passing through the optically active substance. Now these two active isomers when treated with gaseous HI are transformed into two optically active amyl iodides, and the inactive one into an amyl iodide which is not optically active. CH 3 \ r /H CIV^XCHaOH CH3 — CH; + HI CH 3 H > >C< + H 2 CH 3 — CH 2 CH 2 I The amyl iodides, like the alcohols from which they were derived, have identical chemical and, except in their be- havior toward polarized light, the same physical properties. Suppose we consider the iodide which is derived from levo- rotatory amyl alcohol, which is the important one from the biological standpoint. If it be converted into pentane by the action of nascent hydrogen, which removes the iodine, replacing it by H, there results a pentane which is optically inactive : CH 3 \ /H +2H CH 3 \ /H >< ^— > >C< CH 3 — CH 2 / \CH 2 I CH 3 — CH 2 / \CH 3 Active Inactive The Alcohols 33 On the other hand, if this iodide is caused to react with ethyl iodide in the presence of sodium, there is produced a heptane which is optically active : CHlN >c< CH3— CH 2 / \CH 2 I + 2Na + ICH 2 — CH, CH 3 \ /H CH 3 — CH 2 / \ ,CH 2 — CH 2 — CH3 Methyl-ethyl-propyl-methane (Active) If the above reaction is carried out with methyl iodide instead of ethyl iodide there is formed a hexane which is optically inactive :* CH 3 \ /H CHs— CH 2 / \CH 2 I + 2Na + ICH 3 CH 3 \ /H — > >C< CH 3 — CH 2 / \CH 2 -rCH3 Methyl-diethyl-methane (Inactive) An inspection of these formulas shows that those com- pounds are optically active in which each of the bonds of affinity of one carbon atom is linked to different groups or atoms. Whenever two bonds of this carbon atom are linked to the same kind of group (as two methyl or two ethyl groups) the optical activity is lost. Van't Hoff first discovered that optically active com- pounds have in general at least one carbon atom which is 34 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine linked to four different atoms or radicals. He gave the name " asymmetric " carbon atom to one so linked. Van't Hoff further showed that the existence of three isomers must necessarily result from the structure of an asymmetric carbon atom, if the assumption be correct that the four valences of the carbon atom are directed as to- ward the four solid angles of a regular tetrahedron, the carbon atom itself occupying the center of the figure. b b , \ // // / / / / / / / ' / / ^\ 1 \ tf \ II \ 1 1 \ \ II \ If s \ 1/ Fig. 8. Fig. 9. With such an arrangement there must result two kinds of molecules which resemble each other in the same way as the right hand resembles the left, or as an object resembles its reflection in a mirror. If such molecules be represented as mirror images (Fig. 8 and Fig. 9) it will be seen that on turning one so that the a and b in both figures coincide, the c and d of one will not coincide with c and d of the other. If now Figure 8 rotates the plane of polarized light to the right, Figure 2 will rotate it to the left be- cause of its opposite handed structure. This isomerism in space is termed stereochemical isomerism or stereoisomerism. The Alcohols 35 For simplicity the formulae of asymmetric compounds are written as if all the atoms or groups lie in the same plane. The belief that the atoms and groups in the com- pounds under discussion do not lie in the same plane is supported by the fact that compounds containing but two dissimilar groups, as C aabb, do not exist in two iso- meric forms. If all were in the same plane two arrange- ments, like Figure 10, would be possible, which must lead to different physical properties because in the bne case like groups are separated by unlike ones, while in the other like groups are adjacent to one another. No isomers of this type have ever been observed, although there are known a large number of compounds of the general for- mula Cchbi- a a ■ I I a—C—b b^-C—b b Fio. 10. a The third isomer of this amyl alcohol is a mixture of equal numbers of molecules of the right-and left-handed varieties. The influence of one-half of the molecules in rotating the plane of polarized light in one direction is exactly counteracted by the opposite rotating power of the other half, with the result that it appears to be without optical activity. When an excess of one optical form exists in a mixture of the two optically active vari- eties, this part exerts its effect and the mixture becomes optically active in proportion to the excess of one variety over the other. 36 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine This type of isomerism is of great significance in biology, since with but few exceptions the organic compounds which play important roles in the life processes of plants and animals possess this type of asymmetry. 21. The Higher Alcohols. — One of the higher homo- logues of methyl alcohol which should be mentioned, is normal hexyl alcohol, CH 3 — (CH 2 ) 4 — CH 2 OH (B. P. 157°) which occurs in the oil of the seeds of Heracleum gigan- teum, in the oil of the fruit of several plants, and in slight amount in fusel oil. The following are also biologically important : Normal heptyl alcohol CH 3 — (CH 2 ) 5 — CH 2 OH B. P. 176° Normal octyl alcohol CH 3 — (CH 2 ) 6 — CH 2 OH B. P. 196° Nonyl alcohol CH 3 — (CH 2 ) 7 — CH 2 OH B. P. 213° Dodecyl alcohol CH 3 — (CH 2 ) 10 — CH 2 OH M. P. 24-26° Cetyl alcohol CH 3 — (CH 2 ) 14 — CH 2 OH M. P. 49° Octadecyl alcohol CH 3 — (CH 2 ) 16 — CH 2 OH M. P. 59° Carnaubyl alcohol CH 3 — (CH^— CH 2 OH M. P. 68° Ceryl alcohol C 26 H 63 OH Myricyl alcohol C 30 H 6 iOH The higher alcohols, Cg to Cis, are found in various plant oils in small amounts usually combined with organic acids, as esters (2&). Cetyl alcohol occurs as a constituent of spermaceti, an animal wax derived from the sperm whale, and in the oil secreted by water birds for lubricating their feathers. Ceryl alcohol is an important constitutent of many waxes, as Chinese wax, beeswax, etc. Myricyl alcohol is likewise a very common constituent of waxes. (See waxes, 95.) The Alcohols 37 22. The Diatomic Alcohols. — It has been found im- possible to prepare in the isolated state compounds of the IL OH JOB. type /C<^ such as H 2 C<' for the reason that B/ X)H X)H they are unstable and as soon as formed they separate a molecule of water with the formation of a new class of compounds, the aldehydes. These will be treated more fully later (30). There are, however, many examples of compounds which contain more than one alcohol radical. The simplest CH 2 OH of these is ethylene glycol or glycol | • It is formed CH 2 OH in a manner analogous to monatomic alcohols, viz., by the action of water or metallic hydroxides on ethylene halogen derivatives (6). Ethylene chloride is too stable to react with water directly even under pressure, but ethylene bromide will react when heated in a sealed tube with water, forming glycol and hydrobromic acid : CH 2 Br HOH CH 2 OH | + =| +2HBr. CH 2 Br HOH CH 2 OH Glycol is a colorless liquid, readily soluble in water, and has a sweet taste. It boils without decomposition at 197° and solidifies in a freezing mixture. Its melting point is — 11.5° and its specific gravity at 0° is 1.125, water being 1.000. It is therefore heavier, volume for volume, than any of the monatomic alcohols, which are all lighter than water. 38 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Glycol does not occur in nature in the free state, but is a constituent of a very important class of compounds, of complex structure, the lecithins (96). Moreover it is of great theoretical interest, since it probably occurs as an intermediary product in the degradation of certain food- stuffs in the processes of metabolism (48). Glycol reacts with alkali metals, as do the monatomic alcohols, forming e.g. sodium, or potassium glycollate, and hydrogen : CH 2 OH CH 2 ONa | +2Na= | +H 2 CH 2 OH CH 2 ONa With fuming nitric acid it reacts to form glycol dinitrate : CH 2 OH HN0 3 CH 2 N0 3 I + =| +2H 2 CH 2 OH HNO3 CH 2 N0 3 Glycol chlorhydrin, CH 2 OH — CH 2 C1, is obtained by passing hydrochloric acid gas into warm glycol (25). It is a liquid, soluble in water, and boiling at 130°. CH 2 — CH 2 23. Ethylene Oxide. — \ / ■ Glycol does not O form an anhydride on treating it with reagents which abstract water. From glycol chlorhydrin, by abstracting a molecule of HC1 by treatment with alkalies, there results ethylene oxide. This compound is a gas, since it boils at 14°. It readily takes up water, forming glycol : CH 2 \ H CH 2 OH I > + = I CH 2 / OH CH 2 OH. The Alcohols 39 It also readily adds hydrochloric acid, forming glycol CH 2 \ H CH 2 OH chlorhydrin : i yO + = | CH 2 / CI CHsCl. 24. From propane two glycols are derived: Alpha or a-propylene glycol CH3 - CHOH -CH 2 OH, in which one hydroxyl group is attached to the middle carbon atom and therefore in the alpha position to the end carbon atoms, and Beta or ^-propylene glycol, in which each hydroxyl is bound to an end carbon atom and is therefore in the /8- position to the other. 25. Triatomic Alcohols. — Glycerol, commonly called glycerine, a name which it received before the modern system of chemical nomenclature was developed, is a derivative of propane, from which it is formed by the sub- stitution of three hydroxyl groups for three hydrogen atoms. It is a never-failing constituent of all fats, where it occurs in combination with the fatty acids. It has been prepared synthetically from triiodo-propane by the action of water : CH 2 I CH 2 OH I I CHI + 3HOH = CHOH + 3HI I I CH 2 I CH 2 OH Glycerol reacts with phosphorus triiodide, PI3, to form the triiodo propane, this being also called triiodo-hydrin. Glycerol is a colorless, odorless, oily liquid of sweet taste. It has a strong affinity for water, and takes up moisture from the air. It is soluble in water and in alcohol in all proportions, but very nearly insoluble in ether. On 40 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine long standing at low temperatures it solidifies, and the crys- tals thus formed do not melt below 17°. It boils at 290° but undergoes some decomposition. Under reduced pres- sure it can be distilled without decomposition. At 12 mm. it distills at 170°. It is slowly volatile with water vapor. Its specific gravity at 15° is 1.265. Its chemical behavior is in accord with the theory that it is a triatomic alcohol. Thus when glycerol is slowly dropped into a mixture of concentrated sulphuric acid and fuming nitric acid trinitro- glycerol, usually called nitroglycerine, is formed. The sul- phuric acid facilitates the reaction by its affinity for water, which it withdraws from the system as soon as formed : CH 2 OH CH 2 N0 3 I I CHOH + 3 HNO3 = CHNO3 + 3H 2 I . I CH 2 OH CH 2 N0 3 Nitroglycerine Nitroglycerine is a heavy colorless oil when pure, but usually has a yellow color. It is sweet to the taste and is extremely poisonous, acting chiefly on the central nervous system. It is employed in medicine for its action on the heart and is directly injected into the blood as a remedy in case of carbon monoxide poisoning. When heated to 180° it explodes. Its explosion can be induced by a sharp blow. The principal use of nitroglycerine is as an explo- sive. When absorbed by certain porous substances, as sawdust, clay, wood pulp, etc., it forms dynamite. Mixed with nitrocellulose, vaseline, and acetone, it forms the smokeless powder called cordite. The Alcohols 41 Glycerol, like other compounds containing several hydroxyl groups, dissolves alkalies and oxides of the heavy metals, forming compounds analogous to the alcoholates. The hydrogen atoms of the OH groups are in these replaced by the metal. The structure of such compounds may be illustrated by the following formula : CH 2 OH CH 2 I I ^> Cu CHOH + Cu(OH) 2 = CHO + 2H 2 CH 2 OH CH 2 OH V With basic lead acetate and ammonia glycerol forms an insoluble lead glycerate. When heated with hydrochloric acid, glycerol reacts with the formation of water and the replacement of one or two hydroxyl groups by chlorine : CH 2 OH CH 2 C1 I I CHOH + HC1 = CHOH + H 2 I I CH 2 OH CH 2 OH Monochlorhydrin CH 2 C1 CH 2 C1 I I CHOH + HC1 = CHOH + H 2 CH 2 OH CH 2 C1 Dichlorhydrin This reaction cannot be effected by the use of hydriodic acid, since the latter acts as a strong reducing agent, owing 42 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine to the great tendency it shows to separate free iodine, thus making available nascent hydrogen for the abstraction of oxygen. Thus on heating glycerol with five molecular equivalents of hydriodic acid, isopropyl iodide is produced : CH 2 OH CH3 I I CHOH + 5 HI = CHI + 3 H 2 + 4 1 I I CH 2 OH CH 3 Iaopropyliodide Under carefully regulated conditions this reaction is nearly quantitative, and on the measurement of the iodine in the isopropyl iodide produced from a sample depends the quantitative estimation of glycerol proposed by Zeisel and Fanto. Glycerol is readily oxidized, i.e. it exerts a reducing ac- tion (abstraction of oxygen) on Fehling's solution even in the cold, owing to its conversion into glyceraldehyde (36). 26. Erythritol or Erythrite, CH2OH— (CHOH) 2 — CH 2 OH, exists in nature in certain algse. 27. The Sulphur Alcohols. Mercaptans. — Just as the alcohols are derivatives of water, formed by replacing one of the hydrogen atoms by an alkyl group, so also there exists a class of compounds of analogous constitution derived from hydrogen sulphide. These are known as thio-alcohols, mercaptans, or alkyl sulph-hydrates : H— O— H R— O— H H— S— H R— S— H Water Alcohol Hydrogen Mercaptan sulphide The Alcohols 43 They are formed by warming alkyl halides with potas- sium sulph-hydrate in concentrated aqueous or alcoholic solution : C2H 6 I + KSH = C 2 H B SH + KI Mercaptan Methyl mercaptan, CH 3 SH, is a gas, B. P. 6°. It is produced by the action of anaerobic bacteria on proteins, being one of the products of putrefaction. It has a dis- gusting odor. It is a constituent of intestinal gases. Ethyl mercaptan, CH 3 — CH 2 SH, is a liquid with an extremely obnoxious odor ; B. P. 36°. It reacts with so- dium, forming C 2 H 5 SNa, analogous to sodium alcoholate. CHAPTER III ESTERS AND ETHERS 28. Esters. — When alcohols are treated with acids which have a strong affinity for water, a reaction may take place in which a molecule of water and a new compound called an ester are produced. Thus the action of bydri- odic acid on alcohol with the production of an alkyl halide (20) is representative of a general type of reac- tion. Thus : (a) CH 3 — CH 2 OH + HC\ CH 3 — CH 2 — Cv >S0 2 = >S0 2 HCK HCK Alcohol Sulphuric Ethyl sulphuric acid acid Compounds of the type of ethyl sulphuric acid are known as ethereal acids. (b) 2 C 2 H 6 OH + H 2 S0 4 = CH3— CH 2 — Cv >S0 2 +2H 2 ch 3 — ch 2 — SQt +HOH = C 2 H 6 — O— C 2 H 6 +H 2 S0 4 CH3 CH 2 O'V Ethyl ether The structure of diethyl sulphate is also shown by its formation from alcohol and sulphuryl chloride, SOadj. /CI HOC 2 H 6 X>C 2 H 6 SQ/ + = S0 2 < +2HC1 X C1 HOC 2 H 5 X)C 2 H 6 (d) Ethyl Sulphuric Acid is a strongly acid liquid of an oily character and possesses no odor. It is soluble in water in all proportions. It is obtained by mixing alcohol with strong sulphuric acid. The calcium and barium salts are soluble while barium sulphate is insoluble. The solution containing ethyl sulphuric acid, alcohol, and sul- phuric acid is neutralized with BaC0 3 and the BaSC>4 filtered off. On adding just enough sulphuric acid to combine with the barium in the filtrate the barium is removed and free ethyl sulphuric acid is left in solution. It is not very stable, decomposing slowly into alcohol and sulphuric acid in the presence of water at ordinary temperatures and quickly on boiling. Potassium ethyl 46 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine sulphate is very stable and can be recrystallized from boil- ing alcohol. When ethyl sulphuric acid is heated it forms the neutral ester diethyl sulphate and free sulphuric acid : /OC 2 H 6 HO v /OH C 2 H 5 O v < + >so 2 =so< + > X OH CsHsQ/ X OH C 2 H 6 0/ (e) Esters of Sulphurous Acid. — When alkyl iodides react with sodium sulphite there is formed the sodium salt of ethyl sulphonic acid : C 2 H 6 I + NasSOs = C 2 H B S0 3 Na + Nal The free acid C 2 H 6 S0 3 H is a very stable strong mono- basic acid easily soluble in water. It is not saponified even by boiling with water or alkalies. Even boiling concentrated nitric acid does not act upon it, nor does free chlorine, but fused potassium hydroxide decomposes it, regenerating alcohol and forming potassium sulphite. The same compound is formed by the oxidation of mercaptan with nitric acid or potassium permanganate: HO\ C 2 H 6 SH +30= >S0 2 C 2 H/ That this acid contains a hydroxyl group is shown by its yielding with PC1 5 an acid chloride which decomposes with water, regenerating the acid. The method of forma- tion also shows that the sulphur is linked directly to carbon. By the action of alkyl iodide on silver sulphite sulphonic ethers are formed. Esters and Ethers 47 2 CH3— CH 2 I + Ag 2 S0 3 = (C 2 H 6 ) 2 S0 3 + 2 Agl Ethyl sulphonic ethyl ether This is so stable that it is difficultly saponifiable. B. P. 213°. (/) Ethers of Sulphurous Acid. — When alcohol reacts with sulphuryl chloride there is formed a compound which is isomeric with ethyl sulphonic ethyl ether, but has entirely different properties : /CI HOC 2 H 6 SO^ + = (C 2 H 6 ) 2 S0 3 + 2 HC1 Nlll HOC 2 H s Diethyl sulphite Diethyl sulphite is rapidly saponified by water. On careful partial saponification the unstable potassium salt C 2 H 5 v of ethyl sulphurous acid /SO3 is formed. The free W acid which is isomeric with ethyl sulphonic acid is incap- able of existence, decomposing at once into its components. The stable ethyl sulphonic acid, being known to have its sulphur directly linked to carbon and to contain one hydroxyl group, is assigned the structure : C 2 H 5 O \ # and the isomeric ethyl C2H5 — Ox S sulphurous acid the Tin/ = ttQ q following: Ethyl sulphurous acid Ethyl sulphonic acid (g) Ethyl alcohol reacts with nitric acid HON0 2 to produce ethyl nitrate : CH3— CH a OH + HONO ? = CsHsONO? + H 2 48 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine It is a liquid which boils at 66°. It has a pleasant odor. It is soluble in water. Ethyl nitrate, CH 3 — CH 2 — N0 2 , is produced directly from its components and resembles methyl nitrate. It boils at 86°, has a sweet taste, but a bitter after taste. It is soluble in alcohol and ether. Both of these substances are explosive when heated quickly. Amyl nitrate, C5H11ONO2, is prepared in an analogous manner. It is a colorless liquid which boils at 148°. (h) Two esters of nitrous acid are important because of their pharmacological properties. They are ethyl nitrite, which is frequently called nitrous ether. It is a gas which boils at - 12°. C 2 H 6 OH + HONO - C 2 H 6 ONO Nitrous acid Ethyl nitrite It is employed in solution in ethyl alcohol (15%). Amyl nitrite boils at 99°. Its physiological action is distinct from that of amyl nitrate. 29. Ethers. — Just as a molecule of alcohol and one of an acid can be, condensed with the formation of one of an ester and one of water, so two molecules of alcohol can be condensed with the loss of water to form an ether : (a) Alcohol + Acid = Ester + Water (6) CH 3 |OH +H |OCH3 = CH3— O— CH3 Methyl ether The formation of ethyl ether, which is the most common one andjs usually referred to as ether, has been described in connection with the hydrolysis of the ester diethyl sul- Esters and Ethers 49 phate (28 S02 + H 2 = C2H 6 — O— C2H5 + H 2 S0 4 CsHs— (/ HO x C 2 H 6 (X 2 C 2 H B OH + ^SO, = NsOa + H 2 H(/ C 2 H 5 CK Diethyl sulphate is alternately formed and decomposed and the ether distills over, together with some alcohol and SQj. From this it would appear that since the sulphuric acid is constantly being regenerated it should act over and over again so that a small amount should induce the forma-, tion of ether indefinitely. This is not the case, for the following reason : With the formation of each molecule of ether there is likewise produced a molecule of water. Now ethyl sulphuric acid is readily hydrolyzed to alcohol and sulphuric acid in the presence of water, and in any solution containing these three substances there will be established a state of equilibrium in which there will exist a definite relationship between the amount of alcohol, ethyl sulphuric acid, sulphuric acid, and water. Increas- ing the concentration of alcohol will cause the formation of more ethyl sulphuric acid, while adding water causes the saponification of some of the ethyl sulphuric acid into its components. The water which is produced in the for- mation of ether distills over to some extent, but a part 50 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine remains behind in the still. This tends therefore to cause a progressive decrease in the amount of ethyl sulphuric acid in the flask, so that after a time little or no ether is formed. Instead the alcohol distills over as fast as added. The latter is removed from the distillate by neutralizing the H2SO3 with milk of lime. The alcohol passes princi- pally into the water layer, and the ether, which is sepa- rated from the water layer in a separatory funnel, is again distilled. The last traces of water and alcohol are removed from ether by placing in it granulated calcium chloride, which has a strong affinity for both these substances. Ethyl ether boils at 34.97°. It has an agreeable odor. Prolonged breathing of it causes loss of consciousness. It is much employed in surgery as an anaesthetic. One volume dissolves in 11.1 volumes of water at 25°, and ether dissolves water to the extent of about a 2% solution by volume at 12°. It is much less soluble in a saturated salt solution. With air ether vapors produce highly explosive mixtures. Great care should be exer- cised therefore in handling ether wherever there is a possibility of ignition, as during distillation. It is best to place the distillation flask in hot water and to dis- pense with a flame. A small flask should be employed and fresh portions of ether added from time to time, as the distillation proceeds. Small receivers frequently emptied are preferable to one large one. Ether dissolves a great variety of chemical substances and is indispensable as a solvent in chemical work. In many instances substances can be separated from complex Esters and Ethers 51 mixtures by extracting a water solution with ether. This depends upon the fact that when a substance is soluble in two liquids which do not mix, as ether and water, it will, when water and ether are shaken together and then allowed to separate into two layers, distribute itself between the ether and the water. If now the ether be separated from the water by means of a separatory funnel, and fresh ether shaken with the water, a division of the dissolved substance will again take place. In this manner by shaking repeatedly with fresh portions of ether the water -solution becomes progressively poorer in the dis- solved substance. The ether on evaporation leaves behind the material which it contained. The constitution of the ethers is further shown by their formation from an alcoholate and an alkyl halide : C2H 6 Na + I C 2 H 5 = QH5— O— QJi 5 + Nal Sodium ethylate This reaction serves to show what actually happens when sodium reacts with an alcohol (15). There are two possibilities. The sodium might replace one of the hydro- gen atoms which is linked with carbon, or that one which is linked to oxygen. If the former were true, we should have formed a compound of the following structure : CH 3 — OH + Na = NaCH 2 OH On causing this to react with an alkyl iodide there should be formed a higher alcohol: CH3I + NaCH 2 — OH = CH3— CH 2 — OH + Nal 52 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine The formation of ethers in this way proves that in these the two alkyl groups are linked together through oxygen. This is called Williamson's reaction, after the name of its discoverer. If to the mixture of alcohol and sulphuric acid (contain- ing ethyl sulphuric acid) there is added, beginning just before distillation commences, an alcohol other than ethyl alcohol, a mixed ether will result. In this way numerous ethers containing different alkyl radicals can be produced. c 2 h 6 — a Ns0 2 +HOC5HU = CHs— O— C,Hu +h 2 so 4 / Amyl alcohol Ethyl amyl ether This furnishes further evidence that the steps in the formation of ether are as described above. CHAPTER IV THE ALDEHYDES AND KETONES 30. Oxidation Products of the Alcohols. — It has long been known that alcohol-containing solutions, as fer- mented cider, wine, or beer, soon become sour when exposed to the air in open vessels at room temperature. Vinegar is formed through the change of alcohol into acetic acid. In the absence of oxygen this change does not take place, and it is greatly accelerated by thorough aeration of the solution, as by causing it to pass through porous material. The oxidation is not spontaneous, but results from the growth in the solutions of a microorganism Mycoderma aceti, or " mother of vinegar." If the vessel containing the alcoholic solution which is undergoing this change admits but an inadequate supply of air (oxygen) there accumulates an intermediary product known as aldehyde or, from its relation to acetic acid, acetaldehyde. The change which takes place in these processes is shown by the following equations : CH3— CH 2 OH + O = CH 3 — CHO +'H 2 Acetaldehyde CHy-CHO + O = CH 3 — COOH Acetic acid Oxygen of the air (molecular oxygen) cannot effect this oxidation, except through the agency of an " oxygen carrier," or catalyzer, which " activates " it. This action 53 54 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine is brought about by the presence in the acetic acid organ- ism of oxydases. Numerous examples are known of the activation of molecular oxygen through the agency of inorganic cata- lyzers. Thus a mixture of hydrogen and air is stable at ordinary temperatures and can be left for a long period without the hydrogen and oxygen combining to form water. If a platinum spiral be introduced into such a mixture, the volume of the gas mixture will decrease noticeably and the platinum grow warm. The hydrogen and oxygen will now rapidly combine. If instead of a platinum spiral very finely divided metal, platinum sponge, be employed, the two elements may combine with explo- sive violence. Another example of the effect of an inorganic catalyzer is seen in the technical process of converting methyl alcohol into formaldehyde. Air and methyl alcohol in the proper proportions to supply oxygen for the oxidation of the alco- hol form a relatively stable mixture. It can be heated to a relatively high temperature without any oxidation taking place. If however a copper gauze which has been oxi- dized on its surface be warmed gently and the air-alcohol mixture passed slowly over it, the oxidation of the alcohol is rapidly effected, water and formaldehyde being formed. The heat generated by the oxidation serves to keep the copper in a glowing condition: CH3OH + O = HCHO + H 2 Formaldehyde The exact nature of the process by which these accelera- tions of reactions is brought about is not known with cer- The Aldehydes and Ketones 55 tainty. The amount of acceleration depends upon the amount of surface of metal or oxide exposed to the react- ing mixture, and it is known that platinum can absorb relatively large amounts of certain gases, and the more the greater the degree of fineness of its division. Since the more finely divided the metal the greater the surface ex- posed, the reason for the higher efficiency of the metal in a fine state of division becomes apparent. The catalytic action is most simply explained by assuming that the gases dissolve in the surface layer of the metal and therefore exist in much more concentrated state by which more molecules are brought together for interaction in a given time. For the preparation of acetaldehyde, which is for brev- ity ordinarily referred to as aldehyde, in the laboratory the oxidation of alcohol is effected by chromic acid : 3 C2H5OH + 2 K 2 Cr0 4 + 5 H 2 S0 4 = 3 CH^CHO + Cr 2 (S0 4 ) 3 + 2 K 2 S0 4 + 8 H 2 0. Aldehyde In this reaction the sulphuric acid first reacts with the potassium chromate, forming chromic acid : OH K 2 Cr0 4 + H 2 S0 4 = K 2 S0 4 + CrC \ T> OH The chromium in the chromic acid gives up its oxygen to the alcohol, passing from the hexavalent to the trivalent state. The green color of the chroinous sulphate and the fruity odor of the aldehyde are so characteristic that this reaction 56 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine is employed reversably as a qualitative test for both chromic acid and for alcohol. When chlorine is passed into a primary or secondary alcohol, hydrogen is replaced by chlorine, in a manner analogous to the behavior of hydrocarbons. The chlorine atom always replaces a hydrogen attached to the carbon atom which holds the hydroxyl group, i.e. to the carbon atom already linked to a negative group. The two nega- tive groups cannot remain attached in this way, so the chlorinated alcohol has but a transitory existence. There results at once a separation of HC1 and the formation of an aldehyde : CH 3 — CH 2 OH + Cl 2 = CH3— CHC1— OH + HC1 CH 3 — CHC1— OH —>- CH 3 — CHO + HC1 31. Constitution of the Aldehydes and Acids. — The relationship between the primary alcohols and their oxidation products, the aldehydes and acids, is shown by the following consideration : The primary alcohols cor- respond to the general formula C„H 2n+2 ; the aldehydes to the formula C„H 2n O, due to the loss of two -hydrogen atoms through the first stage of oxidation ; while the acids which result from the oxidation of the aldehydes cor- respond to the general formula C„H 2n 2 . The constitutional formulae assigned to these three classes of compounds are as follows : R l/H C— H \OH R R l/H | C or CHO \0 R R 1 1 C— OH or CO -OH \0 Alcohol Aldehyde Acid The Aldehydes and Ketones 57 The primary alcohols, the aldehydes and corresponding acids are derived from the hydrocarbons by the substitu- tion of a hydrogen atom linked to a primary carbon atom by the following groups : >. I I • — C-^OH C=0 — C Carbinol group Carbonyl OTT (Alcohol) group v V-/X1 (Aldehyde Carboxyl group or Ketone) (Acid) The behavior of these groups when acted upon by PC1 6 throws further light upon their structure. Thus the alco- hols yield, as already pointed out, alkyl halides, the OH acting as a unit and being replaced by CI, a monovalent element. When PC1 B acts upon aldehydes, the oxygen' is replaced by two CI atoms forming dichlor hydrocarbons. With the organic acids PCI5 replaces the OH group as in the alcohols and leads to the formation of acid chlorides : CH^CH 2 OH + PCI5 = CH3— CH 2 C1 + POCI3 + HC1 Ethyl chloride CH3— CHO + PC1 6 = CH 3 — CHC1 2 + POCI3 Ethylidene chloride CH3— COOH + PCU = CH 3 — COC1 + POCI3 +HC1 Acetyl chloride 32. Properties of the Aldehydes. — (1) The aldehydes are characterized by exceptional chemical activity. They are easily oxidized, slowly by contact with the air and quickly by oxidizing agents such as chromic acid. They possess therefore marked reducing properties, and abstract oxygen from the oxides of the noble metals. They reduce an ammoniacal solution of silver oxide or silver salts, caus- 58 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine ing the deposition of metallic silver. Some of the aldehydes will likewise reduce alkaline copper solutions, especially in the presence of sodium hydroxide. This property is sufficiently characteristic and delicate to be of use as a reagent for detecting and estimating aldehydes (Febling's solution). (2) The aldehydes are easily reduced by nascent hydrogen to the same primary alcohols from which they are derived by oxidation : CH3— CHO + 2 H = CHsCHaOH (3) Conversion into dichlor derivatives of the type R— CHX 2 (X = Halogen) (31). (4) Addition reactions: (a) Aldehydes react with ammonia and hydrocyanic acid to form addition products. With ammonia there is formed : QH / CH 3 — CHO + HNH 2 = CH 3 — CH \ NH 2 Aldehyde ammonia ' The addition reaction of aldehyde and HCN is of especial importance because it forms a method of building up synthetically compounds which are at the same time alcohols and acids : OH / CH3— CHO + HCN = CH 3 — CH \ CN Ethylidene cyanhydrin Ethylidene cyanhydrin is readily transformed into lactic acid (66): , The Aldehydes and Ketones 59 (b) Upon heating with alcohols, stable ethers — the acetals " — are formed : CH 3 — CH + H H O— CH 2 — CH3 O— CH 2 — CH3 = CH 3 — CH(OC2Hb) 2 + H 2 Acetal This reaction would lead to the supposition that the aldehydes could react with water to form dialcohols hav- ing both of the OH groups linked to one carbon atom : OH OH / = CH 3 — CH + H 2 OH \ OH Ethylidene glycol (Hypothetical) This same compound, the hypothetical ethylidene glycol, we should expect to be formed when ethylidene chloride is heated with water : CH3— CH + H H OH CH3— CH HOH Cl 2 + H / = CH3— CH OH \ OH + 2HC1 This does not appear to be the case. If it is formed its existence is but momentary, the compound being immedi- ately broken down into the aldehyde and water : \0H x CH3— CH\ — *- CH 3 — CHO + H 2 W 60 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine From such considerations the conclusion may be drawn that two hydroxyl groups cannot as a rule exist bound to the same carbon atom- A molecule of water is separated and an oxygen atom becomes bound to the carbon atom by both its affinities instead. When several negative atoms in the radical are introduced in place of hydrogen such hydrates can exist. Thus trichlor acetaldehyde, commonly called chloral, combines with water to form chloral hydrate : /OH CC1 3 — CHO + HOH = CC1 3 — CH< X)H Chloral Chloral hydrate This compound does not behave like a diatomic alcohol, however, but like the aldehyde from which it was derived, owing to the ease with which water is separated. (5) The aldehydes polymerize readily. By polymeriza- tion is meant the transformation of a compound into an- other having the same percentage composition with respect to the elements, but with a molecular weight which is a multiple of that represented by the simplest formula. In the case of formic aldehyde this change is spontaneous at the ordinary temperatures. Acetaldehyde does not polymerize so readily, but the change is brought about by the presence of traces of hydrochloric, sulphuric, or sul- phurous acid, zinc chloride, etc. The reason for their catalytic effect is unknown. Alkalies induce a different kind of polymerization of aldehydes, leading to the formation of aldehyde resins. For acetaldehyde this is reddish brown in color, insoluble The Aldehydes and Ketones 61 in water, but soluble in alcohol, and gives off a peculiar odor which is characteristic. Formic aldehyde, on the other hand, in the presence of alkali shows the phenomenon known as the Cannizarro reaction, in which through the action of water one molecule of aldehyde is oxidized to acid, and another is reduced to an alcohol, thus : 2 HCHO + H 2 = CH 3 OH + HCOOH Formic acid (6) The aldehydes show a tendency to form condensa- tion products in which two molecules combine with a rearrangement of the bonds of the carbon atoms, a hydro- gen atom of one molecule changing its linkage from carbon to oxygen with the formation of a hydroxyl group. Thus when aldehyde stands in contact with acids or alkalies it undergoes what is known as the dldol condensation. There is formed /8-oxybutyric aldehyde : CH3CHO+ CH 2 H— CHO = CH3— CH(OH)— CH 2 — CHO /3-oxybutyric aldehyde (Aldol) This property of the aldehydes is of fundamental im- portance in biology, for the formation of carbohydrates, fats, proteins, etc., which occur in the animal and vege- table kingdoms. Formic aldehyde does not condense through the influ- ence of acids, but does so readily through the influence of very weak alkalies, even calcium carbonate greatly accelerating the action. The condensation products of formaldehyde will be considered in detail in connection with the synthesis of the sugars (151). 62 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine (7) With hydroxylamine, NH 2 OH, aldehydes condense to form aldoximes, water being formed in the reaction : CH3CHO + NH2OH = CH 3 — CH=N— OH + H 2 (8) With hydrazine, NH 2 — NH 2 , or its' substitution products, aldehydes condense to form hydrazones, com- pounds .containing two nitrogen atoms : CH3CHO + NH 2 — NHR = CH 3 — CH=N— NHR + H 2 (9) The aldehydes react with sodium bisulphite' to form crystalline compounds which are readily soluble in water, but sparingly so in alcohol. These are looked upon as sulphonic acid esters of the hypothetical ethylidene glycol : OH / • CH3— CHO + HOH = CH 3 — CH \ OH OH H[ O / \^ CH3— CH + S = CH 3 — CH(OH)— (S0 3 Na)+H 2 *V y^^v Aldehyde sodium bisulphite OH NaO O Such compounds are easily broken up on warming with a solution of sodium carbonate, with the re-formation of aldehydes. These compounds are of great importance, therefore, in the isolation bf aldehydes. Nomenclature. — The aldehydes are named from the hydrocarbons from which they are derived with the ter- mination -al. Several of the more important ones have The Aldehydes and Ketones 63 long had names which do not correspond to this sys tern of nomenclature. 33. Formaldehyde.— H— C^ (Methanal). Results H . from the regulated oxidation of methyl alcohol, employing a glowing platinum or copper spiral as a catalyzer (30). Other oxidizing agents acting on methyl alcohol do not yield the aldehyde. Instead the oxidation goes farther, formic acid being produced (50). It is a gas which when cooled strongly condenses to a liquid which boils at — 21°. Formaldehyde is formed by the direct union of hydrogen and carbon monoxide under the influence of the silent electrical discharge. At 600° C. it is again dissociated into hydrogen and carbon monoxide : / H 0=C< ^C=0+H 2 X H .This is an example of the change of carbon from the divalent into the tetravalent state and vice versa. This type of change in the nature of carbon will be further treated under the isonitriles (40). Formaldehyde is supplied com- mercially as a 40 % solution known as formalin. Formaldehyde is a powerful poison by reason of its power to react with the proteins of the tissues, destroy- ing their special properties as components of the living protoplasm. It is employed in disinfection and in the preservation and hardening of anatomic specimens. With ammonia it forms hexamethylenetetramine, or urotropin, a feebly basic crystalline solid, soluble in 1.8 64 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine parts of water and 10 parts of alcohol. (Sometimes also called aminoform and cystamin.) 6 CH 2 + 4 NH 3 = (CH 2 ) 6 N 4 + 6 H 2 , It is employed internally in medicine as an antiseptic. It is absorbed without decomposition and passes through the kidneys in great measure unchanged, but the urine after its administration frequently contains traces of formaldehyde. Polymerization of formaldehyde. — According to the conditions formaldehyde polymerizes in different ways. Paraformaldehyde is formed when formalin is evapo- rated on a water bath. ' It is a white solid which melts at about 153° and on strongly heating evolves formalde- hyde. It is looked upon as (CH 2 0) 2 . Trioxy methylene (CH 2 0) 3 is a white crystalline com- pound which separates from solutions of formaldehyde on standing. This substance differs from paraldehyde in that it does not dissolve in water, alcohol, or ether. It is formed spontaneously when formaldehyde solution is allowed to evaporate at ordinary temperatures. It passes into formaldehyde again on heating. Formose (CH 2 0)6 is a condensation product resulting from the action of milk of lime on formaldehyde. It con- sists of a mixture of sugars of the glucose group (151). Methylal, CH 2 (OCH3) 2 , may be looked upon as derived from one molecule of formaldehyde and two of methyl alcohol : HCH °+H OCH = CH 2 (OCH 3 ) 2 . + H 2 The Aldehydes and Ketones 65 It is therefore an ether of the hypothetical glycol /OH CH< x OH It is employed as a soporific and anesthetic, B. P. 42°. It is soluble in water, in alcohol, and in oils. Acetaldehyde (acetic aldehyde, ethanal, aldehyde), CH3CHO. The preparation of this aldehyde by the oxidation of alcohol has already been described (30). It is purified by conversion into aldehyde ammonia, which is filtered and washed with ether. The aldehyde ammonia- is afterward distilled with dilute sulphuric acid. It is obtained in large quantities as a by-product in the distillation of fermented solutions in the manufacture of spirits. It is a colorless liquid, B. P. 21°, specific gravity about .8. It has a characteristic suffocating odor. It is a solvent for sulphur, phosphorus and iodine. Aldehyde dissolves readily in water, alcohol, and ether. PC1 6 con- verts it into ethylidene chloride (31). Paraldehyde (C2H 4 0) 3 is formed when a little HC1, COCl 2 , SO2, or ZnCl 2 is added to aldehyde. It is formed with a violent reaction on adding concentrated sulphuric acid to aldehyde. It is a colorless liquid which crystallizes below 10.5°, B. P. 124°. It possesses a peculiar, aromatic, suffocating odor and a warm taste ; is soluble in alcohol, ether, oils and chloroform, and in ten parts of water. Specific gravity, .995 at 15°. Paraldehyde is a hypnotic and antispasmodic, and is used in medicine to a considerable extent. 66 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Paraldehyde has the constitution : /CH 3 .0— CH< CH3— CH<( X) °- CH CO + H 2 N— OH = CH3 Nc=N— OH + H 2 CH 3 / CH 3 / Acetone Acetoxime Acetoxime on heating with concentrated HC1 decom- poses into acetone and hydroxylamine. In a similar manner, ketones react with the amino group of the hydrazines, forming hydrazones : * )CO +H 2 N— NHR = (CH3) 2 =C=N— NHR +H 2 0. CH3/ Those ketones which contain the radical CH3 — CO — , and a few others, form addition products with sodium bisulphite in a manner similar to the aldehydes : (CH 3 ) 2 =CO +HNaS0 3 = (CH^C^* \SO3Na The Aldehydes and Ketones 73 These when heated with sodium carbonate solution regenerate ketones. These compounds are of great value in separating ketones from mixtures and in purify- ing them. 38. Acetone, CH3 — CO — CH3, is the simplest and most common ketone. It is a liquid with a characteristic ethereal odor, B. P. 56°. Its specific gravity at 0° is 0.81. It is soluble in water, but much less • so in solutions of inorganic salts. This property is made use of in separating it from water solu- tions. It likewise dissolves in all proportions in alcohol and in ether. It is a very stable substance toward oxidizing agents, not being attacked by cold KMnCX solutions, but it is oxidized to acetic and formic acids by chromic acid. It is very inflammable and should be handled with caution against the ignition of its vapors. Acetone occurs in normal urine in very small amounts, but is present in large quantities in the urine of diabetic patients. Its formation in the body will be explained later (see aceto- acetic acid, 127). Lieben's iodoform test for acetone depends upon the fact that alkaline iodine solutions oxidize acetone and form triiodo methane or iodoform. A solution of iodine and KI is added to the solution to be tested and then dilute sodium hydroxide added drop by drop. The iodine color is discharged at once and there separates at once a crystalline deposit of iodoform. The reactions involved are: 74 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine CH3— CO— CH 3 + 3 KIO =CH 3 — CO— CI 3 +3 KOH Potassium Triodoacetone hypo-iodite CH3— CO— CI 3 +KOH = CH 3 — COOK + CHI3 Potassium acetate Iodoform The iodoform can be extracted with ether, and on eva- poration of the latter is left as yellow hexagonal plates having a characteristic odor. ■ On the formation of iodo- form under these conditions depends the qualitative detec- tion of acetone devised by Vournasos. This test is not characteristic for acetone but is given by alcohol and alde- hyde as well. Acetone in the presence of alkali dissolves mercuric oxide, and this property is made use of in testing for its presence in solution. A mercuric salt, as the chloride or nitrate, is added to the solution to be tested, and then sodium hy- droxide to strong alkalinity, and then an equal volume of alcohol. The solution is then filtered and the filtrate acidified with HC1 and a layer of (NHt) 2 S solution poured carefully upon it. If mercury is precipitated as the black sulphide, it indicates a positive test. Aldehydes also give this reaction. Acetone forms with mercuric oxide the compound 2 CH 3 — CO — CH 3 • 3 HgO, insoluble in dilute acetic acid ; also a white crystalline compound, CH 3 — CO— CH3 • (HgS0 4 ) 2 ■ 3 HgO The latter compound is very insoluble in dilute acetic acid, and its formation is the basis of the test for acetone designed by Deniges. Acetone does not reduce Fehling's solution. With The Aldehydes and Ketones 75 o-nitro benzaldehyde and sodium hydroxide acetone reacts to form indigo (326). Sulphonal, a substance used as a soporific, is derived from the condensation product of acetone and mercaptan. When these are mixed and treated with hydrochloric acid they condense with the separation of water : (CH 3 ) 2 =CO + 2 HS— C 2 H 6 = (CH 3 ) 2 =rC(SC 2 H 6 ) 2 + H 2 Acetone Mercaptan ' On oxidation this product yields a disulphone, which is sulphonal. (CH,)*=C(SC»H,)» + 40= (CH 3 ) 2 =C(S0 2 C 2 H 6 ) 2 Sulphonal Several derivatives of higher ketones have also been intro- duced. Trional is made from ethyl-methyl ketone, and tetronal contains four ethyl groups. 39. Dihydroxyacetone, CH 2 OH— CO— CH 2 OH, results from the oxidation of glycerol with sodium hypobromite or nitric acid. Its formation is accompanied with that of its isomer glyceraldehyde (36). The structure of dihydroxyacetone is established by the fact that it forms, with hydrocyanic acid, an oxynitrile (32) which by chlorination and subsequent reduction is converted into isobutyric acid : CH 2 OH CH 2 OH I I/OH CO +HCN=C( +2H 2 | *- |\CN > CH 2 OH CH 2 OH 76 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine CH 2 OH CH 2 C1 I /OH | /CI C( POCl 3 C< | XX)OH *- [ x COOH CH 2 OH CH 2 C1 + 6H CH 3 J CH— COOH I CH3 Isobutytic acid Dihydroxyacetone is chemically related to the sugars (150). CHAPTER V THE NITRILES AND THEIR REDUCTION PRODUCTS, THE AMINES 40. The Nitriles and Isonitriles. — It has been pointed out (28) that alkyl halides react with certain salts of acids, yielding esters, and that these on hydrolysis are resolved into alcohols and acids. The behavior of the salts of hydrocyanic acid is different from others in that it yields two classes of derivatives which do not go back into alcohol and hydrocyanic acid, but yield a new type of compound on hydrolysis : CH3I + KCN = CH 3 — CN + KI Potassium Methyl cyanide cyanide Methyl cyanide is a colorless liquid boiling at 81°. Its specific gravity is .805 at 0°. It is soluble in water and is combustible. On being warmed with either acids or alkalies nitriles add water (saponification) and are converted into acid and ammonia : CH3— CN + 2 H 2 = CH 3 — COOH + NH 3 Acetic acid This behavior is analogous to that of hydrocyanic acid, which when heated with dilute acids is converted into formic acid and NH3 : HCN + 2 H 2 = HCOOH + NH3 Formic acid 77 78 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Aside from the importance of the nitriles for the forma- tion of acids they are of the greatest importance for build- ing up carbon chains. Thus any alcohol can be converted by PC1 5 into its alkyl halide derivative, and this on being converted into a nitrile gains a new carbon atom : PC1 6 KCN CHa— OH -> CH3CI > CH 3 — CN 2H 2 -+ CH 3 — COOH Two practices prevail regarding the nomenclature of the alkyl cyanides. They are called methyl cyanide, ethyl cyanide, propyl cyanide, etc., but are more frequently called nitriles, and are then named after the acid which they yield on hydrolysis. CH 3 — CN is called aceto- nitrile; CH 3 — CH 2 — CN, propionitrile, etc. Nascent hydrogen reduces the nitriles to compounds called amines. The process is one of addition of hydrogen : CH 3 CN + 4 H = CH 3 — CH 2 — NH 2 Ethyl amine The amines may be looked upon as ammonia in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by an alkyl group (see amines, 43). The formation of carboxyl and ammonia on hydrolysis and of amines on reduction shows that in the nitrile the nitrogen cannot be directly linked to the alkyl radical. The CN group is linked to the alkyl group by its carbon. Isonitriles. — If instead of KCN we cause alkyl halide to react with silver cyanide, there is obtained a colorless liquid slightly soluble in water which has an intolerable The Nitriles and Amines 79 odor and poisonous properties. It has the same percent- age composition with respect to the elements as ethyl nitrile, and is isomeric with it : CHs— CH 2 I -^ AgNC = CH 3 — CH 2 — NC Ethyl isocyanide This substance behaves on heating with water or with acids in a manner entirely different from ethyl cyanide : CH3— CH 2 — N = C + 2H 2 = CH3— CH 2 — NH 2 + HCOOH Ethyl amine Formic acid In this compound the carbon atom of the isocyanide is split off, which indicates that the nitrogen is linked directly to the ethyl group. Unlike the nitriles they are very stable toward alkalies. From the above considerations it appears that the silver salt of hydrocyanic acid has a structure different from that of potassium cyanide. A great interest attaches to the isonitriles or alkyl isocyanides because they apparently form an exception to the general rule that carbon in organic compounds is always tetravalent. Several possible assumptions may be made regarding the structure of these compounds. The carbon atom may be in a divalent state (I) ; or two of its valences may be free, or polarized (II) ; or the nitrogen may exist in the pentavalent state (III) as it is known to be, e.g., in ammonium hydroxide, all four valences of the carbon atom being in union with nitrogen. P.— N = C R— N = c/ or R— N = C=i R— N = C 1 11 in 80 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine The extensive studies of Neff have afforded the most satisfactory explanation of the structure of the isonitriles, and the principles which they disclosed are of great im- portance in elucidating the nature of reactions generally among organic compounds. A discussion of some reac- tions which throw light on the behavior of these compounds will be of value. The isonitriles are assumed by Neff to possess the struc- ture represented by R — N = C, but there exists a small number of the molecules dissociated into the " active " form R — N = C\, these being in dynamic equilibrium with the form R — N = C which, either because its car- bon is divalent, or because two of its bonds of affinity are polarized or latent, is incapable of any chemical activity whatever. The percentage of " active " mole- cules varies with the nature and mass of R, a fact shown by the variation in the chemical activity of compounds of this type. 1. Halogens (chlorine, bromine, iodine), speed of reac- tion in the order named, are absorbed by the alkyl iso- cyanides with great evolution of heat, forming dihalogen derivatives : / / X R— N = C<+X = X->R— N = C< || II X * / X -> R— N = C< (X = Halogen) 2. Oxygen and sulphur convert the isocyanides into isocyanates and isothiocyanates respectively : The Nitriles and Amines 81 R— N = C<^ + O -* R— N = C = O R— N = C< + S ->■ R— N = C = S 3. Alcohols in the presence of alkali are absorbed, giving compounds known as imido ethers : . H /H R— N = C<+| ^r_n = C< O— R NO— R 4. Hydrogen sulphide and mercaptans give the addition products : « R— N = C< + >S -+ R— NH— CC H/ Ns R— N = C< + HS— R -» R— N = C< • N SR A striking property of these addition products of the isonitriles is their low point of dissociation, i.e. the car- bon atom which has absorbed the X — Y, thus becoming tetravalent, is unable to hold X — Y above certain tem- perature limits. There is therefore a certain temperature, varying with the nature of all the groups in the compound, at which the carbon atom becomes spontaneously divalent, the X — Y becoming dissociated, thus : R_N =C( ^ R— N =C( + X—Y. \ Y N The dissociation is very slight at low and moderate tem- peratures and increases as the temperature is raised, a 82 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine • There is an equilibrium between divalent and tetravalent carbon. Dynamic equilibrium implies a set of conditions in which if one of the components of a system is withdrawn, it is replaced by the further dissociation of a part of the undissociated component, so that a definite relationship always exists among the components of the system. Thus the dihalogen addition prbducts of the alkyl isocyanides are converted back into the alkyl isocyanides if kept in contact with zinc dust, the latter serving simply to tie up progressively and remove from the system the small amount of halogen which is dissociated. The dissociation becomes progressive under these conditions and the reac- tion goes to completion : / C1 R— N = C( + Zn -> R^N = C + ZnCl 2 \C1 The isonitriles have a marked tendency to polymerize and form resinous products. This is without doubt due to the combirfation of the active dissociation products with each other, the reaction in this case being non- reversible. 41. Fulminic Acid- — When KCN is oxidized there is produced potassium cyanate, KCNO. There appears to exist an acid isomeric with cyanic acid in fulminic acid. The free acid is not known in a state of purity, but its salts, especially the mercuric and the silver fulminates, are well known. The formulae for these compounds corre- spond to Hg(ONC) 2 and AgONC. The Nitriles and Amines 83 On hydrolysis the fulminates yield hydroxylamine and a salt of formic acid : HONC+ 2H 2 = HONH 2 +H— COOH Fulminio i Hydroxyl- Formic aoid acid amine The formula HONC for fulminic acid can be accepted only by assuming the existence of carbon in a divalent form. This assumption is not ordinarily considered tenable, but there is one compound of carbon, viz. carbon monoxide, which must certainly contain diva- lent carbon. 42. Cyanamide. — | may be regarded as a com- NH 2 pound in which a hydrogen of ammonia is replaced by the cyanide radical. The latter is strongly negative and exerts an influence upon the behavior of the hydrogen atoms of the NH 2 group. While ammonia is capable of forming metallic derivatives, these are not readily formed. Sodium and potassium must be strongly heated in the presence of ammonia before the amides of these metals are formed (NaNH 2 , KNH 2 ) and magnesium must be heated to incandescence in order to form the nitride. The hydro- gen atoms of the NH 2 or amide group in cyanamide are much more easily replaced by metals. Silver cyanamide, AgHN — C=N, is a yellow amorphous compound, formed by adding soluble silver salts to solutions of cyan- amide. Cyanamide is obtained as the calcium compound by, passing nitrogen over heated calcium carbide : CaC 2 + N 2 = CN • N = Ca + C Calcium cyanamide 84 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine It is now made on a large scale and is used as a fertilizer. Calcium cyanamide is slowly decomposed by water, form- ing calcium carbonate and ammonia : N=C— N = Ca + 3H 2 = 2NH 3 + CaC0 3 As an intermediate product cyanic acid is formed : N - C— N = Ca + 3 H 2 = CN— OH + NH 3 + Ca(OH) 2 Cyanic acid Cyanic acid readily reacts with water to form ammonia and carbon dioxide : N-C— OH + H 2 = NH 3 + Ca Cyanamide is a crystalline compound readily soluble in water, alcohol, and ether. It melts at 40°. 43. The Amines. — The hydrogen atoms of ammonia may be replaced -by alkyl groups, forming a class of com- pounds called amines, which have a great biological im- portance. Many of them occur in nature, especially as products of the action of putrefactive bacteria on proteins. The amines containing the lower alcohol radicals closely resemble ammonia in odor and are even more strongly basic than the latter. Like ammonia, they form white clouds of finely divided salts when brought into contact with volatile acids. The union with acids is attended with the evolution of heat. They behave like ammonia in forming double salts with salts of the heavy metals such as platinic or gold chloride. They differ from ammonia in being combustible. The lower members are readily soluble in water. The solubil- ity in water diminishes with increasing length of the carbon The Nitriles and Amines 85 chains. The volatility likewise diminishes with increasing molecular weight, the highest members being solids in- soluble in water and without odor. These are, however, still soluble in alcohol and ether and are basic in character, readily combining with acids to form salts. The specific gravity of all the amines is considerably less than that of water. ' Classification. — The amines are termed primary, secon- dary, or tertiary, depending on whether one, two, or three hydrogen atoms of ammonia are replaced by alkyl groups, e -9- : CH3— NH 2 (CH 3 ) 2 =NH (CH 3 ) 3 =N Methyl amine Dimethyl amine Trimethyl amine (primary). (secondary) (tertiary) The characteristic group of the primary amines is there- fore — NH 2 , of the secondary amines =NH, and of the tertiary amines =N. The relation of the amines to the hydrocarbons is shown by their synthesis from the alkyl halides and ammonia : CH3I + NH 3 = CH3— NH 2 • HI Methyl ammonium iodide Methyl ammonium iodide is a salt entirely analogous to ammonium iodide. On the treating this salt with ah alkali, methyl amine is liberated : CH3— NH 2 • HI + NaOH = CH3— NH 2 + Nal + H 2 0. The amines show their character as substituted ammo- nias in uniting with water to form hydroxides : CH 3 — CH 2 — NH 2 +H 2 = C 2 H 6 NH 3 OH Etbylamine Ethyl ammonium hydroxide (CH 3 ) 2 =NH + H 2 = (CH 3 ) 2 =NH 2 OH Dimethylamine Dimethyl ammonium hydroxide 86 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine The secondary amines are formed from the primary by the further action of alkyl halide : CH 3 — NH 2 + CH 3 I = (CH 3 ) 2 =NH • HI (CH 3 ) 2 = NH ■ HI + NaOH = (CH 3 ) 2 = NH 2 OH + Nal (CH3) 2 =NH +C 2 H 6 I =^ 3)2 /N ■ HI C2XI5 / Dimethyl ethyl ammonium iodide (CH3)2 > • HI + NaOH = (CH3)2 >HOH Dimethyl-ethyl ammonium hydroxide Trimethylamine is formed by the action of alkyl halide upon dimethylamine : (CH 3 ) 2 = NH + CH 3 I = (CH 3 ) 3 = N- HI Tri methyl ammonium iodide Trimethyl ammonium iodide on treatment with an alkali yields trimethylamine in a manner analogous to the primary and secondary compounds. Trimethylamine can likewise take up a molecule of methyl halide (or other alkyl halide) and form tetramethyl ammonium iodide : (CH 3 ) 3 =N +CH3I = (CH 3 ) 4 =NI Tetramethyl ammonium iodide These compounds are known as quaternary bases. They are not capable of reacting with hydroxides of the alkali metals. They are so stable that they can be boiled with sodium hydroxide without decomposition. The liquid and gaseous amines are volatile with steam, as is ammonia, but the ammonium bases or quaternary bases are not volatile. The Nitriles and Amines 87 The above described reactions for the formation of the primary, secondary, and tertiary bases were written as if only one product was formed in each case, e.g. methyl- amine from methyl halide and ammonia. This does not represent what actually takes place, however, for in practice it is found that even though equimolecular quantities of these two substances be brought into reaction, not only is methylamine, which is the principal product, produced, but all the other possible methylamines, as well, although in much smaller amounts. 44. Separation of Amines and Ammonia. — Ammonia can be removed quantitatively from its mixtures with' the amines by a method described by Erdmann. The solution containing both classes of compounds {e.g. the distillate obtained in the Kjeldahl nitrogen determina- tion) is made strongly alkaline with a mixture of sodium hydroxide and sodium carbonate and yellow mercuric oxide {i.e. the oxide in a very fine and amorphous state) added. There results on standing a reaction : 2 HgO + NH 3 = Hg 2 N • OH + H 2 The alkyl ammonias or amines do not react with mer- curic oxide in this way. The mercuric ammonium hy- droxide is practically insoluble in water and can be filtered off, leaving the amines in solution. Delepine has proposed a method for separating the primary, secondary, and tertiary amines which depends upon the fact that the primary and secondary con- dense with formaldehyde, while the tertiary amines do not : 88 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine CH 3 — NH 2 + HCHO = CH 3 — N = CH 2 + H 2 Methyl-methvlene amine B. P. 166° (CH 3 ) 2 = NH (CH 3 ) 2 = N\ + HCHO = CH 2 + H 2 (CH 3 ) 2 = NH (CH 3 ) 2 = N/ Methylene derivative of dimethylamine B. P. 80-85° The wide difference in the boiling points of these two compounds makes possible their separation. The bases can be regenerated from the methylene compounds by hydrolysis. 45. Methods of Preparation. — (1) The nitro derivatives of the hydrocarbons are reduced by nascent hydrogen, yield- ing primary amines : CH 3 — N0 2 + 6H = CH 3 — NH 2 . + 2 H 2 (2) The nitriles, including hydrocyanic acid, can take up four atoms of hydrogen, passing into primary amines : CH,— CN + 4 H = CH,— CH 2 NH 2 HCN+4H=CH 3 — NH 2 (3) Hydrolysis of alkyl' isocyanides yields primary amines and formic acid (40). (4) The action of alkyl halides on ammonia has already been referred to (43). (5) The oximes (32) are reduced by nascent hydrogen with the formation of primary amines : CH 3 — CH = NOH + 4 H = CH 3 — CH 2 — NH 2 + H 2 Acetaldoxime (6) From acid amides by the action of bromine and sodium hydroxide (53). The Nitriles and Amines 89 46. Isomerism of the Amines. — Two types of isomers of the amines should be mentioned. One is like the isomer- ism of the ethers, viz. metamerism. Thus : /CH3 CH3— CH 2 — NH 2 and NH \CH 3 CHaX ' CH 3 \ CH3— CH 2 — CH 2 — NH 2 with NH and with CH3— N Propylamine CH3 CH 2 / CH3/ Methyl-ethyl amine Trimethylamine The other depends upon the presence of normal or branched carbon chains as in the alcohols (9). Chemical Behavior. — (1) The amines are not decom- posed by saponifying agents, as acids and alkalies, and are oxidized only with great difficulty. (2) A reaction which distinguishes the primary from the secondary and tertiary amines is their behavior with chloroform. The primary amines react with CHC1 3 and alcoholic potassium hydroxide, with the formation of isonitriles. The characteristic odor of the isonitriles (40) serves as a delicate qualitative test : CH3— NH 2 +CHCI3 +3 KOH = CH3— N = C +3 KC1 +3 H 2 Methyl iaooyanide This is known as Hoffman's carbylamine reaction. (3) Nitrous acid reacts with primary amines, replacing the — NH 2 group by hydroxyl, — OH. Elementary nitrogen is liberated from the amino group : CH3— NH 2 + HONO = CH3OH + N 2 + H 2 90 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine This reaction is of great importance in synthetic chemis- try, since it makes possible the conversion of amines into the corresponding alcohols. Recently it has assumed great importance in the eyes of physiological chemists as the result of the discovery by Van Slyke of the conditions necessary for making this reaction the basis of a simple and highly accurate quanti- tative estimation of amino groups. With the secondary amines no elementary nitrogen is formed from the imino group =NH. Instead there are formed nitrosamines : CH3V CH3V /NH + HONO = ;N— NO CH/ . CH 3 / , Dimethyl nitrosamine Dimethyl nitrosamine is an oil with a yellowish color which is readily volatile with steam and can be separated from its mixtures in this way. Tertiary amines are not acted upon by nitrous acid. 47. Methylamine, CH 3 — NH 2 , occurs in Mercurialis perennis and in the distillate from bones and wood and in herring brine and putrefaction mixtures. It also appears to be a normal constituent of urine, but in very small amounts. It is a gas which greatly resembles am- monia, but its odor is also distinctly fish-like. It is even more strongly basic than ammonia. Its mixtures with air are explosive, and it burns with a yellow flame, in which it differs from ammonia, which is not combustible. One volume of water dissolves at 12.5° 1150 volumes of the gas. It precipitates as double salts the salts of platinum and The Nitriles and Amines 91 gold, and forms methylated ammonium magnesium phosphate, analogous to the ammonium magnesium phos- phate. Methylamine gives with Nessler's reagent (a solution of Hgl 2 and KI in potassium hydroxide) a precipitate which is insoluble in an excess of the reagent, or of water. This characteristic serves to distinguish it from the secondary and tertiary amines. Dimethylamine occurs among the distillation products of wood (pyroligneous acid, 51) and in guano. It boils at 7°. Trimethylamine, (CH 3 ) 3 N, is found in certain plants, as Chenopodium vulvaria and A rnica montana, in ergot, and elsewhere. It is a decomposition product of betaine (63) and similar plant bases and also of choline (48), and results from the action of putrefactive bacteria on materials con- taining these substances, or through destructive distilla- tion of the same, as in the distillation of vinasse. Some investigators have reported finding traces of trimethyk amine in urine, but in the light of recent studies with im- proved methods it appears that fresh normal urine of man or animals docs not contain this base. It has an odor resembling ammonia, but also fish-like. It boils at 3.2°. Its preparation has been described (43). Trimethylamine breaks up when strongly heated, form- ing methane and hydrocyanic acid : (CH 3 ) 3 =N = 2 CH4 + HCN Ethylamine, C2H5 — NH 2 , is formed from alanine (69) by destructive distillation, and possibly also by the action of 92 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine anaerobic bacteria on the same, but its origin through the latter agency has not been demonstrated. It has little biological importance. Oxyethylamine, CH 2 OH — CH 2 — NH 2 , has been found among the products of hydrolysis of lecithin (96). Aside from those mentioned the most important ali- phatic amines are the following: CH3V Isobutylamine, ^CH — CH 2 — NH 2 , is a liquid CH 3 / which boils at 68°. It mixes with water in all proportions. It is formed by putrefactive bacteria acting on amino iso valerianic acid, one of the digestion products of the proteins. Its formation will be described later (73). It differs from the primary amines having lower alkyl groups in that it causes a rise of blood pressure in animals. CH3V Isoamylamine, ,CH — CH 2 — CH 2 — NH 2 , boils at CIV 95°. It results from the putrefaction of proteins, being derived from the amino acid leucine (75) ; also on sterile self-digestion (autolysis) of the mushroom, Boletus edu- lus, doubtless formed from leucine. When intravenously injected it raises the blood pressure. With hydrochloric acid it forms a salt, isoamylamine hydrochloride, which is employed to some extent as an antipyretic. Both the free base and its hydrochloride are soluble in water. 48. Choline is a base of great physiological interest, since it occurs in all cells of both animals and plants and is especially abundant in nervous tissue. It does not occur The Nitriles and Amines ' 93 free in appreciable amount under normal conditions in the animal body, but may accumulate in the cerebrospinal fluid under certain pathological conditions, in which degeneration of nervous tissue is taking place. Choline is always a constituent of certain compounds related to the fats, called lecithins (96), which are present in large amounts in brain tissue and in egg yolk. From its mode of synthesis it is shown to be a derivative of glycol (22), and trimethylamine. It is formed by the condensation of trimethyl ammonium hydroxide with ethylene oxide (23). CHsV /H /CH 2 CH 2 OH rT[ CH 3 -X +(/ | =| / CH3 CH3/ \OH \CH 2 CH 2 — N-CH 3 OH CH3 . Choline The group — CH 2 — CH 2 OH may be called oxyethyl. The name of choline, considering it as a substituted am- monium hydroxide, is trimethyl-oxyethyl-ammonium hydroxide. Choline is a strong base. In the free state it absorbs moisture and CC^ readily from the air. Its solutions may be concentrated by boiling to 4 %, when it decomposes into trimethylamine and glycol. Choline is precipitated by a number of reagents, the most efficient being potassium periodide, which precipitates 1 part in 2,000,000 of water. Choline possesses no marked physiological action, but by the action of bacteria and of chemical reagents which abstract water, a base neurine is formed, which is 10-20 times more toxic than is choline itself (97). 94 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Other amines of physiological importance can best be described in their relations to the amino acids. 49. Physiological Action of the Amines. — Whereas ammonia, intravenously injected, produces tetanic con- vulsions, with quickening of the heart and respiration, the amines resulting from the replacement of the hydro- gen of ammonia by the aliphatic hydrocarbons have but a slight physiological action, although they irritate the mucous membranes. The convulsant effect of ammonia diminishes progressively as the hydrogen atoms are suc- cessively substituted, dimethylamine being less toxic than methylamine, etc. When the tertiary amines pass over to ammonium compounds, i.e. the nitrogen changes from the trivalent to thepentavalent state, a great increase in toxicity occurs. These substances resemble many of the alkaloids in their properties. CHAPTER VI THE FATTY ACIDS 50. It has been pointed out in connection with the alde- hydes (30, 31) that these can be further oxidized to acids : R— CH 2 OH +02= R— COOH + HO The group — ^\oti is called carboxyl. Its — OH com- plex behaves like a unit in the reaction of a carboxyl with the chlorides of phosphorus, the resulting compounds being acid chlorides : 3 CH,— COOH + PC1 3 = 3CH3— Of + H3PO3 X C1 Acetyl chloride In water solution the organic acids give the tests charac- teristic of the hydrogen ion, i.e. they are acid in taste and redden blue litmus, and change the color of numerous dyes from that seen in their alkaline solutions. The compounds containing the carboxyl group conduct the electric current as do the inorganic acids, but frequently to a much less extent, since many of them are to be classed among the weak acids, i.e. they dissociate the hydrogen ion to but a slight extent. For each of the primary alcohols there is a corresponding aldehyde and acid, thus : 95 96 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine R— CH 2 OH -^ R— CHO -^— ► R— COOH Alcohol Aldehyde Acid The acids derived from the aliphatic hydrocarbons are called fatty acids because most of them are found as esters in the fats of animals and plants. The lower members of the series are liquids of pungent odor and corrosive action. They boil without decomposition and are readily soluble in water and behave like strong acids. Formic acid, HCOOH, is the lowest member of the series. It occurs free in ants and in the stings of some insects, as bees and caterpillars, and also in certain nettles, in the fruit of the soap tree (Sapindus sapo- naria), and in tamarinds and fir cones. It is always found in traces in perspiration and in urine. It is a colorless liquid with a pungent odor. At 20° its spe- cific gravity is 1.221. It solidifies in a freezing mixture, melts at + 8.3° and boils at 100.8°. Formic acid is readily soluble in water and in many organic solvents. Its vapors are combustible. It is the strongest acid of the series, being dissociated into H + ions to about twelve times the extent of acetic acid. It produces intense irritation of the skin and forms blisters. Formic acid does not behave like its homologues in cer- tain respects. It is easily oxidized, with the formation of carbon dioxide and water, and therefore possesses strong reducing power, depositing mercury and silver from solu- tions of their oxides. In this respect it has the properties of an aldehyde, and its ready decomposition through oxida- The Fatty Acids 97 tion probably finds its explanation in the acid possessing the formula HO — C^ , or hydroxy formaldehyde. X H On taking up oxygen the compound, hydroxy formic acid containing two hydroxyls, HO — C^ , is formed. X OH Two hydroxyls cannot remain attached to a single carbon atom, however, except in a few circumstances (see chloral), and water is immediately separated with the liberation of carbon dioxide : HO— C/ = C0 2 + H 2 X)H Formation. — - (1) Formic acid is obtained by the oxida- tion of methyl alcohol : CH3— OH +20 = HCOOH + H 2 (2) Hydrocyanic acid, HCN, behaves as a nitrile in that it can take up two molecules of water, forming the ammonium salt of formic acid: HCN +.2H 2 = HCOONEU From the ammonium salt free formic acid can be ob- tained by treatment with a nonvolatile acid and distilling : 2HC00NH* + H 2 S0 4 = 2 HCOOH + (NH^SOi (3) Carbon monoxide gas, CO, reacts with the caustic alkalies : CO + KOH = HCOOK Potassium formate 98 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Chemical behavior. — (1) The above reaction serves as another example of the passage of carbon from the divalent to the tetravalent state (40). At 169° formic acid is again dissociated into water and carbon monoxide : O = C<^g H -> CO + H 2 Formic acid indicating that at high temperatures the carbon in certain complexes tends to become spontaneously divalent. (2) On strongly heating the alkali formates with alkali hydroxide they are decomposed into alkali carbonate and hydrogen : HC0 OK + KOH = K 2 C0 3 + H 2 (3) The alkali formates when heated to about 400° decompose into oxalic acid and hydrogen : COOK 2HCOOK =| +H 2 COOK (4) Formic acid can be transformed back into its nitrile, HCN, by heating its ammonium salt above its melting point. As an intermediary product, formamide (53), is produced : — H 2 — H 2 HCOONH4 > HCONH 2 -» HCN Ammonium formate Formamide (5) Concentrated sulphuric acid withdraws the ele- ments of water from formic acid, liberating carbon mon- oxide : HCOOH = H 2 + CO Of the salts of formic acid most are readily soluble. Mercury formate, (HCOO) 2 Hg, and silver formates, The Fatty Acids 99 Ag(HCOO), are difficultly soluble, but are readily decom- posed on warming. Lead formate, Pb(HCOO) 2 , is soluble in 63 parts of water at 16° and in 5.5 parts at 100°. Zinc formate, Zn(HCOO) 2 , is insoluble in alcohol, a property which distinguishes it from the zinc salts of its volatile homologues, acetic, butyric, etc. (6) The reduction of the heavy metals by formic acid may be illustrated by the decomposition of the silver and mercuric salts : 2 HCOOAg = HCOOH + CCk + 2 Ag 2 (HCOO) 2 Hg = HCOOH + C0 2 + 2 HCOOHg Mercuric formate Mercurous formate (7) A qualitative test for formic acid which is of great delicacy rests on the formation of carbon monoxide gas on heating with concentrated sulphuric acid. The gas is passed into a dilute solution of blood and the latter is then examined spectroscopically for the characteristic spectrum of carbon monoxide haemoglobin. (8) A property of formic acid of great interest biologi- cally is that of spontaneously decomposing into hydrogen and carbon dioxide in the presence of metallic rhodium : HCOOH -► H 2 + CO, The attempt has been made to explain the mechanism of fermentation on the assumption that yeast produces an organic catalyst which effects this decomposition (see Fermentation, 164). 51. Acetic acid, CH 3 COOH, is the acid found in vine- gar, where it is derived by the fermentation of glucose 100 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine into alcohol and the subsequent oxidation of the alcohol through aldehyde to acid : + +0 CH 3 ~CH 2 OH -> CH3— CHO -> CH3COOH Its formation is the cause of the souring of beer, wine, and cider. Cider vinegar contains small amounts of alcohol and of acids other than acetic (tartaric, succinic, etc.) and also ethyl esters of these acids, and to these it owes its flavor. It contains usually but 3 to 5 % of acid. The acid volatilizes readily, and in order to obtain it in a pure form from its dilute solutions it is con- verted into a salt which, being non-volatile, can be heated to evaporate the water. The salt is finally treated with hydrochloric acid, avoiding an excess, and the mixture distilled, when strong acetic acid passes over : (CH3— COO) 2 Ca + 2HC1 = 2 CH 3 — COOH + CaCl 2 Pyroligneous Acid. — When hardwoods are heated in a distilling apparatus, a tarry product containing carbolic acid and related substances is formed, and there distills over a gaseous mixture containing hydrogen, methane, carbon monoxide, and carbon dioxide, a moderate amount of higher hydrocarbons (7%), and a mixture of water, methyl alcohol, acetone, and acetic acid, together with numerous other compounds in small quantities as im- purities. This mixture is known as pyroligneous acid. Methyl alcohol and acetone are so readily volatile that they can be distilled from the dilute acetic acid, thus effect- The Fatty Acids 101 ing a partial separation. The acetic acid is then neutral- ized with lime, forming calcium acetate, Ca(OOC — CE^, and the latter is then heated to 200° in contact with air to oxidize the tarry matters. From this crude calcium acetate the acetic acid is obtained. In marked contrast to formic acid, acetic acid is extraor- dinarily resistant to oxidation. It is not oxidized by chromic acid under any ordinary conditions and can be passed through a glowing tube without decomposition. It is not oxidized by dilute solutions of potassium per- manganate, which quickly decompose formic acid. Silver acetate in water solution can be heated without reduc- tion (blackening) taking place. It is this great stability which explains why acetic acid occurs in such large quantities in the pyroligneous acid. During the decomposition of the various complex com- pounds (cellulose, lignin, pentosans, etc.) inumerous de- composition products are formed which, being unstable at high temperatures, are further decomposed, and in the end only the most stable products remain. Numerous compounds on oxidation yield acetic acid, and, owing to its great stability the reaction stops at this point. Even the animal body possesses but a very limited capacity to oxidize acetic acid. Normal human urine contains from 60 to 280 mgm. of acetic acid per day. Acetic acid, despite its stability, is readily fermented in the form of its calcium salt by certain organisms into methane and carbon dioxide : CH 3 — COOH = CH, + C02 102 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Calcium acetate when heated in the dry condition to the point of decomposition- yields acetone and calcium car- bonate : CH 3 CH 3 -^CO(X I \ ;Ca = CO +CaC0 3 . CH 3 — COO/ ! CH 3 This type of decomposition is common to the higher fatty acids and is therefore a general method of preparing ketones. When the salts of two different acids are em- ployed, mixed ketones result : CH,— COOca + CH 3 — CH 2 — COOca Calcium propionate -> CH 3 — CO— CH 2 — CH 3 (ca = * Ca) Methyl -ethyl-ketone Glacial Acetic Acid. — When nearly free from water acetic acid solidifies when cooled below 16.7° to a crystalline mass, from which it derived its name, glacial acetic acid. It boils at 118° and has a specific gravity of 1.055 at 15°. When mixed with water, contraction and increase in den- sity ensue, the maximum change taking place when equal molecules of water and acetic acid are combined. This solution contains 76 per cent acid and at 15° has a specific gravity of 1.075. On further dilution the specific gravity decreases until a 50 per cent solution has nearly the same density, as has the glacial acid. It is therefore impossible to employ the specific gravity as an index to the strength of this acid. This is obtained by titration with a standard solution of an alkali employing an indicator. The Fatty Acids 103 Tests for acetic acid : (1) The odor of acetic acid is ex- traordinarily characteristic and easily recognizable. (2) When acetic acid or an acetate is treated with alco- hol and sulphuric acid, the characteristic odor of ethyl acetate is obtained. (3) From concentrated solutions silver nitrate precipi- tates the white, difficultly soluble silver acetate, which contains 64.65 per cent of silver. 52. The Acid Chlorides. — The fatty acids are acted upon by the trichloride of phosphorus with the replace- ment of hydroxyl by chlorine, the resulting compounds being known as acid chlorides : 3 CH 3 — COOH + PC1 3 = 3 CH3COCI + H3PO3 Acetyl chloride It is a liquid with a suffocating odor, which boils at 51°, specific gravity 1.138 at 0°. It fumes in the air owing to its reaction with the moisture therein. It decomposes vio- lently with water, forming acetic and hydrochloric acids : CH3— COC1 + HOH = CH 3 — COOH + HC1 With alcohols it reacts to form esters : CH3COCI + HOCH 2 — CH 3 = CH 3 — COOC 2 H 6 + HC1 Ethyl acetate This reaction is one of great importance in determining the presence and number of hydroxyl groups which are contained in a compound under investigation. The ester is produced according to the above reaction. This is a neutral compound and can be separated from the excess of acetyl chloride by treatment with water. A measured quantity of the acetyl compound (ester) is then treated 104 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine with a known volume of standardized alcoholic potassium hydroxide and heated until the ester is completely hy- drolysed, i.e. reconverted into acetic acid and alcohol. From the amount of alkali used up in neutralizing the acetic acid which was formed in the hydrolysis the number of hydroxyl groups can be estimated. 53. The Acid Amides. — The amides may be regarded as organic acids in which the hydroxyl of the carboxyl group is replaced by the amino group, — NH 2 : R— Cf R— Cf - R— C< N OH X C1 X NH 2 Acid Acid chloride Acid amide The amides are formed in several ways which illustrate their relationship to other classes of compounds : (1) Acid chlorides react with ammonia, forming hydro- chloric acid and amide : CH3— COC1 + 2NH 3 = CH 3 — CONH 2 + NH 4 C1. Acetamide If substituted ammonias (amines) are employed for ammonia, alkylated amides result : CHs— COC1 + 2 NH 2 — CH 3 = CH3— CO— NHCH 3 Methylamine Methyl acetamide + CHs— NHsCl Methyl-ammonium chloride (2) The alkyl nitriles react with one molecule of water, forming acid amides : CH 3 CN + H 2 = CH 3 — CO— NH 2 This reaction is the first step in the formation of acid from nitrile. The amides take on a second molecule of The Fatty Acids 105 water, passing into the ammonium salts of the correspond- ing acids (50). Strong dehydrating reagents, such as phosphorus pen- toxide, can abstract from the acid amides a molecule of water with the regeneration of nitriles : 3 CH 3 — CO— NH 2 +P 2 5 = 3 CH3— CN + 2 H3PO4 In order to effect the addition of one molecule of water only, the nitriles are treated with some reagent which con- tains water, but which has a strong affinity for the latter (e.g. strong sulphuric or hydrochloric acid). (3) By the dry distillation of the ammonium salts of the fatty acids, or by heating them in a closed tube to 230°, water is separated with the formation of the amide : CH,— COONH4 = CH3— CO— NH 2 + H 2 (4) Esters can react with ammonia with the production of amides and alcohols : CH 3 — COOCHs + NHs = CH3— CO— NH 2 + C 2 H 5 OH The amides, being derivatives of ammonia, which is strongly basic, formed by the exchange of one hydrogen for an acid radical, possess very feeble basic properties. Thus acetamide forms a salt with hydrochloric acid, which is however very easily decomposed by water. Acetamide hydrochloride is formed when dry hydrochloric acid gas is passed into an ethereal solution of acetamide. On the other hand the hydrogen of the NH 2 group in the acid amides behaves like acid hydrogen. An aqueous solution of acetamide dissolves mercuric oxide, forming a compound analogous to the salts : 106 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine CH3— CO— NH 2 CH3— CO— NH 2 + HgO = )>Hg + H 2 CH 3 — CO— NH The relationships and mutual transformations among the compounds of the types thus far considered, excluding the ethers and esters, are shown by the following scheme. The series includes some compounds which will be con- sidered immediately : CH 3 ' CH, rtTT CH, +0 CH3 I + CI I AgOH J ^± 1 CH 3 *" CH 2 C1ZT^ CH 2 OH CH3 CH 2 C1 CI >• CH 2 -NH 2 H + NH 2 > COOH COOH J AgOH o\ < ? HWH ^ OOH > CHO CH 2 OH CHO COOH i — '- H COOH COOH O 1 aOH CH 2 OH The Fatty Acids 107 54. Halogen ' Derivatives of Acetic Acid. — When chlorine or broinine acts upon acetic acid a substitution of hydrogen by halogen takes place. The resulting products may be mono-, di-, or trichloracetic acid depend- ing on the extent of the substitution. Chloracetic acid, CH 2 C1— COOH, melts at 62.5°. It exerts a corrosive action similar to that of glacial acetic acid on the skin, and the vapors are highly irritating. Dichloracetic acid, CHC1 2 — COOH, melts at - 4°. Its chief interest is its usefulness in syntheses of other compounds. Trichloracetic acid, CC1 3 — COOH, is a solid, M. P. 80°. It is extremely caustic in its action on the skin, and is employed for the removal of warts, corns, and similar growths. It is likewise employed as a precipitant for proteins, with which it forms compounds which are rela-> tively insoluble in water or dilute acids. The acidity of the chlorinated acetic acids, i.e. the de- gree of dissociation of hydrogen ions, increases with increas- ing chlorine. All are stronger acids than acetic. The strength of 'trichloracetic acid ranks it with the strong mineral acids. With fatty acids containing three or more carbon atoms chlorine or bromine react to form halogen substituted acids. In all cases the hydrogen substituted is one bound to the carbon atom neighboring the carboxyl group. This is designated the alpha carbon atom and is usually abbre- viated a. Thus : CH3— CH 2 — COOH+2C! = CH3— CHC1— COOH+HC1 Propionic acid O-chlorprop ionic acid 108 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine The successive carbon atoms of the' fatty acids are designated by the letters of the Greek alphabet, in order of their position, with respect to the carboxyl group. Thus: . . . CH 2 — CH 2 — CH 2 — CH 2 — COOH 8 7 j8 a 55. The Hydroxy Acids. — With water on prolonged boiling the alpha-halogen acids react with the replacement of halogen by hydroxyl. The exchange is greatly facili- tated by the presence of silver oxide. CH 2 C1 CH 2 OH + HOH= | +HC1 COOH COOH Chloracetic acid Glycolic acid Glycolic acid is of interest from the biological standpoint. It may be regarded as an oxyacetic acid. It is found in unripe grapes, in sugar cane, and in many other plants, especially in the green parts. It is taken internally there- fore with the food to a slight extent. It is somewhat toxic in large doses. It is a crystalline compound, M. P. 80°, easily soluble in water, alcohol, and ether, but difficultly in acetone. It does not appear in the urine after adminis- tration, but has been found after the ingestion of glycol. It is a possible intermediary product of the oxidation of certain complex foodstuffs in the course of metabolism. Its relation to alcohol and glycol, from which it is formed by oxidation, is seen from the following formulae : CH 3 CH 3 CH 3 CH 2 OH O O O CH 2 OH CHO COOH COOH Ethyl alcohol Acetaldehyde Acetic acid Glycolic acid The Fatty Acids 109 CH 2 OH CHO CHO O CH 2 OH Glycol o CH 2 OH Glycol aldehyde COOH Glyoxylic acid On further oxidation it yields a compound called gly- oxylic acid, which is at the same time both an acid and an aldehyde. Glyoxylic acid is in turn in conformity with its aldehyde nature oxidized to oxalic acid (100) which contains two carboxyl groups : CHO COOH O COOH COOH Oxalic acid 56. The Amino Acids. — Not only can a hydrogen atom of the methyl group of acetic acid be replaced by halogen, hydroxyl, or alkyl group, but also by the amino group — NH 2 , with the formation of amino acids. In respect to halogen, hydroxyl, and amino derivatives, formic acid behaves very differently from its homologues, acetic, propionic, etc., acids. Thus chlor formic acid C1COOH is incapable of existence in the free state, but its esters are known. Thus COCl 2 , which is to be regarded as the acid chloride of chlor formic acid, reacts with alcohols to form chlor formic esters : CI— CO— CI + HOC 2 H 5 = CI— COOC 2 H 6 + HC1 Chlor formic esters The chlor formic esters behave like acid chlorides, how- ever, in that they are decomposed by water. 110 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Carbamic Acid. — The ammonium salt of ammo-formic •acid, or carbamic acid, is formed when ammonia gas reacts with carbon dioxide : 2NH 3 + C0 2 = NH 2 — COONH 4 Ammonium carbamate Ammonium carbamate is present as an impurity in commercial ammonium carbonate. On treatment of NH 2 ^— COONH4 with a mineral acid it is at once decom- posed with evolution of carbon dioxide : NH 2 — COONH4 + HC1 = NH4CI + NH 2 — COOH NH 2 — COOH = C0 2 + NH 3 The metallic salts of carbamic acid are more stable, but decompose at ordinary temperatures in solution into car- bonates : NH 2 — COOK + H 2 = NH 3 + KHC0 3 Carbamic acid is distinguished from carbonic acid in the solubility of certain of its salts. Solutions of sodium or potassium carbamate give no precipitate with calcium chloride, as do the corresponding carbonates. The alkali salts of carbamic acid lose water on heating to redness and pass into the cyanates : NH 2 — COOK= KCNO + H 2 Ammonium carbamate is an intermediary compound in the formation of urea in the Living tissues. Ammonium carbamate on the abstraction of a molecule of water forms the amide of carbamic acid, or carbamide, the popular name for the latter being urea, a name which was given to the The Fatty Acids 111 principal nitrogenous compound in the urine of mammals before the development of the science of organic chemis- try: NH 2 — COONH4 = NH 2 — CO— NH 2 + H 2 Urea This structure of urea is further confirmed by its forma- tion from carbon oxychloride and ammonia: /CI HNH 2 /NH 2 COT + =CC< +2HC1 \C1 HNH 2 \NH 2 Urea is likewise produced by a rearrangement of the atoms within the molecule of ammonium isocyanate when the latter is heated above its melting point : NH 4 QCN Rearrangeme ^CO^ NH2 \NH 2 This transformation was observed by Wohler in 1828 and was the first synthesis of an organic compound. The change of ammonium isocyanate into urea is never quite complete, for a condition is reached where a definite pro- portion between the isocyanate molecules and urea mole- cules exists. The reaction is reversible. When silver nitrate is added to a solution of pure urea, silver isocyanate is precipitated. The amount of isocyanate present in such solutions is, however, extremely small, but if removed by the formation of an insoluble compound the reaction proceeds in the direction which leads to its formation. In certain reactions urea behaves as if it had the struc- 112 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine ture C — OH. Thus methyl alcohol condenses with \NH 2 cyanamid C N to form methyl isourea: \nh 2 ^N /OCH3 Cf + HOCH 3 = C=NH. \NH 2 \NH 2 The structure is proven by the fact that on heating this compound with hydrochloric acid (hydrolysis) methyl chloride is formed. From methylurea, which is formed when the salt of cyanic acid with methylamine (methyl ammonium cyanate) is heated alone, there results, on hydrolysis with hydrochloric acid, methylamine : . Rearrangement /NHCH 3 CH 3 NH 2 • HOCN 9-CO( \NH 2 Methyl urea CH 3 NH 2 > C0 2 + + H 2 NH 3 In isomethyl urea the methyl group cannot be linked to nitrogen. When heated, urea melts and at a higher temperature begins to evolve gas, consisting of ammonia and carbon dioxide. The melt finally solidifies. There are several types of decomposition which take place, the principal ones being the formation of biuret and cyanuric acid. (1) NH 2 — CO— NH 2 H J HN— CO— NH 2 = NH 2 — CO— NH— CO— NH 2 + NH 3 Biuret The Fatty Acids 113 (2) H HN— CO— NH— CO— NH H 2 N —CO— NH HI /CO— NH\ = NH( )CO + 2NH 3 . \CO— NH/ Cyanurio acid The reactive form of cyanuric acid is probably not that indicated by the above formula. It is a tribasic acid, and forms salts, indicating the presence of three acid hydrogens. It is best represented by the following structural formula : X)H N^ V-OH N C— N x \)H 57. Urea is one of the longest known of organic com- pounds. It constitutes 85-90 % of the nitrogen of normal human urine. The average amount of urea eliminated daily by a man on an ordinary diet is about 30 grams. The amount may vary greatly with the character of the diet, being high when much protein is eaten and low when the protein intake is low. It is a neutral substance, forming crystals which melt at 130-132°; very soluble in water (1 : 1) -and in alcohol (1 : 5 of cold alcohol), but insoluble in ether and chloroform. Urea is a neutral substance with respect to indicators, but acts as a feeble base in that it forms salts with acids. Urea nitrate, CO(NH 2 ) 2 • HNO3, is a crystalline compound soluble in water, but slightly soluble in nitric acid. It is 114 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine slightly soluble in alcohol, but easily in acetone. It is employed for the isolation of urea from urine. The salt is decomposed by barium carbonate : 2 CO(NH 2 ) 2 • HN0 3 + BaC0 3 = Ba(N0 3 ) 2 + C0 2 + /NH 2 H 2 + CO< N NH 2 The urea is separated from Ba(N0 3 ) 2 by solution in alcohol. Urea forms salts with other acids, the most important being that with oxalic acid, [CO(NH 2 ) 2 ] 2 C 2 H 2 0,t. This is a crystalline compound soluble in water, but nearly insoluble in oxalic acid solutions, slightly soluble in. alcohol. It is also employed for the isolation of urea from urine. Urea also forms a compound with mercuric nitrate and mercuric oxide of the formula : 2 CO(NH 2 ) 2 • Hg(N0 3 ) 2 • 3 HgO It likewise forms a compound with mercuric oxide, CO(NH 2 ) 2 HgO. Urea in moderate concentration possesses no appre- ciable toxicity for the higher animals, but is much more toxic to birds. The latter do not excrete their waste nitrogen as urea, but principally as ammonium urate (147). Even in so great dilution as {% solutions, urea is noticeably toxic to certain plants. Certain bacteria can employ urea as a source of energy, although it yields very little energy on decomposition. The change which takes place in urea fermentation is as follows : CO(NH 2 ) 2 + H 2 = CO, + 2NH 3 + 102 Calories The Fatty Acids 115 Since the fermentation always takes place in solution, the products of the decomposition unite with water to form ammonium carbonate. This decomposition of urea is brought about by an enzyme or organic catalyzer produced by the microorganisms. It has recently been discovered that this enzyme, which is called urease, is present in liberal amounts in certain beans, notably the Jack bean and the Soy bean. When an extract of the beans is added to a solution of urea and the mixture protected from bacterial action by toluene, the transformation of urea into ammonium carbonate takes place rapidly and is complete within a few hours at favorable temperatures. The am- monia is titrated, employing methyl orange as indicator, either directly or after aspirating it into a solution of standard acid. This method was first described by Marshall. The quantitative estimation of urea by the Folin-Benedict method is effected by converting it into CO2 and NH3 by heating the acidified urine in an autoclave. The resulting ammonia is removed by a current of air and is absorbed by a measured quantity of standard acid. A separate determination of ammonia is made on an unheated sample and the result subtracted from that obtained with the heated, the difference representing urea. 58. Thiourea is formed from ammonium isothiocyanate on treating in a manner analogous to the formation of Urea from ammonium isocyanate : /NH 2 NH4SCN — >- S=C< 116 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Thiourea crystallizes readily in very large crystals. It is readily soluble in water but insoluble in alcohol. It melts at 172°. It exhibits the behavior of existing in the tautomeric form in part, for on treatment with alkyl iodide it forms alkyl thioureas which possess the pseudo form, the alkyl group being linked to sulphur instead of nitrogen : /NH 2 /NH 2 C— SH + IC2H5 = C— S— C 2 H 5 + HI Thiourea Pseudo-ethyl-thiourea That the alkyl group is linked to sulphur is shown by its decomposition into ethyl mercaptan instead of ethyl amine, as it would were the ethyl group linked to nitrogen (57). When treated with mercuric oxide thiourea loses hydrogen sulphide and forms cyanamide : NH 2 NH 2 V SH H > C +H 2 S N 59. Esters of Carbamic Acid. — Carbon oxychloride, COCl 2 , which is formed by the direct union of carbon monoxide and chlorine in sunlight, can react with alcohol to form the ethyl ester of chlor formic acid : CI— CO— CI +HOC 2 H 6 = CI— CO— OC 2 H 6 +HC1 Chlor formic ester Chlor formic ethyl ester is a volatile liquid of -very pun- gent odor which boils at 93°. It reacts like an acid chloride, being decomposed by water. The Fatty Acids 117 60. Urethanes. — Chlor formic ester reacts with am- monia to form amino ethyl formate, the ethyl ester of amino formic acid. This compound is called urethane: /CI /NH 2 CO +NH3 = CO +HC1 \0C 2 H 6 \0C 2 H 5 Urethane is a colorless crystalline substance possessing a faint peculiar odor and a taste somewhat like that of potassium nitrate. It is soluble in 0.6 parts of alcohol, 1 part of water, 1 part of ether, and in 3 parts of glycerol. It melts at 48-50° and boils at 180°. It is employed as a sedative and hypnotic. A number of derivatives of urethane have been introduced as hypnotics and sedatives in the quest for those which possess the most advantageous properties. Among these may be mentioned : Hedonal is an ester of carbamic acid with the amyl alcohol, methyl propyl carbinol : /NH 2 CO /CH,. \0CH— CH 2 — CH 2 — CHs It has a greater hypnotic effect than has urethane. The urethanes are diuretics, as well as hypnotics. In .the body" they are oxidized to carbon dioxide and urea. 61. Guanidine is formed when cyanamide reacts with ammonium chloride : C ' + NH4CI = \nh 2 /NH 2 C=NH \NH 2 HC1 Guanidine hydrochloride 118 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine It may be regarded as urea in which the oxygen is re- placed by the divalent =NH group (imino group). It also results from heating thiourea through the loss of hydrogen sulphide : H 2 N— c [s|— N]ft] = NH 2 — CN /NH 2 NH 2 — C s N- + NH 3 • HCNS = C =NH + HCNS Cyanamide Ammonium thiocyanate \NH 2 Guanidine is a colorless crystalline compound of a strongly basic character which absorbs moisture and carbon dioxide readily, forming a solution of guanidine carbonate, [NH =C = (NH 2 ) 2 ]HC0 3 . It is hydrolyzed by alkalies to urea and ammonia : /NH 2 . /NH 2 C=NH + H 2 = COT + NH 3 \NH 2 \NH 2 Guanidine reacts with strong nitric acid to form a nitro compound, nitro guanidine, which on reduction yields amino guanidine: /NH— N0 2 /NH— NH 2 C=NH +6H=C=NH \NH 2 \NH 2 The latter is hydrolyzed by boiling with dilute acids or alkalies, forming hydrazine (32), carbon dioxide, and am- monia. 62. Arginine is an amino acid obtained by the hy- drolysis of proteins by mineral acids. On hydrolysis by alkalies it is split up into urea and ornithine, an acid con- The Fatty Acids 119 taining five carbon atoms and two amino groups, which is known by its behavior and synthesis to be a-S-diamino valerianic acid (71). Furthermore arginine is synthesized by the condensation of cyanamide and ornithine : /NH 2 NH > C = N+H 2 N— CH 2 — CH 2 — CH 2 — CH— COOH= Cyanamide Ornithine NH 2 NH. NH=c/ \NH— r.TT„_ 2 NH— CH 2 — CH 2 — CH 2 — CH— COOH a-amino-S-guanidine valerianic acid (Arginine) Its cleavage into urea and ornithine is illustrated by the reaction : NH, s NH = C/ /' NH 2 ><" I HO, S NH— CH 2 — (CH 2 ) 2 — CH— COOH NH 2 NH 2 I I = CO + NH 2 — CH 2 — (CH 2 ) 2 — CH— COOH NH 2 On vigorous treatment with alkalies the urea passes on into ammonia and carbon dioxide (57). Arginine is a white crystalline compound which melts at 207.5° with decomposition. It is easily soluble in water, but insoluble in alcohol. It is precipitated by phospho- tungstic acid, and by silver nitrate in the presence of barium hydroxide. 120 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine /NH 2 63. Aminoacetic Acid, glycine, glycocoll, prr _t NH 2 NH 2 / I CH 3 HN=C +HOH = CO+ | \ /CH3 I NH— CH 2 — COOH N NH 2 Sarcosine \CH 2 — COOH Creatinine is the inner anhydride of creatine. It is formed from creatine by boiling with mineral acids, which causes the abstraction of the elements of water : NH V /NHH / \ 1 HN=C — H 2 = HN=C \ * \ /ch 3 \ /ch 3 ;co N N CH/ ^CHa— COOH Creatinine This compound is a never failing constituent of the urines of mammals. The daily excretion for man is .75 to 1.5 gram, and on diets free from creatine or creatinine the output is surprisingly constant and is independent of the intake of protein. Its precursor in the body is unknown. Creatinine is soluble in 11.5 parts of cold water and more readily in hot. It dissolves in 625 parts of cold absolute alcohol. It is a stronger base than ammonia and displaces the latter from its salts. The most important salts are the potassium creatinine picrate, C 4 H 7 ON 3 • C 6 H 3 7 N 3 • C 6 H 2 7 N 2 K The Fatty Acids 125 and the zinc chloride double salt, (CJ^ONs^ZnCk. The most important color reaction of creatinine is that with picric acid and sodium hydrate. The color closely resem- bles the deep orange of a solution of potassium dichromate. The Betaines. — These form a group of natural bases. The simplest member of the group is betaine or trimethyl glycocoll anhydride. CH 2 — N(CH3) 3 COO HOH — H 2 Trimethyl ammonium Acetic acid (hypothetical) CH 2 — N(CH3) 3 I I CO— o Betaine Its relation to the following bases is of interest : CH 2 — N(CH,)» I CH 2 I CH 2 I CO — o 7-n-butyro betaine CH 2 — CH 2 OH I N=(CH3) 3 CH— NH. II >CH C NT I CH 2 I' CH— N(CH3) 3 I I CO— o Trimethyl histidine CH2 = CH2 I N=(CHa)3 CH 2 — CH 2 I I CH 2 CH— CO \/ I N O /\ CH3 CH3 Stachydrine or Proline-betaine OH Choline OH Neurine CH2 — CH\ 1 N N=(CH 3 ) 3 X)H ■/■ OH OH Muscarine CH 2 — CO OH N^(CH 3 ) 3 1 OH Betaine 126 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine The betaines are found in numerous plant extracts. Those from mushrooms and spores have been most investigated. • y^n-butyro betaine has been isolated from putrid meat ; trimethyl histidine and muscarine from mushroom extract ; stqchydrine from various plants ; and choline and neurine from the brain, the latter only after decomposition. 64. Acid Anhydrides. — There exists an important class of compounds which may be regarded as derived from two molecules of acid by the abstraction of a molecule of water. These are known as acid anhydrides : CH3— COOH CH 3 — C(X >0 + H 2 ch 3 — cooh CH3— c O + H 2 = 2 CH3COOH CH3— CO 7 The higher members are much more stable toward water. Acid anhydrides react with alcohol to form esters in the sense of the following equation : R— CO v HOR' >0 + , =2 R— COOR' + H 2 R— CO x HOR' Acid anhydride Alcohol Ester The Fatty Acids 127 They are therefore useful in the same way as are the acyl chlorides for acylating alcohols. With primary and secondary amines they react, producing acyl derivatives : CH3— CO v H 2 N— R >0 + =2CH3— CO— NH— R+H 2 CH3— (XT H 2 N— R Acetic anhydride, (CH3 — 00)2=0, is the most impor- tant of the anhydrides of the fatty acids. It is a mobile liquid of suffocating odor, B.P. 137°, Sp. Gr. 1.073 at 20°. It is a reagent of great importance, being employed for the production of acyl derivatives. 65. Propionic Acid, CH3— CH 2 — COOH, the next homologue of acetic acid, is found in sweat and in mixtures resulting . from the putrefaction of proteins by bacteria, where it is derived from certain amino acids by reactions which will be described later. It is formed from ethyl chloride through propionitrile, as an intermediate product : (1) CH3— CH 2 C1 + KCN = GH3— CH 2 — CN + KC1 (2) CH3— CH Z CN + 2 H 2 = CH 3 — CH 2 — COOH +NH3 It is likewise formed by the oxidation of primary propyl alcohol : CH3— CH 2 — CH 2 OH +30= CH3— CH 2 — COOH + H 2 This mode of formation makes clear its structure.^ It is a liquid with an odor which is suggestive of acetic acid, but is easily distinguishable from it. B.P. 140.7°. It is soluble in water in all proportions, but much less so in 128 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine strong calcium chloride solutions. On adding this salt to its solutions it separates as an oil. Propionic acid is difficult to test for with certainty, since its properties are so closely similar to those of its immediate homologues, acetic and butyric acids. The silver salt contains 59.65 % of silver, and the barium salt 48.40 % of barium. The analysis of these salts, both of which are sparingly soluble in water, is the most convincing qualitatitive test, a-chlor propionic acid, CH 3 — CHC1 — COOH, is formed by the direct action of chlorine upon propionic acid in the sunlight. The isomeric /3-chlor derivative, CH 2 C1 — CH 2 — COOH, is likewise formed to some extent. The structure of these acids is made clear by other methods of formation ; thus acetaldehyde adds hydrocyanic acid, forming hydroxy propionitrile : CH3 CH3 CH 3 I 2H 2 I I + HCN = CH U- CHOH + NH3 CHO |\ I OH COOH CN a-hydroxy propionic acid, or lactic acid, yields when treated with PCU a product in which both the hydroxy! group of the carboxyl and that on the a-carbon atom are replaced by chlorine, viz. : a-chlor propionyl chloride, CH3— CHC1— COC1. This, like acid chlorides in general, is decomposed by water, forming a-chlor propionic acid : CH 3 — CH 2 C1— COC1 + HOH = CH 3 — CHC1— COOH + HC1 The Fatty Acids 129 a-chlor propionic acid is of interest because it can be employed either for conversion into lactic acid or into a-amino-propionic acid, or alanine, one of the amino acids derived from proteins on hydrolysis : CEt— CHC1— COOR + AgOH = CH 3 — CHOH— COOR + AgCl Lactic acid eater CH3— CHCl— COOR + NH3 = CH3— CH— COOR + HC1 I NH 2 Alanine ester 66. Lactic Acid, CH3— CHOH— COOH, is the acid of sour milk. It is formed from milk sugar by the action of the lactic acid bacteria. Other sugars, as cane sugar, can likewise be used by this organism with the production of this acid. If a liter of 10 % cane sugar solution be treated with 40 grams of calcium carbonate and 20-30 cc. of sour milk to supply the bacteria and the proteins, salts, etc., necessary for their multiplication, and the mixture kept at 37° for six to eight days, with occa- sional agitation, it will contain a considerable amount of calcium lactate. The solution is then boiled and evapo- rated to a small volume and cooled, when calcium lactate will crystallize out. On treating the crystals with sulphu- ric acid, calcium sulphate and free lactic acid are formed. The lactic acid can be extracted from the mixture by ether, in which it is readily soluble. On distilling off the ether lactic acid remains. Lactic acid occurs in other fermented substances, such as 130 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine sauerkraut and ensilage, in both cases arising through the agency of microorganisms. The conditions essential to the preservation of succulent vegetables and green fodders in these forms are close packing in an air-tight container from which the gases produced can escape. Rapid fer- mentation and respiration quickly remove the small amount of oxygen from the container, and through the catalytic action of enzymes in the plant cells a part of the sugars are converted into lactic acid. The acidity, to- gether with the very considerable rise in temperature, causes the death of most of the microorganisms, and the material is preserved from putrefaction or further fermentation. Lactic acid is a sirupy liquid which decomposes on dis- tillation at ordinary atmospheric pressure, but can be distilled at about 85° if the pressure be reduced to .5 mm. of mercury. Distilled in this way, it crystallizes. The crystals are hygroscopic. It is readily soluble in water, alcohol, and ether, but insoluble in chloroform, carbon disulphide, or petroleum ether. It does not distill with steam. Lactic acid is decomposed when heated with dilute sulphuric acid into acetaldehyde and formic acid : CH 3 — CHOH— COOH = CH 3 — CHO + HCOOH According to certain investigators this reaction is catalyzed in the production of alcohol by fermentation, the formic acid being further decomposed into hydrogen and carbon dioxide, and the hydrogen serving to re- duce the aldehyde to alcohol. (See Fermentation.) The most characteristic salt of lactic acid is the zinc salt, The Fatty Acids 131 Zn(C3H 5 3 ) 2 3 H 2 0. This is soluble in 52.5 parts of water at 15°. Lactic acid is frequently identified by the analysis of its zinc salt. 67. Pyruvic Acid, CH 3 — CO— COOH. This acid is formed when calcium lactate is oxidized with potassium permanganate and by other more complicated reactions : CH3 CH3 I I CHOH+0 = CO +H 2 (ca=ACa) I I COOca COOca Calcium lactate Calcium pyruvate It melts at 14° and boils at 61° under 12 mm. pressure. It is soluble in water, alcohol, and ether. Biochemical studies during recent years have made it highly probable that pyruvic acid is an intermediary product of the catabolism of carbohydrates, fats, and proteins (164, 165). An enzyme discovered by Neuberg in yeast has the property of decomposing pyruvic acid into acetaldehyde and carbon dioxide : CH3— CO— COOH -» CH3— CHO + CO2 Pyruvic acid can be reduced to lactic acid. Its relations to other compounds will be more fully discussed later (164, 165). 68. Stereoisomerism of the Lactic Acids. — In discuss- ing the peculiar relationship between the chemical struc- ture of the amyl alcohols and the property of rotating the ray of polarized light (20) it was pointed out that optical activity in amyl alcohol is associated with the presence of 132 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine an asymmetric carbon atom, i.e. one whose four valences are bound each to a different radical or group. Lactic acid possesses a structure which conforms with the require- ments of asymmetry, and we should therefore expect to find two kinds of lactic acid, having the same chemical properties and the same physical properties (specific gravity, boiling point, melting point, etc.) except in their behavior toward polarized light. This is actually the. case. There are two classes of substances which show optical activity. Some, like quartz and sodium chlorate, produce rotation only in the crystallized state. When they are dissolved or fused the optical property disappears. Others, like active amyl alcohol, lactic acid, oil of turpentine, camphor, and sugar, are optically active whether in the crystalline or in the liquid state, or in solution. In the former case the molecules themselves do not have an asym- metric structure, but they unite to form crystals which do. We may liken this to the construction of a spiral staircase, an asymmetrical structure from symmetrical bricks. When the staircase is again resolved into its component bricks, the asymmetry disappears. The optical activity of these substances depends therefore upon a peculiar arrangement of the molecules to form an asymmetric structure. In the case of compounds which are optically active in the liquid state, the asymmetry resides in the molecules themselves. Ordinary lactic acid, obtained either by fermentation of milk or by synthesis, is optically inactive. There is in the normal muscle tissue of all higher animals, especially after activity, an appreciable amount of dextrorotatory lactic acid. The typhus bacillus and various vibrios ferment The Fatty Acids 133 cane sugar with the formation of levorotatory lactic acid, and when these are mixed in equimolecular proportions there results the inactive acid identical with that obtained by synthesis or from fermented milk. Dextrolactic acid, from its presence in musele, is called sarcolartic acid. It is present in muscle to the extent of .3-.5 parts per thousand. For brevity the two forms are written d- and 1-lactic acids. The reason for the difference in optical properties is best explained by the theory of Van't Hoff and Le Bel, who arrived at the same conclusions simultaneously and inde- pendently in 1874. The reasoning is briefly as follows : The four affinities of the carbon atom are not to be con- ceived of as lying in the same plane, otherwise isomers should exist in compounds of the general type Caabb, where a and b represent atoms or radicals (20). No such isomerism has ever been observed. The simplest assump- tion that we can make with regard to the distribution in space of the four atoms or groups attached to the carbon atom is that the direction of each makes equal angles with the directions of the three others. This is equivalent to saying that the four atoms or groups are situated at the solid angles of a tetrahedron in the center of which the carbon atom itself is situated. If the groups or atoms are all alike, they will be equally attracted by the carbon atom and the tetrahedron will be regular. If they are all different, the force with which each will be attracted will probably be different and they will arrange themselves at different distances from the carbon atom; the tetrahedron will then be irregular, i.e. it will have no plane of symmetry. Any compounds of the for- 134 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine mula CHabc can exist in two forms called enantiomorphs, which are alike in the sense that an object is like its mirror image, but they will not be superposable. Fig. 11. A consideration of Fig. 11 will help to make this clear: If we consider any group of three of the atoms or groups, COOH ^OH HO\ Fio. 12. COOH as Hbc, looking toward the face about which they are arranged, any order as Hbc which is clockwise in one figure will be counterclockwise in the other. If they are The Fatty Acids 135 at different distances from the carbon atom, any continu- ous curve passing through the four atoms or groups in any given sequence will form a right-handed helix in one case and a left-handed helix in the other. Such a structure would account for the observed optical properties of such compounds. According to this conception the two active lactic acids can be represented by the stereo-chemical formulae in Fig. 12 : „ There is a great difference in the biological values of the d- and 1-lactic acids. When the mold Penidllium glaucum is grown upon a solution of ammonium lactate prepared from inactive fermentation COOH lactic acid, and containing suitable inorganic salt additions, it is found after a time that the solution is dextrorotatory. The 1- form is used up as a source of carbon by this mold, but not the d- form. It has been already stated that synthetic lactic acid is inactive and consists of equal numbers of the d- and 1- forms. A brief consideration will show that this must inevitably be the result. If in Fig. 13 we substitute one of the hydrogen atoms of propionic acid, H or H', by some other element or radical, we must by the law of chance substitute H as frequently as H', since in propionic acid there is a plane of symmetry from which H and H' are equidistant, and any force which comes into play in the motions of the symmetric molecules of a gas or liquid which affects one of these hydrogen atoms, has an equal 136 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine chance of affecting the other. In the synthesis of hydroxy propionitrile the same reasoning holds good. When hydrocyanic acid condenses with acetaldehyde, Fig. 14, the addition will take place as frequently according to one scheme as the other, and the acid resulting from the hydrol- ysis of the nitrile must be inactive. The formation of inactive lactic acid in fermentation in- volves without doubt an addition of H and OH to an inter- mediary product of bacterial action in which the law of chance determines the positions which each radical takes. This will be further discussed in connection with fermenta- tion (164). The production of 1-lactic acid by certain organisms or the d-acid in the muscle tissues results from the cleavage of lactic acid from more complex compounds (sugars) which are themselves optically active and on which the positions of the H and OH groups are already determined in the molecule of the mother substance. Lactic acid is decomposed by heating with sulphuric acid into acetaldehyde and formic acid : CH 3 — CHOH— COOH = CIL— CHO + HCOOH The Fatty Acids 137 This decomposition is of interest because it shows the easiest line of cleavage of lactic acid. Acetaldehyde is without doubt formed from lactic acid in its decomposi- tion by living tissues. 69. d-Alanine, o-aminopropionic acid, CH,— CH— COOH is a constituent of the protein NH 2 molecule and is formed on hydrolysis of the proteins by boiling with strong mineral acids. It is present in silk to the extent of over 20 %. It is formed, as are all the other amino acids found in proteins, by complete digestion of the latter with the enzymes, trypsin from the pancreas and erepsin from the mucous lining of the intestine. It is formed from a-chlor propionic acid on treatment with ammonia : CH.—CHC1— COOH +NH 3 = CH3— CH— COOH +HC1 I NH 2 Also by the interaction of acetaldehyde with ammonium cyanide : HNH 2 /NH 2 CH.— CHO+ = CH3— CH( - +H 2 HCN X CN NH 2 CHs— CH( +2H 2 V = CH^CHNH 2 — COOH+NH3 The reactions of alanine with chemical reagents are analogous to those of glycocoll (63). With nitrous acid it 138 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine is converted into lactic acid. Since it contains an asym- metric carbon atom (68) it possesses optical activity and occurs in the d- and 1- forms and in the d, 1- form. Its isomerism is that of enantiomorphs and is analogous to that of the lactic acids. Of the two optical isomers only the d- form is of biolog- ical importance. When yeast is allowed to act on a sugar solution containing d, 1-alanine, the d- form is used up as a source of energy, leaving the 1- form unchanged. This method is employed generally in preparing the form of amino acids.not found in nature. It is a remarkable fact that in the life processes of animals and plants, with but few exceptions, the compounds which play an important role are optically active, and but a single optical form occurs in nature. In no case can the optical antipode when synthesized in the laboratory be substituted for the nat- urally occurring form in biological processes. A remarkable transformation of one optical form of alanine into the other occurs when d-alanine is treated with nitrosyl bromide, and the resulting 1-a-brom propionic acid is again converted into alanine by treatment with ammonia. With each repetition of these two transform- ations the alanine is changed from one optical form into the other. The following scheme will make this clear : d-alanine <— NH 3 <— d-a-brom propionic acid I t NOBr NOBr 1-a-brom propionic acid— >NH 3 ->- 1-alanine The Fatty Acids 139 This is known from its discoverer as the " Walden trans- formation." Alanine is a crystalline compound, soluble in 4.6 parts of water at 17°. It is nearly insoluble in alcohol. The ethyl ester can be distilled under diminished pressure without decomposition. CH 2 SH .1 Cysteine, a-amino-/J-thio lactic acid, CH — NH2, occurs I COOH as a constituent of certain proteins. It is the only derivative of proteins which yields sulphur. Cysteine is acted on by putrefactive bacteria, with the liberation of hydrogen sulphide and the formation of serine. CH2S — S — CH 2 I I CHNH 2 CHNH 2 I I COOH COOH Cystine Cystine forms large hexagonal plates, and can be iden- tified by their characteristic appearance under the mi- croscope. Cystine is burned to carbon dioxide, water, ammonia, and sulphuric acid in the normal body, but there occurs an anomaly of metabolism in which this amino acid is reg- ularly excreted in the urine — the condition of cystinuria. The hydrogen sulphide of the digestive tract is derived from the action of microorganisms on cystine. 140 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine CH 2 OH Serine, a-amino-/?-hydroxy propionic acid, CH — NH 2 | ,' COOH is another amino acid found among the products of the hydrolysis of the proteins. It is especially plentiful in silk. It is closely related to cystine, on the one hand, and to alanine, on the other. . 70. Butyric Acid. — Two acids having the for- mula C3H7COOH are known. Normal butryic acid, CH 3 — :CH 2 — CH 2 — COOH, is formed from primary propyl iodide by the action of KCN and subsequent hydrolysis of the resulting nitrile : CH 3 — CH 2 — CH 2 I +KCN = CH 3 — CH 2 — CH 2 — CN +KI CH— CH 2 — CH 2 — CN +2 H 2 = CH— CH 2 — CH 2 — COOH+NHs Isobutyric acid is formed in a similar manner from sec- ondary propyl iodide and KCN. It is therefore dimethyl acetic acid : CH 3 CHI 1 +KCN = > CH 3 = CH- -CN +2H 2 > CH3 1 CH- 1 -COOH CH 3 CH 3 CH 3 Isobutyric acid Normal butyric acid is found in butter, as the glycerin ester, to the extent of 2-4%. Several kinds of micro- organisms have been described {e.g. B. butylicus) which The Fatty Acids 141 ferment sugars with the formation of butyric acid. All of these produce the normal acid. It is not produced in putrefaction. B. hollobidyricus can produce butyric acid from calcium lactate. The mechanism of this trans- formation can be discussed more satisfactorily after the properties of the unsaturated compounds . have been treated (164). Normal butyric acid is a colorless, viscous liquid with a pungent, disagreeable, rancid odor. It is readily soluble in water, but is " salted out " by calcium chloride and other salts. It boils at 163°. The calcium salt (C 4 H 7 2 )2Ca • H 2 is more soluble in cold than in hot water. This peculiar behavior is prob- ably to be explained by the formation at low temperatures of a compound between the Ca salt and water whereby a hydrate is produced which is soluble. This is unstable at higher temperatures, so that on heating the higher hydrate disappears and the salt with the lower water content, being insoluble, separates out. There is no a-amino butyric acid corresponding to glyco- coll and alanine found in nature. In very dilute solutions (.2-1.%) and in the presence of suitable salts and a source of nitrogen, various molds, yeasts, and bacteria can employ butyric acid as a source of carbon. It is toxic, however, and possesses the property of paralyzing the motor nerve endings without interfering with the power of the muscle to contract. 71. Isobutyric Acid, yCH^COOH, is a product of the putrefaction of proteins, where it results from the 142 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine decomposition of valin or a-amino isovalerianic acid (73); This isomer of normal butyric acid is not formed in fermentation of the sugars. Its odor is similar to that of ra-butyric acid, but is not so offensive. It boils at 154° and, unlike its isomer, its calcium salt, is more soluble in hot water than in cold. No amino derivatives of iso- butyric acid occur in nature. Its physiological and phar- macological properties closely resemble those of w-butyric acid. 72. Valerianic Acid, CH 3 — (CH 2 ) 3 — COOH. — Four isomers are possible. There are but two of these which are of biological importance, the most common one being isovalerianic or isovaleric, which is isopropylacetic acid : 3 ^CH— CH 2 — COOH CH/ It occurs in valerian root and in other plant juices, and among the putrefaction products of proteins, where it is derived from the amino acid leucine (75). It results from the oxidation of fermentation amyl alcohol. B. P. 175°. It has an odor like that of old cheese. Bromine acts on isovaleric acid, forming a-brom iso- valeric acid. M. P. 44°, B. P. 150° and 44 mm. pressure. , Ornithine, a-B-diamino valerianic acid, does not occur in nature as such but is a cleavage product of arginine (62), resulting from the hydrolysis of the guanidine radical. Ornithine is the mother substance of tetramethylene diamine, or putrescine, a base found in putrefying protein mixtures. The Fatty Acids 143 CH 2 — QH 2 — CH 2 — CH— COOH - CQ, NH 2 NH 2 Ornithine = CH 2 - CH 2 — CH 2 — CH 2 I I NH 2 NH 2 Putreacine 73. Amino Isovalerianic Acid, Valin, (CH3) 2 = CH— CH— COOH I NH 2 is one of the products resulting from the hydrolysis of proteins by acids or by the digestive enzymes. It is therefore of great biological importance. It is not present in large amounts in any protein ; edestin, a globulin from the hemp seed, yields more than any other protein yet examined (5.6 %). It has been prepared from sprouted lupine seeds, where it is formed by the digestion of the proteins of the seeds by proteolytic enzymes present in the germinating seeds. It has been produced synthetically by the action of am- monia on o-brom valeric acid, a method analogous to that by which amino acids in general are produced (63, 69). The product of synthesis is optically inactive, while that obtained from proteins is d-valin. The synthetic amino acid can be resolved into its optical antipodes by a chemi- cal method discovered by Pasteur. The principle of this method is as follows : The d- and 1- forms of optically active acids are exactly alike in configuration, being alike in the sense of an object 144 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine and its mirror image, and have therefore the same .physical properties (density, solubility, etc.) except as respects their influence upon polarized light (20). There are in many plants organic bases of complex constitution which contain in their molecules one or more asymmetric carbon atoms and are therefore capable of existing in optically active forms. As in the case of alanine and valin and other amino acids to be described later, there is found in nature only one optical variety, the other being incapable of play- ing any role in biological processes. Examples of such natural plant bases are quinine, strychnine, nicotine, etc. When now an inactive mixture of d- and 1- acids is treated in solution with an optically active (i.e. asymmetri- cal) base, as strychnine, there are formed salts of the acid, e.g. d, 1-valin, and base in the following combinations : 1-strychnine 1-valin 1-strychnine d-valin The salt molecules thus produced are no longer of the same structure and accordingly show different physical properties, as solubility, etc The form having the greater insolubility tends therefore to crystallize out first when the solution is concentrated by evaporation of a part of the solvent. After recrystallization of the salt it is decomposed by the addition of a stronger alkali to it in solution, when the very sparingly soluble strychnine crystallizes out, leaving the optically active acid in solution as a metallic salt. The mother liquor contains the more soluble isomer. Mention has already been made of a second method of preparing one optical isomer from the inactive mixture The Fatty Acids 145 which is based upon the ability of a living organism to use as food but one of the two forms (66). This method applies only to the preparation of that form which has no biological value! Valin is the mother substance of isobutyl alcohol, as it is formed through the agency of yeast during fermentation. Yeast possesses the power to catalyze the following reac- tions : (1) CHk >CH— CH— COOH I NH 2 + H 2 3 \ CH/ -> /CH— CH— COOH + NH 3 ch/ I OH a-oxy-isovaleric acid (2) CHs. NCH— CH— [COOJH CH/ | OH CH 3v > >CH— CH 2 OH + C0 2 CH 3 X Isobutyl alcohol It is this type of decomposition of various amino acids which leads to the formation of fusel oil. Amyl alcohol has its origin in a similar manner from the amino acid leucine (75). Under the influence of putrefactive bacteria (anaerobic conditions) the amino acids are deaminated, i.e. lose the 146 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine amino group without losing the earboxyl group (decar- boxylation). CH. >CH— CH— COOH + 2 H CH/ | NH 2 CH 3x >CH— CH 2 — COOH + NH 3 CH/ , Isovaleric acid It is by this type of reaction that the valeric acid in feces and other putrefying mixtures is formed. The anaerobic organisms have the power of obtaining oxygen from certain organic compounds, and in so ( doing hydrogen becomes available in the nascent state, when it effects such reactions as that just described. 74. Caproic Acid, CH 3 (CH 2 ) 4 — COOH. — The normal acid has been found in several plants, but it is of little biological importance. One of the isocaproic acids, iso- butyl acetic, (CH 3 ) 2 = CH— CH 2 — CH 2 — COOH is contained in butter in the form of its glycerol ester. This isomer is of interest because one of its derivatives, viz., a-amino-isobutyl acetic acid, called for brevity leucine, is a regular constituent of the proteins, from which it results on hydrolysis. Lysine, a-e-diamino caproic acid, is one of the amino acids derived from the hydrolysis of proteins. It together with arginine (62) and histidine were formerly, and still to some extent are, designated as the " hexone bases " because The Fatty Acids 147 they each contain six carbon atoms, and it was suspected that they played a special role in the formation of sugar from proteins in the body. This is now known not to be the case. Lysine is a basic amino acid, and is precipitated along with the arginine and histidine by phosphotungstic acid. The three are collectively known as the diamino acids. This is not a fortunate name, since one of the three, histi- dine, contains but a single amino group, . Putrefactive bacteria act on lysine, causing an elimina- tion of carbon dioxide from the carboxyl group, forming pentamethylene diamine, cadaverine, which occurs in putrefying protein mixtures. CH 2 — CH 2 — CH 2 — CH 2 — CH— COOH - CO, NH 2 . NH 2 Lysine CH.2 — CH.2 — CII2 — CH2 — CH2 NH 2 NH 2 Pentamethylene diamine CH 75. Leucine, '^CH— CH 2 — CH— COOH.— Many CH/ I NH 2 proteins yield 10-20 % of this amino acid on hydrolysis. The 1- form only occurs in nature. The structure of leucine is established by its synthesis from isoamyl alcohol. This is oxidized to the corresponding aldehyde, which is then condensed with hydrocyanic acid to form the a-oxynitrile of caproic acid. The latter reacts with 148 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine ammonia with the replacement of the hydroxyl by an animo group. On hydrolysis of the nitrile to the corre- sponding acid inactive leucine results : 3 \CH— CH 2 — CH 2 OH +0 CH3/ ~~ CH3\ >CH-CH 2 -CHO +HCN + NH, CH 3 / *" CH3\ >CH— CH 2 — CH— CN +2H 2 0— NH 3 CH3/ I NH 2 o-amino-isovaleronitrile CH 3 \ >CH— CH 2 — CH— COOH CH/ I NH 2 Leucine Leucine is the mother substance of the inactive isoamyl alcohol of fermentation. The reactions by which it is probably formed were described under valin (73). It is not definitely established however whether or not the steps in the reaction involve the formation of isovaleralde- hyde and formic acid : CH3. ' | >CH— CH 2 — CHOIH— COOH CH 3 / i and the subsequent reduction of the aldehyde to isoamyl alcohol/ Such a course is in harmony with the well-known The Fatty Acids 149 tendency of lactic acid to separate into acetaldehyde and formic acid (66). CH 76. Isoleucine, NcH— CH— COOH, CH3 — CH 2 NH 2 a-amino-methyl-ethyl propionic acid, has been isolated from beet molasses and from germinated peas, and occurs among the hydrolysis products of many proteins. Since so far as is known all of the amino acids found in proteins, with the single exception of glycocoll, are indispensable in the diet, all amino acids so derived are of the greatest interest and importance; Isoleucine is, like leucine, used by yeasts as a source of nitrogen and energy. It undergoes cleavage into an optically active amyl alcohol, secondary butyl carbinol, by the loss of carbon dioxide and ammonia : .CH,v CHs — CH; >CH— CH— COOH + H 2 NH 2 CH 3 NcH— CH 2 OH + CO, + NH 3 CH3 — CH 2 Putrefactive organisms change isoleucine into isocaproic acid, which is found in feces (74). 77. Higher Fatty Acids. — From C 6 upward only those members of the fatty acid series, CH^C^, have any im- portance which contain an even number of carbon atoms. Those with an uneven number of C atoms either do not 150 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine occur or are found but seldom and in traces. This remark- able fact has led to much speculation as to the mode of formation of the fatty acids in the plant and animal world, since any proposed series of chemical changes which lead to the building up of these acids in nature must, to constitute a tenable hypothesis, produce the even members only. Recently Miss Smedley of England has carried out synthetic work which throws much light on the mecha- nism of this synthesis. Its description must be deferred until certain other compounds are described (165). The interest in the fatty acids from C6 to Cis depends upon their great biological value as constituents of the fats. None of the fatty acids containing more than six C atoms are found in nature in the form of their amino derivatives. By definition fats are the esters of the triatomic alcohol glycerol with the fatty acids. Accordingly the ester of acetic or propionic acids would be classed chemically with the fats, although they do not have the characteristic physical properties of the fats, viz. a smooth, greasy feel, insol- ubility, in water, and oily character when melted. The term fat usually signifies only those members of the series which possess the physical properties of fats. The names of the fats are derived from the name of the fatty acid with the ending -in substituted for -ic. Thus the tri- ester of glycerol with formic acid is triformin ; with acetic and butyric acid, triacetin, tributyrin, etc. Since three esters are possible according as one, two, or three acid radicals are joined in ester formation with one molecule of glycerol, we distinguish mono-, di-, and tri- butyrin, caproin, etc. The Fatty Acids 151 The fatty acids which are of biological importance as components of fats are, beginning with C 4 : ' M. P. Butyric acid C4H8O2 -7.9° Caproic acid C6H12O2 -1.5° Caprylic acid C8H16O2 16.0° Capric acid C10H20O2 31.4° Laurie acid C12H24O2 43.6° Myristic acid C14H28O2 53.8° Palmitic acid C16H32O2 62.6° Stearic acid C18H36O2 69.3° Arachie acid (-/20B40O2 77.0° Behenic acid C22H44O2 85.0° Lignoceric acid C24H48O2 80.5° Cerotic acid C26H52O2 Melissic acid C30-H.60O2 88.0° The fatty acids above C 6 are very slightly soluble in water. One part of caprylic acid is dissolved in 400 parts of boiling water, but 1 on cooling it separates almost com- pletely in the crystalline form. The higher members are practically insoluble in water. They are more soluble in alcohol and dissolve readily in ether, chloroform, petro- leum, ether, carbon tetrachloride, and in the volatile esters. The most commonly occurring of the higher fatty acids are palmitic and stearic. They occur as esters of glycerol in both animals and plants. Their structure, as well as that of the lower members to C6 which occur in nature, is shown by synthesis and by degradation to be normal. By a method analogous to the formation of the ketones 152 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine (37) the higher fatty acids are convertible into the lower members of the series. Thus when barium stearate and barium acetate are subjected to dry distillation in a vacuum, barium car- bonate and margaryl-methyl-ketone are produced: Ci 7 H 35 COOba+baO OCCH 3 = C 17 H 36 — CO— CH 3 On oxidation of the ketones the carbon chain is broken (37) and a fatty acid containing 17 carbon atoms, margaric acid, C17H35O2, and acetic acids are formed. By repeating the ketone formation and oxidation as described the carbon chain has been shortened by CH 2 in successive steps with the formation successively of palmitic, myristic, lauric, and capric acids on each occasion when the product had an even number of carbon atoms. The acids up to capric have been synthesized by building up the carbon chain, e.g. by the formation of the nitrile from the primary halide of nonane, and hydrolysis of the nitrile to the correspond- ing acid. CHAPTER VII THE UNSATURATED HYDROCARBONS 78. Alkylenes or defines, C„H 2n . — When halogens react with the hydrocarbons of the paraffin series to form derivatives there is always formed one molecule of halogen acid, HC1 or HBr, for each atom which enters the hydro- carbon in place of hydrogen. This is characteristic of substitution reactions. There is, however, another class of hydrocarbons which behave very differently toward chemical agents. When halogen comes into contact with the members of this series it is quickly absorbed or added to the molecule without the simultaneous formation of halogen hydride.- Nascent hydrogen and the halogen acids are likewise absorbed by these hydrocarbons, the resulting compounds derived by hydrogen addition being identical with the hydrocarbons of the C„H 2n+ 2 series, and those formed by the absorption of halogen or halogen acids are identical with derivatives of the saturated hydro- carbons of the same composition, produced by substitu- tion. Numerous efforts in the past to prepare a com- pound containing but one carbon atom and possessing the properties of the olefines have been unsuccessful. It has been already pointed out (2, 40) that the occurrence of many reactions of compounds containing carbon can best be explained on the assumption that very small amounts of 153 154 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine the radical methylene CH 2 = exist in dynamic equilibrium with molecules of different types. Thus the reactivity of methane, methyl alcohol, and methyl chloride depends upon the fact that each contains a relatively small per cent of active methylene particles at ordinary temperatures : H 2 =c( :£H 2 c + 1 \H \ H /OH / XI / H 2 =C( ^t H 2 Cf +H 2 H 2 C( ->H 2 c( +HC1 Nh \ \h x 79. Ethylene, CH 2 = CH 2 . —When ethyl alcohol is acted upon by concentrated sulphuric acid or zinc chloride, powerful dehydrating agents, water is abstracted from the molecule and the simplest of the olefines, ethylene, is formed. The same change is effected by heating ethyl al- cohol alone to 650°. It separates into ethylene and water : CH 2 — CH 2 __h 3 0CH 2 — CH 2 | | >| | -3*CH 2 =CH 2 H OH Ethyl alcohol Intermediary Ethylene product Further instances of the formation of ethylene by dis- sociation are the following : / H at 800° < Ethane CH3— CH( * CH 2 = CH 2 + H 2 Nh CH3 — CH — H _ A ccn° CH 2 = CH 2 at 550° > CH 3 — CH— H CH 2 =CH 2 Ethyl ether \o > +H 2 The Unsaturated Hydrocarbons 155 Sodium ethylate CH3 — CH: / ONa at 251 c Ethyl chloride CH3— CH: / \H CR C1 at 600 \h 2 =CH 2 +NaOH *CH 2 = CH 2 +-HC1 Ethyl bromide CH3— CH: Br H ■CH 2 =CH 2 +HBr All the above decompositions take place at the tempera- tures named and the products on cooling do not recombine. Ethylene can therefore -be obtained quantitatively by passing, e.g., ethyl chloride or bromide through a tube heated to the decomposition point. The assumption is made that two carbon atoms in the defines are bound together by a double bond. Adhering to the theory that in methane and its substitution products the carbon atom occupies the central position in a molecule in which the four attractive forces are directed so as to make equal angles with one another, i.e. as toward the four solid angles of a tetrahedron, the structures assigned to ethane and ethylene are as follows : Fig. 15. Fig. 16. 156 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine The double bond does not bind the C atoms in a more stable union than the single bond. On the contrary, as has been stated, there is a pronounced tendency for the double bond to absorb with avidity atoms or groups and to pass into a " saturated " condition. Compounds containing the double bond, are, because of this property, spoken of as " unsaturated " compounds. The unsaturated compounds are given the ending ene preceded by the name of the alkyl radical from which they are derived. This high reactivity of the olefines is doubtless due to the existence of a con- siderable amount of dissociated particles R — CH — CH — R I I along with the form represented by Figure 16, for the double bond. These are in dynamic equilibrium with the undissociated form, and when compounds capable of absorption become available, the dissociated particles are rapidly removed and more double bonds dissociate until the reaction is complete : CH 2 = CH 2 ^ CH 2 — CH 2 i-> CH 2 R— CH 2 R Another method of preparing ethylene and its homo- logues confirms the hypothesis advanced concerning its structure. Thus ethyl iodide, when treated with aqueous KOH, yields ethyl alcohol. With alcoholic KOH solution it yields ethylene : CH3— CH 2 I+KOH = CH 3 — CH 2 — OH+KI Aqueoua CH 3 — CH 2 I+KOH = CH 2 =CH 2 +KI+H 2 Alcoholic The Unsaturated Hydrocarbons 157 When ethylene is mixed with hydrogen and passed over finely divided nickel heated to 300°, addition of hydrogen atoms takes place and ethane is formed : CH 2 = CH 2 + H 2 = CH 3 — CH 3 In a similar manner halogen acids are absorbed by the olefines with the formation of halogen derivatives of the paraffins : CH 2 = CH 2 + HI = CH 3 — CH 2 I This reaction takes place with moderate speed at about the boiling point of water, but HBr reacts much more slowly than hydriodic acid and HC1 does not react at all. This finds its explanation in the fact that the acid as a molecule is not added by the olefine, but its constituent atoms ; HI is an easily dissociated acid, readily liberating iodine, in the presence of even feeble oxidizing agents; while HC1 is a very stable acid. HBr is intermediate in its stability. Since the bond between H and CI must be broken before addition can take place, the firm union in HC1 prevents its reaction. The olefines are much more easily oxidized than are the saturated compounds. While ethane is not oxidized by potassium permanganate or chromic acid, the olefines are readily attacked. Dilute permanganate oxidizes ethylene to ethylene glycol : CH 2 = CH 2 + HOH + O = CH 2 OH— CH 2 OH The decolorization of dilute permanganate solution serves to detect unsaturated compounds in a mixture of hydrocarbons. 158 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Halogens combine with olefines to form di-halogen compounds : CH 2 X — CH 2 X (X = halogen). The order of reactivity is Cl>Br>I. The interaction between the halogens and olefines is greatly accelerated by light. As we have seen before in other relations, the most active halogen forms the least active halogen acid with respect to olefines. In an atmosphere of chlorine, even in diffused light, ethylene burns with the deposition of much carbon. The principal reaction is represented by the following equation : CH 2 = CH 2 + 2C1 2 = 2C + 4HC1. Sulphuric acid absorbs the olefines with the formation of alkyl acid sulphate : CH 2 = CH 2 +H<\ CH 3 — CH 2 — (X >S0 2 = >S0 2 HCK HCK This serves as a method of separating unsaturated from saturated hydrocarbons. Hypochlorous acid, HOC1, is absorbed by olefines. Ethylene forms ethylene chlorhydrin : CH 2 = CH 2 + HOC1 = CH 2 OH— CH 2 CL The olefines with 2, 3 and 4 atoms of carbon are gases. The higher members are liquids and solids. They are but slightly soluble in water, but dissolve in alcohol, ether, and in other organic solvents. All are combustible with a smoky flame, and mixed with air or oxygen they form dangerously explosive mixtures. Ethylene ab- sorbs two atoms of bromine, forming ethylene bromide, CH 2 Br — CHaBr. Analogous compounds also result from The Unsaturated Hydrocarbons 159 the absorption of two atoms of chlorine or of iodine. From such compounds alcoholic potassium hydroxide abstracts one molecule of halogen acid, forming bromethylene or vinyl bromide, chloride, etc. CH 2 Br CH 2 — HBr II CH 2 Br~ ~ CHBr Vinyl bromide 80. Propylene, CH3 — CH = CH 2 , the next homologue of ethylene, is prepared in a manner analogous to the latter, from propyl alcohol, or propyl iodide. It is instruc- tive that both propyl iodide and isopropyl iodide yield the same propylene on the abstraction of HI by means of alcoholic KOH. —HI CH3 — CH 2 — CH 2 I >■ CH3 — CH = CH 2 CH 3 — CHI— CH3 -^->- CH 3 — CH = CH 2 This shows that the iodine and hydrogen which are abstracted occupied positions on neighboring carbon atoms. Otherwise the normal iodide would yield a ring structure : ^tt ch 2 i— ch 2 — ch 3 z!2 /\ CH 2 — CH 2 and should show different properties. When propylene adds on halogen acid the halogen takes its place on that carbon atom which holds the smallest number of hydrogen atoms, i.e. with the formation of isopropyl iodide : CH3— CH = CH 2 + HI = CH 3 — CHI— CH 3 160 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine 81. Propylidene Compounds. — It has already been pointed out (36) that the chlorides of phosphorus react with aldehydes and ketones with the replacement of I the oxygen of the carbonyl group CO by two chlorine atoms C = CI2. Thus propyl- aldehyde yields propylidene chloride: CH3 — CI12 — CHCI2 and acetone yields dichloracetone : CH3 — CCI2 — CH3 On removing one molecule of haloid acid from compounds of these types there result two isomeric chlor propylenes, having chlorine linked to a doubly linked carbon atom. — HC1 CH 3 — CH 2 — CHC1 2 > CH 3 — CH=CHC1 Propylidene chloride a-chlor propylene — HCl CH 3 — CCI2— CH 3 > CH 3 — CC1=CH 2 Chloracetone 0-chIor propylene This type of halogen compound differs markedly from the alkyl halides in which the halogen is linked to a carbon atom having only single bonds. While in the alkyl halides the halogen is readily replaceable by hydroxyl, alkyl, amino groups, etc., this property is almost wholly wanting in compounds whose halogen is linked to carbon with a double bond. They do not react with alkalies to produce alcohols nor with sodium ethylate to produce ethers. Instead there are formed compounds which are substitu- The Unsaturated Hydrocarbons 161 tion products of the triple bond hydrocarbons, the acety- lenes (83). From CH 3 — CC1 2 — CH 3 by the abstraction of two HC1 there never results a diolefine CH 2 = C = CH 2 , as might be expected. An isomer of a- and /8-chlor propylene is known as allyl chloride, CH 2 = CH — CH 2 C1. This reacts just as do alkyl halides, notwithstanding the presence of the double bond in the molecule. Thus with KOH it yields allyl alcohol : CH 2 = CH— CH 2 C1 + KOH = CH 2 = CH— CH 2 OH + KC1 This alcohol will be described later (85). 82. The Diolefines. — Compounds containing two double bonds are known which have considerable importance. Allene, CH 2 = C = CH 2 , is a gaseous hydrocarbon which can be prepared from tribrom propane by the abstrac- tion of one molecule of HBr by means of alcoholic KOH, and the subsequent removal of the remaining two bro- mine atoms by zinc dust : —HBr CH 2 Br— CHBr— CH 2 Br > CH 2 = CBr— CH 2 Br Dibrom propylene —2 Br >■ CH 2 = C = CH 2 It is a colorless gas. * CH Isoprene, ^>C— CH = CH 2 , is a liquid, B. P. 37°. CH 2 ^ It is formed by the destructive distillation of India rubber, and also by passing turpentine through a tube 162 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine heated to redness. On treatment with acids it poly- merizes, forming rubber again. It is also formed from isobutyl carbinol, one of the amyl alcohols, by the following series of transformations : CH3. PCl 6 CHs x )CH— CH 2 — CH 2 OH ► )CH— CH 2 — CH 2 C1 CH 3 / CH 3 / +2 CI CH s\ > ;cci— CH 2 — CH 2 C1 — 2HC1 ^C— CH = CH 2 *■ chX In the presence of metallic sodium it polymerizes to a product having the physical properties of rubber, but not identical with it chemically. Butylenes. — Three butylenes are known, and this number only is theoretically possible. CH3V CH3 — CH 2 — CH = CH 2 yC — CH 2 CH 3 / CH 3 — CH = CH— CH 3 They are prepared by methods analogous to propylene. They differ from ethylene in their tendency to polymerize when treated with H 2 S04 or ZnCl 2 . Numerous higher homologues of this series are known. 83. Acetylenes. — On treatment of dibrom ethane with alcoholic KOH two molecules of HBr are abstracted with The Unsaturated Hydrocarbons 163 the formation of a still more highly unsaturated com- pound acetylene : CH 2 Br CHBr CH I — HBr II — HBr III CH 2 Br Dibrom ethane CH. CH Vinyl bromide Acetylene Acetylene is .a gas which shows all the properties of the defines, but is more unsaturated and reacts with two mole- cules of halogen acid, four halogen atoms, etc. In conformity with the theory of the tetrahedral structure of the methane molecule the struc- ture of the triple bond hydrocarbons is to be represented as in Figure 17. The carbon atoms united by a double bond possess less freedom of movement with respect to each other than those united by a single bond, and two united by a triple bond possess still less freedom of movement with respect to each other. This conception is in har- mony with a special type of isomerism which is shown by compounds having the double bond as contrasted with those in which no double bond is present. That carbon atoms which are doubly and triply bound are under a strain, which leads to their tendency to change from the unstable state into other forms is further indicated by the heats of formation and of combustion of ethane, ethylene, and acetylene : 164 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Heat op Combustion Heat of Fobmation Acetylene 372.3 Cal. 341.1 Cal. 313.8 Cal. 23.3 Cal. -14.6 Cal. -51.5 Cal. Whereas ethane is formed from its elements with the liberation of 23.3 Cal. of heat for each gram molecule, energy must be supplied to induce the formation of the double bond and still more to form the triple bond. We may liken the formation of these unsaturated compounds to the bending of a bow into a position of tension. While under a strain and possessing stored up energy it has a strong tendency to change to a body of a new conforma- tion. When placed under pressure greater than two atmos- pheres, acetylene is readily exploded by a shock. The change which takes place is one of polymerization, three molecules uniting to form one molecule of benzene. The nature of this change will be treated later (166). Preparation. — Acetylene is formed from ethylene bro- mide by the abstraction of two molecules of HBr. This is readily effected by heating with alcoholic KOH : CH 2 Br CH 2 Br +2 KOH CH III- CH +2KBr+2H 2 Metallic zinc abstracts bromine from tetrabrom ethane in alcoholic solution, with the formation of acetylene : The Unsaturated Hydrocarbons 165 CHBr 2 CH | +2Zn = HI +2ZnBr 2 CHBr 2 CH A characteristic property of hydrocarbons containing the group HC= is the formation of insoluble metallic com- pounds of the composition C 2 Ag 2 and C2CU2, silver and cuprous acetylides respectively, when acetylene or its monoalkyl derivatives are passed into an ammoniacal solu- tion of silver nitrate or of cuprous chloride. This prop- erty is utilized in analytical work to determine the acety- lene content of a mixture. The quantitative capacity to absorb bromine serves as an estimation of the total un- saturated group (olefines and acetylenes), and the amount of metallic derivative forms a basis for the calculation of the content of doubly and triply unsaturated hydrocar- bons in the mixture. These compounds are highly explo- sive when dry. They are decomposed by hydrochloric acid with the regeneration of acetylene : C 2 Ag 2 + 2 HC1 = CH =CH + 2 AgCl Derivatives of acetylene in which both hydrogen atoms are substituted by alkyl groups do not form these metallic compounds. Acetylene is most conveniently prepared by treating calcium carbide with water. When lime and carbon (coal) are heated together in an electric furnace, the calcium oxide is reduced and calcium and carbon combine to form calcium acetylide, commonly called calcium carbide, C 2 Ca. This compound reacts with water some- what violently- with the evolution of considerable heat and the formation of acetylene : C!Ca+2H 2 = CH=CH+Ca(OH) 2 166 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine When liberated through a suitable burner, acetylene burns with an intensely luminous flame. Its mixtures with air are much more dangerously explosive than are mixtures of air and coal gas, due to the reactive properties of the acetylene as compared with the paraffin hydro- carbons, and also to the wide limits of composition of air and acetylene which form explosive mixtures. Mixtures containing 3 to 82 per cent of acetylene are explosive, while the limits for coal gas are only 5 to, 28 per cent. In addition the velocity of propagation of the reaction be- tween oxygen (of the air) and acetylene is much greater in the case of the acetylene mixture, which intensifies the force of explosion. The carbides of certain other metals yield hydrocarbons other than acetylene. Aluminum carbide yields methane on decomposition by water. Uranium carbide yields mix- tures of methane and of liquid and solid hydrocarbons. Acetylene, CH=CH, is a gas of unpleasant odor. One volume of water dissolves about 1 volume of the gas; benzene and alcohol dissolve 4 and 6 volumes respec- tively, at ordinary temperatures ; while acetone, which is the best solvent, dissolves 25 volumes, and much greater quantities under pressure. It can be synthesized from its elements by passing an electric spark between carbon poles in an atmosphere of hydrogen, a small amount of methane and ethane being simultaneously produced. It is produced in small amount when many organic substances are subjected to incom- plete combustion. Acetylene is more poisonous than ethane or ethylene. A The Unsaturated Hydrocarbons 167 content of one volume of the gas in air produces narcosis with failure of the heart and of respiration. Higher homologues of acetylene in which the hydrogen atoms are replaced by alkyl groups are likewise known. SUBSTITUTION PRODUCTS OF THE UNSATURATED HYDROCARBONS 84. Vinyl Alcohol, CH 2 =CHOH, has never been isolated and its existence is uncertain. When vinyl bromide is treated with KOH we should expect the forma- tion of an alcohol of this type, but a rearrangement of atoms takes place with the disappearance of the double bond between the carbon atoms. When vinyl alcohol is to be expected, aldehyde is obtained : CH 2 = CHBr + KOH =CH 2 =CHOH ^CH 3 — CHO + KBr Unstable In a similar manner the abstraction of water from glycol leads to the formation of acetaldehyde and not vinyl alcohol: C h 2 OH „ n CH 2 CH 3 I — -tl 2 U I ^ I CH 2 OH "CHOH CHO Unstable 85. Allyl Alcohol, CH 2 =CH— CH 2 OH, is best pre- pared from the monoformic ester of glycerol or viono- formin : CEtOOCH CH 2 CHOH -C02andH 2 rH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH 168 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine The structure of this compound is made clear by the following behavior : ; (1) It behaves like an alcohol in reacting with sodium with the evolution of hydrogen. (2) It yields an acetyl derivative when treated with acetyl chloride. (3) With nascent hydrogen (Zn + H2SO4) it is converted into normal propyl alcohol. This shows that the alcohol radical is attached to an end carbon atom and is therefore a primary alcohol. (4) The evidence that it is a primary alcohol is sup- ported by the fact that it yields an aldehyde and an acid containing the same number of carbon atoms as the alcohol itself. Acrylic Aldehyde, Acrolein, CH 2 =CH — CHO, is best prepared by the abstraction of two molecules of water from glycerol. This is best effected by heating with potassium bisulphate. The reaction which takes place is probably the following : CH 2 OH CH 2 CH 2 ! . 9 tt n II II CHOH_Jlf¥ J C > CH ! II I CH 2 OH CHOH CHO Glycerol Unstable Acrolein This behavior is in agreement with experience which, as pointed out above, leads to rearrangement of the atoms with the formation of an aldehyde whenever we should expect the formation of an alcohol group in union with a doubly linked carbon atom (84). The Unsaturated Hydrocarbons 169 AUyl alcohol is found as an ester in the form of allyl iso-thio-cyanate, C3H5NCS, in the seeds of mustard. It is not free but combined with glucose as aglucoside (161). Allyl Sulphide, (C3H 5 ) 2 S, is the principal constituent of oil of garlic. Acrylic aldehyde, or acrolein, can in turn be oxidized to the corresponding acid, acrylic acid : CH 2 =CH— CHO+O = CH 2 =CH— COOH Acrylic acid p-Amino Acids, R— CH— CH 2 — COOH, are unstable NH 2 and readily split off ammonia with the formation of un- saturated compounds. Thus /3-iodopropionic acid yields with ammonia /8-aminopropionic acid which splits off ammonia, forming acrylic acid. 86. Acids of the Oleic Series, C„H 2n _ 2 2 . — The first member of this series of acids, which differ from the saturated fatty acids by having one double bond, is acrylic acid. The second member, methyl acrylic acid, is known as crotonic acid. It is formed by the action of dehydrating agents upon /3-oxy-butyric acid. The latter compound is formed directly by the condensation of two molecules of acetaldehyde by the " aldol condensation " (32, 124) : CH 3 — CHOH— CH 2 — COOH ~ H2 9 CH 3 — CH=CH— COOH. This acid occurs in croton oil. It is a crystalline sub- stance which melts at 72° and boils at 180°. At 19° it is soluble in 12.5 parts of water. 170 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine There is however an isocrotonic acid which is an oil which boils at 172° and when maintained for a time at a temperature of 170-180 goes over into crotonic acid. Both of these acids yield normal butyric acid on treatment with nascent hydrogen and have, therefore, the normal carbon chain. They exhibit a kind of isomerism which cannot be explained by the ordinary constitutional for- mulae. This type of isomerism, which is peculiar to the H4^- -^COOH ethylene compounds, is the necessary result of the restric- tion of motion of two carbon atoms linked by a double bond. Thus butyric acid may be represented as in Figure 18. The system of the carbon atom at the center of the upper tetrahedron and its three combined atoms or groups should have no restriction as to the relative positions which they . may assume with respect to the carbon atom at the center of the lower tetrahedron and its system of atoms and groups. Each should be free to rotate freely about their common axis, and all the possible arrangements probably occur; and because all are constantly shifting, The Unsaturated Hydrocarbons 171 one into every other possible position, there is but one normal butyric acid. When, as in crotonic acid, we establish the double bond (Fig. 19), the two carbon atoms affected by the double bond lose their freedom of rotating about a common axis independently of each other, and we should expect different physical properties to result from these two differ- ent structures. This type of isomerism will be more COOH Trans form Cbotonic Acids. fully dealt with in connection with maleic and fumaric acids (133). Since a considerable number of compounds of this class have been studied, in many of which it is easier to decide which compound represents the cis and which the trans form, the following generalizations may be made: The acid having the ds form is much the more soluble; it has also the lower melting point, and in the case of the monobasic acids is the stronger acid of the two (more highly dissociated). In addition to the two isomers of crotonic acid just de- scribed, two other acids of the same formula are known, 172 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine one differing from crotonic acid in the position of the double bond, the other having a branched structure : CH 2 =CH— CH 2 — COOH *V— COOH CH 3 / 87. Oleic Acid, C18H34O2, is widely distributed in both the animal and vegetable fats in the form of its glycerol ester, triolein. It differs from stearic acid in having two less hydro- gen atoms and in containing a double bond. Its carbon chain has the normal structure, as is shown by its conver- sion into stearic acid by the absorption of two hydrogen atoms in the presence of catalyzers. Oleic acid differs widely from the saturated stearic acid. It melts at 14° and is therefore an oil at ordinary temperatures. In the hydrocarbons and acids of the fatty series the properties of the homologues change progressively with increasing carbon content. The longer the carbon chain, the higher the boiling point or melting point." In the unsaturated compounds the properties tend to run counterwise to this rule, e.g. butyric acid melts at -2°, crotonic acid melts at 72°, stearic acid melts at 68°, while oleic acid melts at 14°. It is colorless when pure and has no odor. It undergoes transformation into its isomer, elaidic acid, when treated with nitrous oxide. Elaidic acid has the same percentage composition with respect to its elements, the same molecular weight, and absorbs the same amount of iodine as does oleic acid (2 atoms), showing that it still contains the double bond. While oleic melts at 14°, elaidic acid melts at 45-47°. This change involves the transformation of the same type as The Unsaturated Hydrocarbons 173 that represented by crotonic and isocrotonic acid. Oleic acid represents the cis and elaidic acid the trans form. The position of the double bond in oleic acid is established by the fact that when compounds containing this linkage are oxidized, the oxidation takes place at the point of unsaturation ; thus: en— ch =';ch— cooh Crotonic acid +40 > CH3— COOH +HOOC— COOH Acetic acid Oxalic acid + 40 CH 2 = CH— COOH > HCOOH+HOOC— COOH Acrylic acid Formic acid the oxidation in all such cases leads first to the forma- tion of two secondary alcohol groups : CH3— CH— CH— COOH OH OH then a separation of the carbon chain. Thus oleic acid when oxidized with a dilute solution of potassium per- manganate yields, first dihydroxy stearic acid, then pelargonic acid, CH3 — (CHO7 — COOH, and azeliac acid, COOH— (CH 2 ) 7 — COOH. From this evidence it is con- cluded that the double bond in oleic acid is at the middle of the chain, i.e. between the ninth and tenth carbon atoms. 88. Acids with two Double Bonds, C„H 2 „_402 ; Linolic Acid, C18H32Q2. — In many plant oils there occur fatty acids which tend to take up oxygen and harden to a resin- like state. Such acids show a chemical behavior which indicates that they possess two double bonds. These are 174 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine called linolic acid, because of their prevalence in linseed oil. Fats containing this class of acids are found espe- cially in cottonseed, walnut, cedar, and hemp oils and to some extent in corn oil and in many other oils, but not in so high a per cent of the whole as in linseed oil. On this property depends the peculiar value of the latter oil for the manufacture of paints. Linolic acid still remains an oil at -18°. It absorbs 4 atoms of bromine, or two molecules of hydriodic acid. On oxidation it yields a tetrahydroxy derivative. On vigor- ous reduction with hydriodic acid and phosphorus, it yields stearic acid. Like oleic and stearic acids, linolic acid has the normal and not a branched structure. The tetrabromide of linolic acid is soluble in all the ordinary fat solvents except petroleum ether. This last solvent dis- solves readily dibrom stearic acid, and can be employed as a useful means of distinguishing between the two. Acids with three Double Bonds, C„H 2 „_602; Linoleic Acid, C18H30O2. — This acid occurs especially in linseed oil and shows in still higher degree the " drying " property. It forms a hexabromid, and when oxidized with dilute permanganate solution a hexahydroxy stearic acid. The oils from many fishes contain fatty acids containing two and three double bonds. It is interesting to note that the solubility of the hy- droxy stearic acids in water rapidly increases with increas- ing number of hydroxy groups. Dihydroxy stearic acid is nearly insoluble; tetrahydroxy stearic acid, difficultly soluble; while the solubility of the hexahydroxy acid is quite marked. CHAPTER VIII THE FATS, WAXES, AND RELATED COMPOUNDS 89. The Animal Fats. — Most important among the animal fats are the body fats of the ox, sheep, and swine, and butter fat. As has already been stated, fats are the glycerol esters of the higher fatty acids. The body fats of animals react practically neutral, and contain but a trace of volatile fatty acids. The relative amounts of the differ- ent acids contained in the fats of different species differs widely and even the fats from the same species vary in composition with the character of the food fats. Thus lard, which is the collective term for the fat of the hog, may melt as low as 28° when the diet consists of corn meal only, when it contains over 90 per cent of olein ; or as high as 35.6° when the animals are-fed a ration of oats, peas, and barley. From the same animal the body fats from different parts may show different melting points owing to their variable content of olein. Thus the fats surrounding the kidney may melt as high as 43° in the hog. Triolein is a liquid at 0°, while tripalmatin and tristearin melt at 62 and 71.5° respectively. Human fat is especially rich in olein, fre- quently melting as low as 17.5°, while tallow regularly melts at 45-46° and the fat of the sheep at 46-51°. The 175 176 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine relative proportions of the different fats in the mixture determine the melting point. Butter fat occupies a peculiar place among the animal fats. It consists mainly of a mixture of palmitin, stearin, and olein, but contains from 6 to 8 per cent of fatty acids volatile with steam, as glycerides, i.e., butyric, caproic, caprylic, and capric, and also some lauric and myristic acids. No other fats from either animal or vegetable oils yield on saponification so high a proportion of volatile fatty acids. 90. Vegetable Fats. — Even greater diversity of char- acter is found among the vegetable fats than among those from animals. Palm oil consists mainly of palmitin and olein, but contains small amounts of other glycerides. Cocoa butter contains about 40 % of stearin, 20 % of palmatin, 30 % of olein, and 6 % of linolein, together with some other fats. There is a class of fats which are liquids and are there- fore called oils, which are known as the non-drying oils to differentiate them from certain others which have different properties. The non-drying oils include olive oil, the oil of wheat, date, hazelnut, and rice. They consist mainly of triolein. The drying oils are easily oxidized in the air and light, especially after being heated for a time with manganese di- oxide, or lead oxide, which act as catalyzers of the oxida- tion process. This class includes linseed, cedar-nut, hemp, walnut, and sunflower oils, and a few others. They consist principally of triglycerides of linolic and linoleic acids. The semi-drying oils consist principally of glycerides of The Fats, Waxes, and Related Compounds 177 oleic and linolic acids. In this group are corn and cotton- seed oil and sesame oil. These on exposure to oxygen (air) are only very slowly and incompletely converted into resinous products. Croton oil deserves special mention because of its marked pharmacological action. It is pressed from the seeds of Croton tiglium, and is a sherry-colored viscid liquid with an acrid taste and somewhat rancid smell, and a fluorescent appearance. It is a violent purgative, in most cases a single drop being sufficient to effect intestinal activity. When rubbed upon the skin it produces rubefaction and pustular eruption. Croton oil when saponified and subsequently acidified and distilled with steam yields about half as great a per- centage of volatile fatty acids as does butter fat. Among these are formic, acetic, and valerianic acids, which are not found in butter fat. Castor oil is derived from the castor bean. It consists mainly of the glyceride of ricinoleic acid. The latter contains eighteen carbon atoms and one double bond, but in addition it shows the reactions of a secondary alcohol, e.g. it forms an acetyl derivative with acetic anhydride, and yields an ester, ricinoleic sulphonic acid, when treated with concentrated sulphuric acid. The latter compound is used in the Turkey-red industry. The structural formula of ricinoleic acid is represented as follows : CH3— (CH 2 ) 6 — CHOH— CH = CH — (CH^COOH A distinguishing property of castor oil is its insolubility in petroleum ether. It is likewise the heaviest of the fats, 178 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine sp. gr. .960-968. Other fats range in specific gravity from .850 to .950. 91. Properties of the Fats. — Since the natural fats do not represent individual chemical compounds, but mixtures of several kinds, their physical properties depend upon the proportions in which they are mixed, and especially on the content of olein. They are insoluble in water, but slightly soluble in cold alcohol. They are readily soluble in ether, petroleum ether, benzene, chloroform, and in other solvents. The fats can be heated to 200-250° without undergoing any essential change, but above this temperature they evolve the irritating vapors of acrolein (CH 2 = CH — CHO), which causes profuse secretion of tears. This has its origin from glycerol, from which it is formed by the loss of two molecules of water (85). This test is best carried out by heating the fat with potassium bisulphate (KHSO4). This acrolein test serves to distinguish the fats from the mineral oils, oily esters, and other substances having the physical properties of fats or oils. The commercial fats on keeping become rancid. This is due to the action of the oxygen of the air, especially in the presence of light, which greatly accelerates their oxidation. In the process of becoming rancid the neutral fats become acid in reaction. Fats, especially from plant sources, are liable to become acid in reaction owing to their containing the enzyme lipase, which accelerates the hydrolysis of esters into alcohol and acid. In part the rancidity of im- pure fats 'is brought about by the action of bacteria on the proteins, carbohydrates, etc., with which they are contaminated. The Fats, Waxes, and Related Compounds 179 The fats are all saponifiable (hydrolyzable), as are other esters : CH 2 — OOdeHsi HOH CH 2 OH I I CH— OOCufln +HOH=CHOH +3C 15 H 3 oCOOH j ! Palmitic acid CH 2 — OOdeHa! HOH CH 2 OH Tripalmitin Water Glycerol Hydrolysis can be effected by heating with water alone under pressure, but takes place slowly because of the great insolubility of fats in water. Both acids and alkalies greatly accelerate the reaction. Technically enormous quantities of fats are saponified by means of sodium hy- droxide for the preparation of soap, and for the produc- tion of glycerol (glycerine). In the laboratory fats are usually saponified with an alcoholic solution of potas- sium hydroxide, in which the fats are much more solu- ble than in water. Their solution greatly facilitates the reaction. 92. Soaps. — Soap is made by boiling the fats with a solution of sodium hydroxide until saponification is com- plete. Sodium soaps are readily soluble in water, but not in strong brine, so common salt is added to precipitate the soaps. The solution from which the soap separates con- tains the excess of lye (NaOH) together with the glycerol formed in saponification. From the evaporated residue of this solution glycerol is prepared by distillation under diminished pressure. The soap, which has been precipi- tated in a flaky form, is separated, melted, and cast in molds. 180 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Many antiseptic substances, such as carbolic acid, salicylic acid, or cresol, thymol, tar, sulphur, naphthalene, camphor, mercury, etc., are added to soap. The finer grades are usually perfumed and frequently colored. White Castile soap is made of olive oil and sodium hy- droxide. It is strongly alkaline. Green soap is made from linseed oil and postassium hydroxide, and is therefore principally potassium linolate and linoleate. Lead soap or lead plaster is prepared by saponifying olive oil with lead oxide. It is yellowish white, pliable and tenacious. It is insoluble in water, but soluble in chloroform and in ben- zene. Ordinary soaps are crystalline, and the cheaper grades frequently contain rosin, sodium silicate, etc. The trans- parent soaps are made by dissolving crystalline soap in alcohol and then evaporating most of the solvent. They are in the colloidal state and owe their transparency to this cause. Physiology of the Fats and Soaps. — The body fat of animals is in part derived directly from the food, since peculiar fatty acids not found in the body fat unless con- tained in the food are deposited in the fat of the tissues. Carefully conducted experiments have shown that pigs and geese may accumulate much more fat in their bodies during the experimental period than was contained in the food. The animal body is therefore able to form fats from sugars and from proteins. This necessarily means that both fatty acids and glycerol are formed from other compounds. Free fatty acids are never found in the blood, and when an animal is fed free fatty acids instead of neutral fats, it The Fats, Waxes, and Related Compounds 181 forms glycerol to combine with them to form neutral fats before they enter the circulation. Since the fats are not soluble in water, and there are no fat solvents in the digestive tract, fats are not capable of being absorbed directly, but must be converted into water- soluble products before absorption. The digestion of fats consists in their hydrolysis to fatty acids and glycerol. This takes place in the intestine under the influence of an enzyme, lipase, in a faintly alkaline solution. The free fatty acids at once combine with bases to form soaps. Both the soaps and glycerol are water soluble and absorb- able. In the cells lining the intestine the fatty acids and glycerol are recombined to form neutral fats before entering the circulation. 93. The Cleansing Action of Soap. — The sodium and potassium soaps are soluble in water, and being the salts of very weak acids 'they undergo hydrolytic dissociation, that is, they react with water to some extent, with the formation of free fatty acid and sodium hydroxide : (1) CH 3 — (CH 2 ) 16 — COONa Sodium stearate ^t CH 3 — (CH 2 ) 16 — COO-+Na+ Stearate ion (2) CH3— (CH 2 ) 16 — COO-+Na + +HOH Stearate ion Water 5t CH 3 — (CH 2 ) 16 — COOH+NaOH Stearic acid This reaction is due to the fact that salts of weak acids are strongly dissociated while the weak acids themselves are but slightly dissociated into fatty acid ions and hydrogen 182 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine ions. The acid ions combine with the hydrogen ions of the water to form undissociated fatty acid molecules. The acids thus liberated combine with a molecule of soap and form insoluble stubstances which give the milky appearance to water solutions of soap. The amount of free alkali produced depends on the degree of dilution of the soap solutions. Strong soap solution scarcely causes the pink color characterisitc of alkalies with phenol- phthalein, and the depth of pink steadily increases as the solution is diluted with water. When fats come into contact with soap solutions, they tend when agitated to form an emulsion, i.e. the droplets of fat break up into very fine particles, each surrounded by a film of soap solution which separates each drop from its fellows and prevents their union into larger drops and consequent separation. The action of soap in removing grease is therefore twofold : the free alkali will saponify a part of the fats and thus part will pass into solution as soap ; the remainder is emulsified and remains permanently suspended in the soap solution. As the free alkali is used up by the saponification of fats, more soap dissociates to replace that which has disappeared. Soap therefore serves as a reserve supply of alkali, and in washing there is automatically maintained a constant content of hydroxyl ions in solution without at any time an undesirably high content. Soap is for this reason superior to a free alkali solution for washing. A dilute solution of the latter would show a progressive decrease in hydroxyl ions as its use progressed. Soap does not readily remove the higher hydrocarbons, The Fats, Waxes, and Related Compounds 183 such as vaseline, unless there is simultaneously present some fat or oil. 94. Methods for the Characterization of the Fats. — The chemical nature of the fats is indicated by their physical characters and by their behavior toward certain chemical reagents. The melting point and the temperatures at which the fats solidify after having been melted serve to show the general nature of the fats, whether principally stearin or palmatin, or containing much olein. The acid number gives the milligrams of KOH necessary to neutralize the free fatty acids contained in one gram of fat. For its determination, 1-2 grams of the fat in 12-15 c.c. of a mixture of 1 part of alcohol and 2 part of ether, which should react neutral to phenolphthalein indicator, are titrated, using this indicator with a 1/10 normal solu- tion of potassium hydroxide in alcohol. Fresh animal fats are nearly neutral, but on becoming rancid or on long keeping the acidity rises markedly. This number gives an idea as to the state of freshness of the fats. Saponification Number. — Since each molecule of fat re- acts with three molecules of potassium hydroxide to form glycerol and three molecules of soap, the number of carbon atoms in the fatty acids contained in the fats will deter- mine whether little or much alkali will be necessary to saponify a standard quantity of fat. The saponification number indicates the number of milligrams of potassium hydroxide necessary to neutralize the fatty acids derived from one gram of fat. It is determined by dissolving a weighed amount of fat in a carefully standardized solution 184 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine of potassium hydroxide in alcohol, and heating until saponification is complete. Water is then added and the free alkali in the solution is titrated by the addition of standard acid to the neutral point, using phenolphthalein as indicator. The difference between the KOH content of the solution employed to saponify the fat and the alkali remaining unneutralized after the saponification shows how much alkali has been neutralized by the fatty acids formed. Essentially this method is a determination of the molecular weight of the fat, as the following table shows : Mol, Weight Saponification No. Butyrin Caproin Palmatin Stearin Olein . 302 336 806 890 884 557.3 436.1 208.8 189.1 190.4 Unsaponifiable Residvs. — It is obvious that the saponi- fication number can give reliable data concerning the molecular weights of the fatty acids contained in the fats, only when glycerol is the only alcohol present in the fats. Now it not infrequently happens that there occur with the fats certain other alcohols, as cetyl and octadecyl alcohols and cholesterol (C27H43OH), an alcohol of high molecular weight which is structurally very different from the higher alcohols derived from the aliphatic hydrocarbons (99). These occur free or in ester linkage with fatty acids. Cholesterol possesses physical properties very similar to The Fats, Waxes, and Related Compounds 185 the fats and fatty acids, and occurs free and as esters almost universally distributed in animal and plant tissues. Since these alcohols have molecular weights of 242, 270 and 384 respectively, whereas that of glycerol is but 92, the saponification number can be properly interpreted only when the content of these higher alcohols is known. These alcohols are collectively estimated by repeatedly shaking with petroleum ether the solution of the soaps, glycerol, and higher alcohols obtained in the determina- tion of the saponification number after again making it alkaline after the titration. Petroleum ether does not dissolve soaps, glycerol, or potassium hydroxide, but readily dissolves the higher alcohols in question. After separating the petroleum ether, filtering, and evaporating it, and again taking up the residue of higher alcohols in a fat solvent such as ether, the solution is filtered, and the solvent evaporated in a weighed dish. The residue is weighed after keeping the dish in a desiccator until its weight is constant. This weight represents the higher alcohols which were present in the sample of fat. A few typical values of the higher alcohols in some com- mon fats will illustrate the importance of this determina- tion. Unsaponifiablb Matter Linseed oil .42-1.0 Olive oil .46-1.0 Castor oil .30-40 Corn oil 1.35-2.90 Wheat oil 4.45 Human fat .33 Lard .30-.40 186 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Shark liver oil 7.0-10.5 Sperm oil 37.0-41.0 Beeswax 52.0-56.0 The Iodine Number. — The relative content of saturated and unsaturated fatty acids in fats is determined by the capacity of the fats to absorb iodine. As an example of the determination of this value, the Hubl method will be described : (1) A standard solution of iodine containing 25 grams of iodine and 30 grams of mercuric chloride dissolved in 500 c.c. of alcohol, free from fusel oil. (2) A solution of sodium thiosulphate containing 24 grams of the salt per liter. This solution is standardized by determining the number of milligrams of iodine which is reduced by a cubic centimeter of the solution. The sample of fat, .3 to .4 gram of olein-rich fats or .8 to 1 gram of solid fats, is weighed into a glass stoppered bottle and dissolved in 15-25 c.c. of chloroform. It is then heated with 25 c.c. of the iodine solution. After 6 to 10 hours 20 c.c. of a 10 % potassium iodide solution is added, the whole diluted with water, and the unabsorbed iodine is titrated by means of the sodium thiosulphate solution. The KI is added to prevent the separation of iodine. in the solid state on dilution with water. ,The following values illustrate the iodine values for several kinds of fats : Iodine Numbers Pure Fats Olein 86.2 Linolein 173.6 Linolenin 262.2 The Fats, Waxes, and Related Compounds 187 Iodine Numbers op Natural Fats Linseed oil . 170-200 Hempseed oil 145-150 Almond oil 93-97 Olive oil 80-88 Palm oil 51 Coconut oil 8-9 Tallow (beef) 38-45 Tallow (mutton) 35-45 Lard 50-70 Butter 26-38 Reichert-Meissl Nwmher (Volatile fatty acid number). — It has already been, stated that certain fats contain much larger amounts of the fatty acids of lower molecular weight, as butyrin, caproin, etc. These acids, after saponifica- tion of the fat with an alkali and subsequent acidification with a non-volatile mineral acid, pass over with steam when the mixture of fatty acids and wa,ter is distilled. The distillate is titrated with standard alkali, using phenol- phthalein as indicator. The number of cubic centimeters of 1/10 normal alkali required to neutralize the volatile acids from 5 grams of fat constitute the Reichert-Meissl number. The values of the ReichertrMeissl number for some of the more important fats are as follows : Linseed oil 0.0 Palm oil 5.0-7.0 Olive oil 0.6 Coconut oil 6.5-7.0 Lard .7 Croton oil 12.-13.5 Tallow - .5 Butter fat 21-33.0 Goose fat .2-2 188 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine This method of examination is of great service for the examination of butter for adulteration. No other fat approximates the high value of butter fat in volatile fatty acids, and the lowering of this value by the addition of vegetable fats or the body fats of animals is readily de- tected. Acetyl Number. — Very few of the natural fats contain hydroxylated fatty acids. Chief among these is castor oil, which in ricinoleic acid contains a secondary alcohol group (90). The amount of hydroxy fatty acids is arrived at through treatment of the fat with acetic anhydride (64) and heat, whereby the hydroxyl group of the fat forms an acetic ester : R v /CO— CH 3 R-^ >CHOH+C< -» HC— OOC— CH 3 R'/ \CO— CH3 R'^" Acetic anhydride + Q^ COOH Such esters are stable to boiling water, and the excess of acetic anhydride can be converted into acetic acid by boiling : (CH 3 — COO) 2 + H 2 = 2CH 3 — COOH The acetylated fats are then separated mechanically, since they are insoluble in water and form a layer. After washing these free from acid reaction and collecting on a filter paper they are dried at 100° to constant weight. A carefully weighed sample (2-5 grams) is then saponified with an excess of carefully measured standard solution of alcoholic potassium hydroxide N/10. When saponi- fication is complete, the same volume of N/10 acid is The Fats, Waxes, and Related Compounds 189 added as was added of N/10 alkali in the saponification and the solution warmed. The aqueous layer is then siphoned off through filter paper and the remaining oil is washed until all soluble acids are washed out. The filtrate and washings are titrated with N/10 alkali, using phenolphthalein as an indicator. Soluble fatty acids must be determined separately and their amount deducted from the value found. The following table shows the values for the acetyl number of some common fats : Linseed oil 4.0 Beeswax 15.2 Olive oil 10.5 Cod liver oil 4.8 Palm oil 18.0 Shark liver oil 12.0 Lard 2.6 Seal fat 16.5 Tallow (beef) 2.5-8.6 Spermaceti 4.5 Wool wax 23.0 The elaidin test depends upon the fact that oleic acid changes from the cis to the trans form (86) with a marked rise in melting point when treated with nitrous oxide. The test is carried out by placing the oil (10 c.c.) in a test tube with nitric acid (.5 c.c.) underneath it, and placing in the acid a piece of copper (.2 gm.). If much oleic acid is present, the fat will have become solid at the temper- ature of 25° by the following day. Fats having two or three double bonds do not give this test. The Hexabromide Test. — Dibromand tetrabrom stearic acids result from the absorption of bromine by oleic and linolic acids or their fats. Both of these are soluble in ether. Linolenic acid having three double bonds, yields a 190 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine hexabrom derivative, which is insoluble in ether. The test is of value therefore in detecting linolenic acid and its fats. One to two c.c. of fat are treated with 40 c.c. of ether and cooled to 5°. Bromine is then added until the brown color is permanent. Linolenic acid-containing fats yield a precipitate within three hours. It can be filtered and washed with acetic acid, alcohol, and ether, and weighed after keeping in a desiccator to constant weight. Separation of oleic acid as the lead soap. The lead soap of oleic acid is soluble in ether and in benzene, while the corresponding soaps of stearic and palmitic acids are practically insoluble in these solvents. This property is made use of in effecting their separation. 95. The Waxes. — The surfaces of all organisms, both animals and plants, are covered with a layer of wax, which also permeates the external layers of cells. There are several kinds of waxes; all, however, are esters derived from one of the higher fatty acids and a monatomic alcohol of high molecular weight. They have the common prop- erty of being more or less solid at ordinary temperatures, but on warming they soften and can be kneaded. They melt at 60 to 80°. The waxes are wholly insoluble in water, but soluble in boiling alcohol, and less soluble in ether. They also dissolve in chloroform and turpentine. Like fats they produce a transparent spot when melted on paper, and confer a shiny appearance on objects coated with them. Water does not penetrate even a thin wax layer. They are not altered by light or air, or by bac- teria or molds, and are proof against changes similar to rancidity. Furthermore waxes are among the poorest heat The Fats, Waxes, and Related Compounds 191 conductors known. Their composition is, approximately, carbon, 80 % ; hydrogen, 12-13 % ; and oxygen, 7-8 %. These remarkable properties are of the very greatest biological importance. They prevent wetting of the tissues of animals and plants, and in the case of plants, eggs of insects, etc., exposed to very hot, dry atmospheric condi- tions, the waxy covering prevents excessive desiccation through evaporation. This layer also serves as an effect- ive barrier against the invasion of the tissues by bacteria, and as a protection against changes of temperature. While waxes form a layer covering the green parts of all plants, they are found in much greater abundance on some plants than others. Carnauba wax is found on the leaves of the Brazilian palm, Copernicia cerifera. It is used for candle making, polishes, wax varnishes, etc. It consists of ceryl alcohol, C26H54O, and myricyl alcohol, as esters of cerotic and lignoceric acids, C26H52O2 and C24H48O2, re- spectively. The waxes of the graminese contain princi- pally myricyl alcohol and melissic acid, C30H60O2. Certain other waxes of plant origin contain palmitic acid as ester with the alcohols named, but cerotic, myristic, and melissic acids are most common. In certain cases, as Japan wax, obtained from several species of Rhus, the waxes are re- placed by the hard fat palmitin. Myrtleberry wax is likewise principally palmitin. These are therefore not true waxes. Among the animal waxes of great importance are those produced by various insects. They serve to protect the eggs and larvse against moisture and loss of heat. Chinese wax produced by a coccus is ceryl cerotate ; psylla wax, 192 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine produced by a leaf louse in Finland, is the ester formed of psylla alcohol, C33H67OH, and psylla acid, CsgHgeQ:. Bees- wax consists principally of myricyl alcohol and cerotic and melissic acids in ester combination. It is employed by the honeybees for protecting their eggs and larvae against cold and also for honeycomb. It also contains impurities gathered from plants. The gland at the base of the tail in birds secretes a liquid wax which the birds spread over their feathers to render them waterproof and soft. This wax consists of palmitic, stearic, and oleic acid esters of octadecyl alcohol, CigHsO. Spermaceti is a wax, principally cetyl palmitate, which is obtained from a cavity in the head of the sperm whale. From this cavity a canal runs to the tail and branches communicate with pockets in the panniculus. The wax is thus conveyed to all parts of the skin, which it permeates and protects from the action of the sea water. Similar esters are found in whale oil and in the oil from dolphins. The production of spermaceti is closely analogous to the secretion of wax by the tail glands of birds and to the uni- versal distribution of the sebaceous glands in the skin of the higher animals which produce an oily secretion of liquid wax which protects the skin and hair. Wool wax (lanolin), the natural covering of sheep's wool, contains much cholesterol and oxycholesterol in the free state, and also as esters of several fatty acids, espe- cially myristic, cerotic, and lanoceric. Wool wax also con- tains other higher alcohols, as carnaubyl, C24H50O, and lanolin alcohol, CiaH^O. , The Fats, Waxes, and Related Compounds 193 96. Lecithins and other Phosphatides. — As constitu- ents of every living cell, both animal and plant, there occur compounds closely related to the fats, called lecithins. These on hydrolysis yield one molecule of glycerol, two of fatty acid, one of orthophosphoric acid (H3PO4), and one of choline (48). Glycerol forms with phosphoric acid an ester, glyeero- phosphoric acid : ' CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CHOH = CHOH CH 2 — O— PO(OH) 2 Glycerophosphorio acid Lecithins are regarded as complexes of the following structure : CH 2 OH+H O— PO(OH) 2 Glycerol residue CH 2 — OOC— R I CH — OOC— R CH 2 H( Fatty acid radicals >P=0 ho/ I Phosphoric acid radical I CH 2 — CH 2 N= (CH 3 ) 3 Choline group I OH Little is known with certainty of the chemistry of the various lecithins. It is evident that different fatty acids 194 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine in the molecule would lead to lecithins of different proper- ties. Furthermore there is the possibility that two differ- ent fatty acids may be linked in the same molecule, forming mixed lecithins. Isomerism is likewise possible due to the different linking of the phosphoric acid-choline group : CH 2 0— fatty acid A CH 2 0— fatty acid A CHO — fatty acid A or CHO — phosphoric | acid-choline - CH 2 — phosphoric acid-choline CH 2 — fatty acid A The investigation of this class of compounds presents almost insurmountable difficulties. They are of a waxy nature, and do not form compounds with other substances which can be crystallized, for purposes of purification, and they cannot be distilled without decomposition, and have no definite melting point. There is therefore no criterion by which to judge when one is in possession of an indi- vidual chemical compound or is dealing with a mixture, except constancy of composition of the material after repeated solution and precipitation of the lecithin. This is carried out in most instances by dissolving the lecithin in ether and pouring the solution into a large volume of acetone in which lecithin is insoluble. The precipitates are always amorphous. When on repeating this method of purification the precipitate is found to contain the same percentages of nitrogen and phosphorus, these being the easiest elements to determine quantitatively^ the assump- tion is often made that the precipitated material represents a chemical individual. Instances are known however in which two substances precipitate in fairly constant pro- The Fats, Waxes, and Related Compounds 195 portions under such conditions, so that such a method of purification cannot inspire much confidence. Among the compounds formed by lecithin which have a crystalline structure, and which are serviceable for its purification, are the cadmium chloride double salt, which can be crystallized from a mixture of benzene and alcohol. The lack of satisfactory criteria of purity for compounds of this class has rendered their investigation uninviting as compared with other lines of study. This in a measure accounts for the paucity of our knowledge of these com- pounds. Birds when fed certain fat-free and lecithin-free foods can grow and produce eggs containing much larger amounts of lecithins than the bodies of the birds contained at the beginning of the experiment. The lecithin complex is therefore synthesized in the animal cells from its con- stituents." It has been pointed out (92) that fatty acids and glycerol can be formed by the animal body from sugars and proteins. The synthesis of lecithin by birds shows that the choline complex is also synthesized by the animal cells. Diets on which birds accomplished this synthesis contained neither glycol nor trimethylamine. The steps, by which choline is formed are not clearly understood, but it is evident that the animal cells can, under certain condi- tions, form methylated nitrogen compounds, as trimethyl- amine, as it is known to do with tellurium and selenium (6). (CH,)i-N— CH = CH, Neurine, | , trimethylrvinyl- OH ammonium hydroxide. — We are by no means certain that 196 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine choline is the only nitrogen base contained in the natural compounds of the lecithin type. Thudicum, a worker of distinction in this field, states that from certain phospha- tides of the brain (cephalin) he obtained neurine. It is highly probable that bases other than choline exist in lecithins. Neurine is derived from choline by the loss of a molecule of water : CH 2 OH CH 2 -H 2 Q II CH 2 — N = (CH 3 ) 3 *" CH— N = (CH 3 ) 3 I I OH OH Choline Neurine Neurine is much more toxic than choline. Choline, being an alcohol as well as a base, can yield an aldehyde on oxidation : CH 2 OH CHO I ±2 i CH 2 — N = (CH 3 ) 3 ~~ *" CH 2 — N^CCHs) OH OH Muscarine As an alcohol, choline yields esters with various acids. These in general possess pronounced pharmacological prop- erties, being much more toxic than choline itself. 97. Muscarine, a highly toxic substance, occurs in some of the poisonous mushrooms, but appears not to be toxic enough to account for all of their poisonous prop- erties. The Fats, Waxes, and Related Compounds 197 Other phosphatides (compounds yielding fatty acids, glycerol, some nitrogen-containing base, and phosphoric acid) have been described, among them cephalin, the acids of which are more unsaturated than those of ordinary lecithins. The base is apparently not choline. It is not as yet satisfactorily studied. 98. The Cerebrosides. — There is found in the nervous tissue a group of substances which contain no phosphorus, but yield on hydrolysis a nitrogen-containing base of unknown chemical nature, a sugar (galactose), and a fatty acid. They are not found in embryonic nervous tissues, but develop during medullation. Two such compounds are phrenosin and kerasin. They still need further study to reveal their chemical structure. 99. Sterols. — The brain at different ages contains varying amounts of cholesterol (4-9 %) and possibly several more or less closely related compounds of this nature. Its content increases with age. As stated under waxes (95) cholesterol is an alcohol of high molecular weight. Its formula is represented by C27H46O. Several of its esters are known. Its structure has been in part elucidated. Its alcohol group is a secondary one, since it oxidizes to a ketone. It also contains a double bond, as shown by its forming an addition product with bromine or iodine. The structure of the rest of the molecule is not yet established. Compounds closely related to cholesterol are found in the fats of plants. These are called phytosteroh. Cholesterol is a crystalline solid, insoluble in water, sparingly soluble in cold, but readily in hot, alcohol, ether, acetone, chloroform, and other organic solvents. Choles- 198 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine terol nielts at 147 °. It forms an acetyl derivative (ester) when heated with acetic anhydride, which melts at 114° and is useful in identifying cholesterol. Cholesterol forms with a natural glycoside, digitonin, a compound sparingly soluble in 95 % alcohol. It is frequently precipitated in this form and weighed in its quantitative estimation. An isocholesterol has been described as occurring in lanolin, and a derivative called coprosterol has been iso- lated from feces. It has no double bond and results from the reduction of cholesterol, due to bacterial action. CHAPTER IX THE DIBASIC ACIDS 100. It has been shown how hydrocyanic acid reacts with water, forming ammonium formate (50). In fact, solutions of HCN are unstable, tending to react with water : HCN + 2 Ha0 = H COONH 4 Hydrocyanic acid is therefore the nitrile of formic acid. CN Cyanogen, | , on the other hand, when boiled with CN acids reacts with water to form oxalic acid : CN COONH* COOH | + 4 H 2 = | =| + 2 NH3 CN COONH4 COOH Ammonium oxalate Cyanogen has therefore the double formula indicated. Oxalic acid occurs in nature in many plants — rhubarb, sorrel, etc. It is deposited as its salt, calcium oxalate, in the leaves and cells. These crystals have the appearance of envelopes. Oxalic acid is of great importance in ana- lytical chemistry. By reason of its possession of two car- boxyl groups it forms two series of salts, acid and neutral. The most important salts are the acid potassium and the neutral calcium salt. The former is present in the juices 199 200 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine of many plants, from which it is obtained in a crystalline form on evaporation. The calcium salt is so slightly soluble in water and in dilute acetic acid that it is em- ployed for the quantitative, estimation of calcium. The salt of urea with oxalic acid is soluble in 23 parts of water and in 60 parts of alcohol. This compound has been employed for the isolation of urea from urine. With great care and with proper conditions oxalic acid can be decomposed by heat into formic acid and carbon dioxide: C0 0H ! s-HCOOH+COa COOH On heating strongly the formic acid decomposes into water and carbon monoxide. The calcium salt on being heated forms calcium carbonate (calcium oxide + carbon dioxide) and carbon monoxide : COO\ I )Ca=CaO+C0 2 +CO. coo/ Oxalic acid can also be formed by quickly raising sodium formate to a high temperature. 2 HCOONa = H 2 + (COONa) 2 Dehydrating agents such as concentrated sulphuric acid decompose oxalic acid, forming carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, and water. This is a convenient way of preparing carbon monoxide. Characteristic of oxalic acid is its conversion into volatile products without charring when heated on platinum, and also the absence of charring when it is heated with concentrated sulphuric acid. In dilute The Dibasic Acids 201 sulphuric acid it is easily oxidized by potassium perman- ganate solution. This decolorization of dilute permanga- nate solutions is caused by many other compounds. It is also formed by the oxidation of many organic substances such as starch, wood, etc. It results from the oxidation of alcohol by potassium permanganate. The various stages through which the oxidation may pass are illustrated by the following scheme : CH 3 CH3 CH 3 CH 2 OH CHO i +0 | +0 | +o i +o i CHsOH — * CHO — *" COOH — > COOH "~J COOH + CH 2 OH CHO CHO I +° I +° I CH 2 OH — *■ CH 2 OH — *- CHO This series of compounds illustrates what not infre- quently happens in reactions involving the oxidation of organic compounds. The reaction does not proceed with the formation of the end products indicated by the simple equations usually written, but stepwise, and with the formation of a number of oxidation products. Only be- cause the oxalic acid is highly resistant to further oxida- tion under certain conditions does the reaction stop at this point instead of going on to carbon dioxide and water. In many synthetic reactions the same type of change occurs, viz. there is a principal reaction accompanied by a number of side reactions which form by-products and diminish the yield of the desired substance. By allowing 202 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine the reaction to proceed for but a short time or conducting it at low temperatures, etc., the intermediary compounds can frequently be accumulated in greater amounts. Properties of Oxalic Acid. — It crystallizes from water in colorless prisms containing two molecules of water of crystallization. In this form it melts at 101.5°. On being heated for a time at 100° it loses its water and forms a white powder of anhydrous acid which melts at 189°. It dissolves readily in alcohol but very slightly in ether, and is insoluble in chloroform, petroleum ether, and benzene. Oxalic acid is a strong acid. On evaporating a solution of sodium chloride with oxalic acid, sodium oxalate crys- tallizes out, and on heating a mixture of sodium chloride and oxalic acid, hydrochloric acid gas is evolved. It is a corrosive poison which acts very quickly. In general it cannot serve as a source of carbon for molds or bacteria,- but there are some observations tending to show that cer- tain organisms can so use it. Oxalic acid is produced from sugars by certain molds. In the higher animals oxalic acid is burned to but very slight extent. The dibasic acids form esters, amides, etc., as do the monobasic acids. There is in each case, however, a deriva- tive possible in which but one carboxyl is substituted, as well as one derived by the reaction of both acid radicles. COOH 101. Malonic Acid, CH 2 . — This acid results from the I COOH The Dibasic Acids 203 nitrile which is formed by the reaction of monochloracetic acid with potassium cyanide : CN COOH CH 2 — CI j I | +KCN=CH 2 + 2H 2 = CH 2 COOH ! | COOH COOH This method of synthesis makes clear its structure. Malonic acid is a crystalline compound melting at 132°. It is found in beet juice. On heating to 140-150° it de- composes with the formation of carbon dioxide and acetic acid: COOH— CH 2 — COOH = CO, + CH 3 — COOH This property is common to the dibasic acids in which the two carboxyl groups are linked to one carbon atom. When heated above their melting points they lose one molecule of carbon dioxide. 102. Malonic Ester Synthesis. — The most' important derivative of malonic acid is its diethyl ester. It is a liquid with a slight odor which boils at 195°. It is re- markable for the peculiar behavior of the hydrogen atoms of its methylene group. When malonic ester is treated with sodium, hydrogen is evolved and a metallic derivative, sodiomalonic ester, is formed : COOC 2 H 6 I CHNa I COOCzHs Sodiomalonic ester 204 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine This property of the hydrogen atoms of methylene groups being replaceable by metals is found only in com- pounds in which the methylene group is linked on both sides to strongly negative groups. Other instances of this character will appear later (see aceto-acetic acid, 127). This compound reacts with alkyl iodide just as do the sodium alcoholates (24), the sodium being replaced by the alkyl groups : COOC 2 H 6 COOC 2 H 6 I I CHNa + ICHs = CH— CHs + Nal I I COOC 2 H 6 COOC 2 H 5 Malonic ester The resulting alkyl derivative on saponification yields methylmalonic acid, which on heating above its melting point decomposes into propionic acid. COOC 2 H 5 COOH CHs I +2H 2 0l -C0 2 I CH— CH3 ^CH— CH 3 *CH 2 , COOC 2 H 6 COOH COOH By treating methylmalonic ester with sodium the second hydrogen, is replaced by metal and this in turn can be substituted by methyl, ethyl, etc. groups, which on loss of C0 2 yield dimethyl, methyl-ethyl, etc., derivatives of acetic acid, viz. isobutyric and isovaleric acids. The malonic ester synthesis is therefore a general method for preparing any of the isomeric monobasic fatty acids as well as a great number of homologues of malonic acid. The Dibasic Acids 205 Succinic acid and urea condense to barbituric acid (139). 103. Succinic Acid. — COOH This acid occurs in the urine after ingestion of asparagus. It is found in amber, fossilized wood, Y** 2 and many plants. It is crystalline and melts qu at 182°. That this acid is a homologue of j malonic acid is shown by its synthesis from ethy- COOH lene bromide, through ethylene cyanide, which on hydrolysis yields succinic acid. CH 2 Br KCN CH 2 — CN CH 2 — COOH ! + -> | +4H 2 0^ | CH 2 Br KCN CH 2 — CN CH 2 — COOH Ethylene cyanide The dibasic acids can likewise be synthesized by the malonic ester synthesis. Not only does sodiomalonic ester react with alkyl halides (102), but with halogen de- rivatives such as the ester of chloracetic acid : COOC 2 H 6 COOC 2 H 6 I I CHNa +C1— CH 2 — COOCaHs = CH— CH 2 — COOC 2 H B | chlor ethylacetate | COOCaHs COOC 2 H 6 COOH COOH -co 2 I CH 2 < CH— CH 2 — COOH CH 2 COOH I COOH 206 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine By the same reaction substituted succinic acids can be obtained. Thus by employing a-brom propionic acid methyl succinic acid is obtained. COOR CH 3 I I CHNa+Br— CH I I COOR COOC 2 H 6 COOR COO H | /CH3 I /CH3 = CH— CH( + NaBr->- CH— CH; I \COOC 2 H 6 I \COOH COOR COOH J-CQ, CH3— CH— COOH CH*— COOH Methyl succinic acid 104. Aspartic Acid, COOH— CH 2 —CHNH 2 — COOH. — The a-amino derivative of succinic acid is one of the prod- ucts of the hydrolysis of all proteins except the protamines (243). The carbon atom to which the amino group is attached is asymmetric (30) and it exists therefore in two optical forms. From the proteins the levo form is always obtained. Since it contains both carboxyl and amino groups it forms salts with both acids and bases, with the latter two series according to whether one or both of the carboxyl groups enter into salt formation. The acid salts, i.e. those having one free carboxyl group and the amino group, react neutral; those in which the carboxyl groups The Dibasic Acids 207 are both neutralized by a base react alkaline through the influence of the amino group. The normal copper salt of 1-aspartic acid, C4H5O4N • Cu + 4£H 2 0, is soluble in 2870 parts of water at ordinary temperature, and in 234 parts of boiling water. The diethyl ester of aspartic acid boils without decom- position under 11 mm. pressure at 126.5°. The ethyl esters of the monobasic amino acids are hydrolyzed by a few hours' boiling with water. Aspartic ester is stable in boiling water, but is hydrolyzed by 2 hours' heating with an excess of barium hydroxide. 105. Asparagine. — CONH2 a-ramino succinamide is the half amide of aspartic I acid. It is found in large amounts in the juice I 2 of sprouted seeds of the legumes. Asparagine CHNH f° rms large rhombic hemihedral prisms soluble j in 47 parts of water at 20°, and insoluble in COOH alcohol. 1-asparagine has a sweet taste. Glutaric Acid, COOH— CH 2 — CH 2 — CH 2 — COOH, which occurs in the washings of sheep's wool, is the next higher homologue of succinic acid. The acid itself is of biological interest because certain of its derivatives are found in nature. Chief among these are glutamic acid, or a-amino glutaric acid, and glutamine, the half amide of glutamic acid. It results from the hydrolysis of pro- pylene nitrile, CN — CH 2 — CH 2 — CH 2 — CN, and can also be prepared from sodiomalonic ester by treatment with /3-iodo propionic ester, saponifying and heating the result- ing tricarboxylic acid above its melting point (102). It crystallizes in large prisms which melt at 97.5° and 208 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine boil at 304°. It is easily soluble in water, alcohol and ether. 106. Glutamic Acid, COOH— CH 2 — CH 2 — CHNH 2 — COOH, a-amino glutaric acid, is present in many proteins, forming about 40 % of the total nitrogen content of the wheat proteins, gliadin and glutenin. The naturally occurring form is dextrorotatory, but its salts rotate the plane of polarized light to the left. Its diethyl ester boils under 10 mm. pressure at 139-140°. Glutamic acid is sol- uble at 16° in 100 parts of water. It forms salts with both acids and bases as does aspartic acid (104). Of special importance for its isolation is the hydrochloride, which is very sparingly soluble in concentrated hydrochloric acid. On saturating its solutions with hydrochloric acid gas the hydrochloric acid salt separates on cooling nearly quantitatively. This property differentiates it from as- partic acid. 107. Glutamine, CONH 2 — CH 2 — CH 2 — CHNH 2 — COOH, is found widely distributed in the sap of plants. After everything which is precipitable by lead has been removed from plant extracts, glutamine is precipitated by mercuric nitrate. Certain other amino acids are likewise precipitated with it, so that its purification is not simple. It is much more soluble in water than is asparagine. It seems highly probable that glutamic acid occurs within the protein molecule as glutamine. On hydrolysis with acids the amide group is converted into ammonia (90). 108. Adipic Acid, COOH— (CH 2 ) 4 — COOH, is said to occur in beet juice. It is formed by the action of silver on /3-iodio propionic acid. The Dibasic Acids 209 HOOC— CH 2 — CH 2 I + I Ag+Ag CH 2 — CH 2 — COOH = HOOC— (CH 2 ) 4 — COOH It melts at 148°. It is of interest mainly because it is convertible into a ring structure. This will be described later (111). Pimelic Acid, COOH^(CH 2 ) B — COOH, has not been found in nature. It melts at 103°, and is soluble in 25 parts of water at 20°. Suberic Acid, COOH— (CH 2 ) 6 — COOH, melts at 141°. At 15.5° one part of the acid is soluble in 600 parts of water. CHAPTER X THE POLYMETHYLENE COMPOUNDS CH 2 . 109. Trimethylene, | /CH 2 , is obtained by the ac- ch/ tion of metallic sodium on trimethylene bromide : CH 2 Br CH 2 + 2Na I CH 2 Br CH 2 . \ >CH 2 This compound is also formed by the interaction of ethylene bromide on sodiomalonic ester : CH 2 Br I - CH 2 Br + Na 2 : CH 2 COOC 2 H 5 I =c I COOC 2 H 5 CH; CH : Trimethylene is isomeric with propylene, CH 2 = CH — CH 3 , but differs from it in its properties. Both are gases, but whereas propylene is easily oxidized by potas- sium permanganate, trimethylene is not attacked by this reagent. It unites with bromine only very slowly to form trimethylene bromide, and more readily with hydriodic 210 The Polymethylene Compounds 211 acid to form normal propyl iodide. The heat of combus- tion of trimethylene is much greater than that of its isomer (83). The slow reaction of trimethylene with bromine indi- cates that the ring structure is in equilibrium with a very small amount of an active dissociation product, probably, >CH 2 — CH 2 ^CH 2 — 110. Tetramethylene is not known except in the form of certain derivatives. When trimethylene bromide reacts with sodiomalonic ester, the dicarboxylic ester of tetra- methylene is formed : CH 2 Br COOR CH 2 COOR I I / \l CH 2 +Na*C =CH 2 C I I \ /I CH 2 Br COOR CH 2 COOR CH 2 COOH CB 12 CH 2 C = CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 [COOjH CH 2 Tetramethylene CH 2 — C H 2 v 111. Pentamethylene, >CH 2 . This hy- CH 2 — CH/ drocarbon can be obtained by the malonic ester synthesis when tetramethylene bromide is employed with sodio- malonic ester. It is likewise formed by a series of reac- 212 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine -tions which are of interest, starting with the calcium salt of adipic acid : CH2 CIl2\ CH2 — CH2 — coo v CH 2 — CH 2 — COO > Ca x >co CH2 — CH2 Calcium adipate Ketopentamethylene The structure of the ketone derivative of pentamethyl- ene is further shown by the fact that it oxidizes to glutaric acid : CH 2 — CH 2 — COOH I CH 2 — COOH Pentamethylene itself is obtained by reducing its ketone derivative to a secondary' alcohol, then replacing the hydroxyl of the alcohol by iodine by treatment with hydri- odic acid, followed by the 'replacement of the iodine by hydrogen : CH2 — CH2\ CH2 — CH2V J \C0 £H 1 NCHOH CH2 — CH2 CH2 — CH2 „_ CH2 CIl2\ „ CH2 CH 2 v +HI I ^>CHI +2H I ^>CH 2 CH2 — CH2 CH2 — CH2 Pentamethylene Pentamethylene is a liquid boiling at 50°. It will be recalled that normal pentane boils at 37°. While the tetramethylene ring shows a tendency to open and add two halogen atoms, it does not undergo this change as readily as does trimethylene. Pentamethylene, however, is so stable that it does not react with bromine. It is exceedingly stable toward oxidizing agents, as nitric acid, The Polymethylene Compounds 213 and shows none of the tendency of unsaturated compounds to condense with sulphuric acid (125). w The following figures show the angle of deviation neces- sary for the formation of the ring structure in the several polymethylenes : Trimethylene 24° 44' Tetramethylene 9° 44' Pentamethylene 0° 44' The Polymethylene Compounds 21,5 Hexamethylene -5° 16' Heptamethylene -9° 33' Octamethylene -12° 51' The strain is least in the case of pentamethylene among all the cyclo methylene compounds, which corresponds with its stability. In harmony with the facts mentioned in support of the validity of the " strain theory " is the observation that heptamethylene when heated with bromine in a sealed tube changes to a methyl-substituted hexamethylene ring. These compounds are often called cyclopropane, cyclo- butane, cyclopentane, etc. The formation of a ring structure has in itself but little influence upon the properties of the hydrocarbons. 114. Anhydrides of the Dibasic Acids. — Oxalic and malonic acids do not form anhydrides. Succinic and glutaric acids readily lose the elements of a molecule of water from within a single molecule of the acid, forming cyclic anhydrides : CH 2 — COOH CH 2 — CO v | -H 2 = | . >0 CH 2 — COOH CH 2 — CO x Succinic anhydride XH 2 — COOH /CH 2 — CO. CH 2 < -H 2 = CH 2 < >0 X CH 2 — COOH X CH 2 — CO/ Glutaric anhydride Molecular weight determinations of these anhydrides have shown that the anhydride formation does not take place between two molecules of acid. Simple solution of 216 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine these anhydrides in water converts them back into the acids from which they were derived. The failure of the two and three carbon dibasic acids to form anhydrides is in harmony with the " strain theory " (113). 115. Succinimide. — When the ammonium salt of suc- cinic acid is heated strongly to the distillation point, a mole- cule of ammonia and one of water are split off and a ring structure containing the imide group =NH is formed : CH 2 — COONH4 CH 2 — CO\ ! -NH 3 and H 2 = I )NH CH 2 — COONH* CH 2 — CO/ Succinimide is a crystalline compound which melts at 125° and boils at 288°. On warming with barium hy- droxide solution it takes on one molecule of water, forming the half amide of succinic acid : CH 2 — CO\ CH 2 — COOH I )NH+H 2 0= I CH 2 — CO/ CH 2 — CO— NH 2 Glutarimide is produced in a similar manner from the ammonium salt of glutaric acid. These are examples of compounds in which nitrogen takes part with carbon in the formation of cyclic compounds. 116. Pyrrol, CH=CH\ i s formed from succinimide by distilling J /NH, the latter with zinc dust, which ab- CH=CH / stracts oxygen : CH 2 — CC\ CH=CH X I )NH ~ 2 Q I )NH CH 2 — CCK CH=CH/ The Polymethylene Compounds 217 Pyrrol does not take up halogens directly, as would be expected from its possessing two double bonds. This peculiarity of certain cyclic compounds differentiates them sharply from the olefines. Pyrrol can, however, take up two atoms of hydrogen whenTeduced with acetic acid and zinc dust (nascent hydrogen), and the resulting Pyrroline, or dihydropyrrol, absorbs two atoms of bromine as do the olefines. This peculiar behavior has led to the assumption that instead of the double bond between the two pairs of carbon atoms one bond from each of the four is directed toward the center of the ring. This form should be very stable as compared with the double bond. The fact that nascent hydrogen is taken up by pyrrol probably finds an explanation in the existence of a small amount of the formula containing the double bond in dynamic equilib- rium with the centric formula : CH— CH II II ^ CH CH \/ NH Active modification HC CH \/ /\ HC CH \/ NH Principal form Inactive When two atoms of hydrogen are absorbed the centric formula is changed to one containing a double bond, as in pyrroline: CH— CH 2 H 2 C— CH 2 II I +2H= | | CH CH 2 H 2 C CH 2 \/ v NH NH Pyrroline Pyrrolidine 218 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Pyrrol is a constituent of coal tar and is a product of the distillation of bones. The latter is. called bone oil and contains pyridine (230) and various cyclic hydrocarbons, benzene, etc. (166), pyrrol and its homologues, together with large amounts of the nitriles of fatty acids. When agitated with dilute acid the basic compounds form salts which are soluble in water and are removed. The nitriles are saponified by boiling with alkali and the oil which remains is distilled. The fraction which distills between 115° and 130° contains the pyrrol. The hydrogen of the imino group is replaceable by metals, alkyl, acetyl, etc., and when warmed with potassium hydroxide the solid compound potassium pyrrol, C4H4NK, is formed. This is filtered off and decomposed by water, which regenerates pyrrol : C H=CH\ CH=CH\ I )NK+HOH= I )NH CH=CH/ CH=CH/ Pyrrol is a colorless liquid with an odor similar to that of chloroform. It' boils at 131°, and is but slightly soluble in water. It dissolves readily in al- cohol and ether. Potassium dissolves in pyrrol with the evolution of hydrogen, forming potassium pyrrol, yet pyrrol has a feebly, basic character. Pyrrol gives a bright red color with a pine shaving moistened with hydrochloric acid. Derivatives of Pyrrol. — While pyrrol itself is a poison- ous substance and does not have a biological r61e, several of its derivatives are of great importance as constituents of the protein molecule, of chlorophyll, the green pigment of plants, of hsemin and hsematoporphyrin, both of which The Polymethylene Compounds 219 are derivatives of haemoglobin, the respiratory pigment of the blood. Pyrrol derivatives are present in nicotine, an alkaloid contained in tobacco, and in the alkaloids of the tropine group, e.g. atropine, cocaine, etc., and in the bile pigments. The structure of the pyrrol derivatives is indi- cated thus : ■ yS'HC— CHy8 II II «'HC CH« V NH The pyrrol derivatives important from the biological standpoint are the following : CH3 — C — C — C2H5 CH3 — C — C — C2I1B CH3— C CH \/ NH Isohsemopyrrol 0-etbyl, a'-0'-dimethyl pyrrol CH3— C— C— C2H5 HC C— CH 3 NH Kryptopyrrol , a-methyl-j3-ethyl-j3'-methyl pyrrol CH 3 — C— C— CH 2 — CH 2 — COOH CH3— C C— CH 3 CH3— C CH v v/ NH NH Phyllopyrrol Isophonopyrrol carboxylic acid o-methyl-/3-ethyl-a'-/3'-dimethyl ^-propionic acid-a', /3'-dimethyl pyrrol pyrrol All four of these are derived from haematin, a substance containing iron which is present in the blood in combina- tion with, globin, a protein. The entire complex is called haemoglobin. This has the power of combining with oxygen in loose combination and thus serves to transport oxygen throughout the body. 220 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Haemin, C3 3 H 32 04N4FeCI, crystallizes out when defibrin- ated blood is dropped into a large volume of glacial acetic acid containing some sodium chloride, the solution being heated to 95°. This treatment separates the hoematin from the haemoglobin, and the compound hsemin which crystallizes out is the hydrochloride of hsematin. It forms minute bluish black crystals with a metallic luster. It is insoluble in water, alcohol, or ether, but dissolves in chloroform containing quinine or pyridine. From such a solution it crystallizes out when alcohol con- taining sufficient hydrochloric or acetic acid to neutralize the base (quinine or pyridine) is added. Hsemin contains two carboxyl groups. It combines with two molecules of hydrobromic acid. The iron becomes loosened in this reaction, and some further unknown change takes place. The dibrom compound when hydrolyzed loses its bromine, the latter'being replaced by two hydroxyls. The resulting compound, known as hsematoporphyrin, is a dihydroxy-dibasic acid : • qjj C 3 iH 34 N 4 < COOH X COOH This when heated with methyl alcoholic potassium hydroxide in pyridine solution undergoes reduction and loses two molecules of water: C 3 3H 38 6 N4 + H 2 = C»H, AN« + 2 H 2 The product thus obtained is called haemoporphyrin. It is a dibasic acid. On heating hsemoporphyrin with soda lime (a mixture of CaO and J^a 2 0) the two carboxyl groups The Polymethylene Compounds 221 are destroyed, C0 2 being split off, and a new compound, aetioporphyrin, is formed. The following formulae for the last-named derivatives have been proposed by Willstatter : HC=CH CH3— C— CH .£— C C2H5— C— C/ iN >C— CH >c cr C 2 H 5 — C=C< )C=C— C 2 H B I >NH HN< I CH 3 — C=C< X C=C— CH3 ^CHs , CH 3 jEtioporptyrin, ChIImNi HC=CH CH 3 — C— CH /y C— C II > NT II C 2 H S — C— C/ • >C— CH V cf HOOC— CH 2 — CH 2 — C=C/ \C=C— CH 2 — CH 2 — COOH I NH HN CH3 — C^C C == C — CH3 I I CH3 CH3 Hgemoporphyrin, CuHsaOtNj. ^Etioporphyrin is, according to the researches of Will- statter and his pupils, the mother substance from which both chlorophyll and hsematin are derived. In both therefore the molecules consist of four substituted pyrrol groups. They assume that the iron in hsematin is united with nitrogen. In chlorophyll the condensed pyrrol nucleus possesses 222 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine two carboxyl groups which are united with two alco- hols, methyl alcohol and phytol, a secondary alcohol with the formula C20H39OH, to form an ester. Instead of iron, chlorophyll contains magnesium linked to nitrogen. A number of decomposition products of both hsematin and chlorophyll have been described and carefully studied with a view to elucidating their chemical na- ture, but their description would be beyond the scope of this book. The essential fact to be borne in mind is the close .chemical relationship between these plant and animal pigments. It should be pointed out as an interesting biological fact that carefully conducted feeding experiments with labora- tory animals have shown that neither chlorophyll nor hsematin is an essential constituent of the diet. The ani- mal body is able to construct the red respiratory pig- ment from certain of the amino acids yielded by the proteins of the food. Probably those containing the pyrrol ring are of particular importance for this purpose. The bile acids, bilirubin and biliverdin, are derived from disintegrated red corpuscles and are derivatives of con- densed pyrrol nuclei which have their origin in the hsema- tin complex of the hsemoglobin. 117. Pyrrolidine is of great biological interest since CJj 2 CH 2 its derivatives, proline (a-pyrrolidine J yNH carboxylic acid) and oxyproline CH2 — CH2 (a-oxypyrrolidine carboxylic acid), occur among the amino acids which result from the hy- drolysis of proteins. In addition to the method described for preparing The Polymethylene Compounds 223 pyrrolidine (116), another which confirms its structure is its formation from ethylene cyanide. When treated with sodium and alcohol, the nascent hydrogen formed induces the following series of changes : CH 2 — CN CH 2 — CH 2 — NH 2 | +8H= | CH 2 — CN CH 2 — CH 2 — NH 2 Ethylene cyanide Tetramethylene-diamine CH 2 — CH;k = | >NH+NH 3 CHfc— CH/ Pyrrolidine Pyrrolidine boils at 87°. 118. Proline, a-pyrrolidine carboxylic acid, H 2 C — CH 2 .1 I H 2 C CH— COOH \/ NH is a product of the hydrolysis of many proteins of both animal and plant origin. 1-proline is the form occurring in nature. Its structure is made evident by its synthesis from a-amino /3-oxyvalerianic acid. This on heating loses a molecule of water and forms proline : CH 2 — CH 2 CH 2 — CH 2 CH 2 CH— COOH aa Y CH 2 CH— COOH+H 2 II V OH NH 2 NH Proline is easily soluble in water. It is the only one of the naturally occurring amino acids which is readily soluble in absolute alcohol. The blue copper salt is like- 224 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine wise soluble in alcohol, and this salt is made use of in the purification. Racemic proline, the mixture of equal parts of the two optical forms, forms a copper salt which is violet when dry but absorbs moisture from the air and becomes blue again. Proline forms a salt with picric acid (184) which is useful in its identification. Among the proteins gelatin yields the largest amount of this amino acid. 119. Oxy-Proline, a-oxy-pyrrolidine carboxylic dcid, HO— CH— CH 2 CH 2 CH— COOH NH occurs in gelatin. It decomposes at 270° with foaming. The vapors evolved give the reactions of pyrrol (116). 120. Pyrrolidone Carboxylic Acid. — Of theoretical in- terest is the property of glutamic acid (106) of separating a molecule of water when heated to 185-190° with the formation of a ketone derivative of proline : CH 2 -CH- -COOH CH 2 NHjl -CO [oh CH 2 — CH— COOH -H2Q I ^>NH CH 2 — CO a-pyirolidone carboxylic acid CH2 CH2 + 4H I I ► CH 2 CH— COOH NH CHAPTER XI HYDROXY AND KETONE ACIDS Hydroxy Dibasic Acids 121. Tartronic Acid. — The simplest member of the COOH . . I series of dibasic hydroxy acids is tartronic acid, CHOH COOH This acid does not occur in nature. It is formed from malonic acid by the following reactions : COOH COOH COOH CH 2 i£5£ CHBr +Ag0 ? CHOH + AgBr I I I COOH COOH COOH Tartronic acid melts at 187° with the loss of carbon di0xide: {CO^H _ C o 2 CH 2 OH CHOH COOH COOH The glycolic acid formed at this temperature at once reacts with a second molecule to form an ester called glycolide. Q 225 226 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine CH 2 0]H HOOC CH 2 ^-00C + CO OH H OH 2 C COO— H 2 C Glycolide 122. Malic Acid, hydroxysuccinie acid, is present in COOH various unripe fruits, as apples, pears, etc. It is best prepared from unripe mountain ash berries or from rhubarb stalks. Its structure is indicated by its conversion into chlorsuccinic acid by treatment with phos- phorus pentachloride, and by the fact that the alcohol group in succinic ester reacts with acetyl chloride, forming an acetyl derivative: CHOH I CH 2 COOH COOC 2 H 6 COOC 2 H B CHOH +C10C— CH 3 CHOOC— CH3 I , > I CH 2 CH 2 COOC 2 H 6 COOC 2 H 6 On boiling the juice of rhubarb or of mountain ash berries with milk of lime, calcium malate is precipitated, since it is relatively insoluble. The salt is washed, dried, and weighed, and is then treated with the calculated amount of sulphuric acid. Insoluble calcium sulphate; separates out. The solution containing the malic acid is evaporated to the point of crystallization. Malic acid is readily soluble in water, alcohol, and ether. The calcium salt is precipitated from dilute water solutions by the addition of alcohol. Like normal cal- Hydroxy and Ketone Acids 227 cium butyrate (70) it is more soluble in cold water than in hot and is precipitated from concentrated solutions on boiling. Since malic acid contains an asymmetric carbon atom it exists in two isomeric forms which differ only with respect to their behavior toward polarized light. (See amyl alcohol.) The natural form is 1-malic acid. When malic acid is heated to 180°, it loses a molecule of water and forms maleic and fumaric acids. These possess a double bond, COOH— CH=CH— COOH. They will be treated later (133). 123. Tartaric Acids, dihydroxy succinic acid. COOH I • CHOH I CHOH I COOH There are four acids having this composition. They all react with PCI5 to give dichlor succinic acid, and when reduced by heating with hydriodic acid they yield in turn malic and succinic acids. CHOH— COOH CHOH— COOH I +2H I +H 2 I > I CHOH— COOH CH 2 — COOH CH 2 — COOH + H 2 CH 2 — COOH + 2H > 228 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Their differences are the result of the presence of two asymmetric carbon atoms in their molecules which makes possible enantiomorphous isomerism. (See lactic acids.) With the presence of two asymmetric carbon atoms in a molecule four modifications of the compound must exist, viz. : a right-rotating and a left-rotating form, an inactive form composed like inactive amyl alcohol or inactive lactic acid of equal molecules of the d- and 1- forms, and a fourth modification, mesotartaric acid, likewise inactive, in which the configuration of one asymemtric carbon atom is the mirror image of the other one in the same molecule, i.e. the rotatory power is internally compensated. It is impossible to establish in the case of any two configura- tion formulae, e.g. the lactic acids, which mode of arrange- ment actually represents the d- or the 1- form, but if we make an arbitrary assumption in the case of one configu- ration, as for example that any one grouping represents levorotation, its mirror image must represent the oppo- site or dextrorotation: I I H— C— OH HO— C— H [ I COOH COOH Levorotatory Dextrorotatory arrangement arrrangement When one of these groupings is inverted so as to be united with the other to form one molecule, the entire complex must be levorotatory as I, and its image II will be dextro- rotatory. In III the two halves of the molecule will mutually neutralize the effect of each on the plane of Hydroxy and Ketone Acids 229 polarized light, and an inactive compound results. This form is called mesotartaric acid to differentiate it from the racemic form, which consists of both the d- and 1- acids in equal amounts. Mesotartaric acid cannot be separated into d- and 1-tartaric acids as can the racemic tartaric acid. COOH COOH COOH HO— C— H H— C— OH I COOH i COOH HO{ | H H | JOB. COOH i H— C— OH HO— C— H I . COOH ii COOH H | | OH HOf | H COOH ii HO— C— H I HO— C— H COOH in COOH HO J | H HOf |H COOH in Racemic acid is actually a compound of one molecule of d- and one of 1-tartaric acids and not simply a mixture of the two kinds of molecules. It has a different crys- talline form from the two active acids, and the crystals carry water of crystallization. The racemic acid crys- tals are much less soluble in water than are the active acids, and have a higher melting point. The union is however a feeble one, and in solution it exists as separate molecules of the optically active acids. This is indicated by the fact that the molecular weight as shown by the 230 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine freezing point and boiling point methods corresponds to the formula QHeCV The esters of tartaric acids are volatile, and their vapor densities correspond to the single instead of to double molecules. Crystals of ra- cemic acid have the composition 2 C4H6O6 + 2 H2O. d- and 1-tartaric acids crystallize without water of crys- tallization. Dextro- and levo-tartaric acids melt at 170°. 100 parts of water at 20° C. dissolve 139.44 parts, and at 100° 343.35 parts of either the d- or 1- acids. They are much less soluble in alcohol and insoluble in ether. Tartaric acid when strongly heated with a dehydrating agent such as potassium bisulphate loses water and carbon dioxide and there distills over a ketone acid, pyruvic acid. This acid is likewise known as pyroracemic acid and as methyl glyoxylic acid (67). COO H CH 3 CHOH -C0 2 andH 2 I I — *" CO CHOH I j COOH POOTT Pyxuvio acid ^VJv^xl Methyl glyoxylic acid Pyruvic acid has great biological interest. It will be further considered in connection with carbohydrate metabolism and the synthesis of fats. It is probable that the first step in the decomposition is the loss of carbon dioxide and the formation of glyceric acid which then loses a molecule of water. Glyceric acid itself when heated is converted into pyruvic acid. Hydroxy and Ketone Acids 231 CH 2 OH CH 3 I -H 2 I CHOH —> CO COOH COOH The acid potassium salt of d-tartaric acid crystallizes out of wine as alcohol accumulates during fermentation. The crude salt is known as argol and contains some cal- cium tartrate and coloring matters. The acid potassium salt is dissolved in hot water, leaving the calcium salt behind, and after treatment with animal charcoal to re- move coloring matters the solution is allowed to cool COOK anc ^ cr y s tallize. This salt is then known as cream of tartar. It is very sparingly (CHOH) 2 soluble in water and still less so in alcohol. I It is extensively used in baking powders. CUUxl Here it is mixed with sodium bicarbonate, with which it reacts when dissolved to form sodium potassium tartrate or Rochelle salt: COOK COOK | I (CHOH) 2 + HNaC0 3 = (CHOH) 2 + H 2 + CO2 COOH COONa Rochelle salt The carbon dioxide being generated throughout the dough causes it to rise into a spongy condition. Baking powders are therefore a substitute for yeast. Dipotassium tartrate, QH^ObKj, is readily soluble in water. Acid potassium tartrate dissolves antimony 232 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine oxide, SbO, to form potassium antimonyl tartrate or tartar emetic : COOK I (CHOH) 2 I COOSbO Racemic acid and mesotartaric acid are both formed from d-tartaric acid by boiling with sodium hydroxide. This is explained by the assumption that water is alter- nately separated and added. COOH COOH H- HO- -C -C-i COOH -OH -2 H 2 — C— > I -H — C— COOH COOH ■^ H HO— C— H OH or j or HO H— C— OH H COOH COOH COOH COOH HO— C— H H— C— OH HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H H— C— OH i COOH Mesotartaric acid COOH d-tartaric acid COOH l-tartaric acid Hydroxy and Ketone Acids 233 According to the law of chance, if water is split off from a compound and added on again in the way described, an OH group will take the place of H, just as frequently as it will replace the separated OH. Thus on repeating the separation and addition of water a sufficient number of times a state of equilibrium will be established in which all possible arrangements of H and OH groups will exist in the solution. Such a conception helps to make clear the process of racemization and likewise the transforma- tion of certain sugars into others. SEPARATION OF RACEMIC SUBSTANCES INTO THEIR OPTICALLY ACTIVE CONSTITUENTS Optically active isomers show no differences in their solubility, melting point, boiling point, or amount of water of crystallization. They differ only with respect to their effect in twisting the ray of polarized light. Ordi- nary methods of separating mixtures depend on differ- ences of physical or chemical properties, so that for the separation of optical isomers special procedures had to be devised. Three general methods for accomplishing such separations are known, and all of these were dis- covered by the brilliant French chemist, Pasteur. The first of these depends upon the property possessed by sodium ammonium racemate, when allowed to crys- tallize at temperatures below 28°, of depositing side by side the sodium ammonium salt of dextro- and of levo- tartaric acids. These crystals possess hemihedral faces, and are, like mirror images, not superimposable. They 234 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine can be recognized by their appearance and separated by picking out the two kinds of crystals by hand. On pre- paring the free acids from these two kinds of crystals and dissolving each kind separately they are found to have opposite optical properties. On mixing the two solutions racemic acid is re-formed. The second method depends upon combining the d- and 1- forms of acids with an optically active base. The resulting salt molecules are no longer alike in their con- figuration and therefore show different physical proper- ties. Such salts can be separated by fractional crystal- lization. The natural bases quinine, cinchonine, brucine, and others are optically active and are useful in such separations of racemic mixtures of acids. When the racemic mixture to be separated is a base an optically active acid must be selected (73). The third method devised by Pasteur for obtaining an active compound from a racemic mixture depends upon the fact that but one of the two forms of the enantiomorphous isomers has an appreciable biological value. The proteins of which the animal and plant tissues are made up are composed of optically active amino acids, and only one optical form of each occurs in nature. The sugars are likewise optically . active sub- stances. When a living organism is present in a racemic, mixture of some compound which it is able to use as a source of energy, it can in general use one optical form much better than the other, and not infrequently one, of such isomers is without value as a nutrient. Pasteur found that the mold Penicillium glaucum could make Hydroxy and Ketone Acids 235 use of the ammonium salt of d-tartaric acid but not the 1- form. (See lactic acid.) Obviously this method is available only for obtaining the isomer which does not occur in nature. Trihydroxy Glutaric Acids, COOH— CHaOH— CH 2 OH — CH 2 OH — COOH. — There are four possible isomers having this structure. They result from the oxidation of the sugars and will be treated more in detail later (152). Tetrahydroxy Dibasic Acids, COOH— (CH 2 OH)« COOH, likewise are important oxidation products of the sugars. The most important are saccharic acid, mucic acid, and isosaccharic acids. 124. Oxybutyric Acid and Its Related Compounds. — The condensation of two molecules' of acetaldehyde to form /3-oxybutyric aldehyde or " aldol " has been de- scribed (32). Like other aldehydes this is oxidizable to an acid of the same number of carbon atoms, 0-oxy- butyric acid : CH 3 — CHOH— CH 2 — CHO ±2. CH 3 — CHOH— CH 2 — COOH This acid has one asymmetric carbon atom and so exists in three stereoisomeric forms, dextro, levo, and inactive, of which the levorotatory form is of the greatest physio- logical interest since it occurs in the urine in diabetes, sometimes in surprising quantities, more than a hundred and fifty grams a day having been observed. l-/3-oxybutyric acid closely resembles lactic acid in its behavior. It is an odorless and colorless sirup, non- 236 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine volatile with steam, and can be obtained in the crystal- line form, but the crystals are unstable. It is readily soluble in water, alcohol, ether, and acetic ether, but insoluble in benzene and petroleum ether. Its salts are all soluble in water, and difficultly soluble in alcohol, and are precipitated from alcohol by the addition of ether. The silver salt is of use in its detection. It consists of fine white needles. On heating with water or dilute sulphuric acid /3-oxy- butyric acid is converted into crotonic acid : CH3 CH3 I I CHOH CH I -H 2 0= || CH 2 CH COOH COOH /3-oxybutyric Crotonic acid acid On oxidation with chromic acid it yields the ketone acid, aceto-acetic acid, which readily breaks down into acetone and carbon dioxide. CH3 CH3 CH3 CHOH +o CO _ C o 2 CO CH2 CH2 CH3 I I + COOH COOH C0 2 Aceto-acetic Acetone acid 125. -y-Hydroxy Acids, R— CHOH— CH 2 -CH 2 -COOH, show a peculiar tendency to lose water with the formation Hydroxy and Ketone Acids 237 of internal esters called lactones. This tendency is so pronounced that many acids of this type are not known in the free state, but only as salts, esters, etc. On being set free they at once pass into the cyclic structure. Alkalies convert lactones back into the salts of the 7-hydroxy acids. The same conversion is in part effected by boiling with water. R— CH— CH 2 — CH 2 — COOH I -H 2 OH *R— CH— CH 2 — CH 2 — CO -O- Lactone 126. \-Amino Acids show the same tendency to lose water and form cyclic compounds. These are known as lactams : R— CH— CH 2 — CH 2 — COOH NH 2 — ^2r— CH— CH 2 — CH 2 — CO 1 NH 1 Lactam 127. Aceto-acetic Acid, CH3— CO— CH 2 — COOH, possesses great physiological interest since it occurs in the blood and urine in diabetes, where it results from the oxidation of /3-oxybutyric acid. It is a very unstable, strongly acid sirup which absorbs moisture readily from the air. On warming it decomposes into acetone and carbon dioxide as illustrated above. In the tissues j3- oxybutyric acid results from, the oxidation of fat and in small amount from protein decomposition. This acid is particularly difficult for the diabetic to oxidize, although 238 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine the normal organism is able to accomplish it. ;8-oxy- butyric acid is partly oxidized to aceto-acetic acid in the blood and the decomposition of the latter acid into acetone and carbon dioxide takes place spontaneously, so that in the severe diabetic blood there are always found the three compounds, /3-oxybutyric and aceto-acetic acids and acetone, together. A certain peculiarity in the isomerism displayed by aceto-acetic acid, together with the great importance of its ester in synthesis, make it desirable to describe the behavior of the latter in' some detail. Aceto-acetic Ester is formed by the reaction of ethyl acetate with sodium ethylate. There are three stages to the reaction : the formation of an addition product be- tween ethyl acetate and sodium ethylate : X) /ONa (1) CH 3 — C— O— C 2 H 5 + NaOC 2 H 6 = CH 3 — C^OC 2 H 5 \OC 2 H 5 This then reacts with a second molecule of ethyl acetate to form the sodium compound of aceto-acetic ester : » /ONa H\ (2) CH 3 — C^OC 2 H 6 +H^C— COOC 2 H 6 \OC 2 H 5 H/ ONa = CI?3— C=CH— COOC 2 H 5 + 2 C^OH The ethyl aceto-acetate is formed on treating the sodium compound with an acid. This is known as Claisen's synthesis : Hydroxy and Ketone Acids 239 ONa / (3) CH 3 — C=CH— COOC 2 H 6 + CH 3 — COOH = CH>— CO— CH 2 — COOC 2 H B + CH 3 — COONa The sodium derivative, as will appear later, may have either of the two following structures : ONa Na / / CH3— C=CH— COOCjHs, or CH3— CO— CH— CQOQH5 Aceto-acetic ester undergoes decomposition in two ways according to the conditions to which it is subjected. Dilute alkalies or acids on warming decompose it into a ketone, alcohol, and carbon dioxide. This is known as the ketone decomposition (a). When it is decomposed by a strong solution of alcoholic potassium hydroxide the ester suffers acid decomposition (b). (a) CH 3 — CO— CH 2 — H (b) CH3— co; HO — CH 2 — COO IC00iC 2 H 6 1 _ : I oh =CHa— CO— CH 3 + C0 2 + C 2 H 6 OH H H — C 2 Hk OH = CH 3 — COOH + CH 3 — COOH + C 2 H 6 OH The great importance of aceto-acetic acid in synthesis lies in the fact that the sodium in sodio-aceto-acetic ester can be substituted by various radicals, after which the types of decomposition described above yield ketones or acids. 240 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Thus when sodio-aceto-acetic ester reacts with n-octyl iodide, the octyl group replaces the sodium. On acid decomposition this compound yields capric acid, C10H20O2. CH 3 — CO— CHNa I + ICH 2 — (CH 2 ) 6 — CH 3 COOC2H5 "-"sty 1 iodide = CH3 — CO — CH — CsHn I +NaI COOC 2 H 5 1 l OH! H CH3 — CO — [CH — CgHi7 |c00|c 2 H 5 H;OH 1 = CH 3 — COOH +CH 3 — (CH 2 ) 8 — COOH +C 2 H 6 OH Acetic acid Capric acid Alcohol The same compound when subjected to the ketone decomposition yields methyl-nonyl-ketone : CH 3 — CO— CH— CsHn COOl |C 2 H s H IOH = CH 3 — CO— C 9 H 19 +C0 2 +C 2 H 6 OH Methyl-nonyl-ketone Numerous higher acids and ketones have been readily prepared by this reaction. Hydroxy and Ketone Acids 241 As was stated above, sodio-aceto-acetic ester may have either of two structures : CH 3 — C=CH— COOC 2 H 6 I ONa or CH3— CO— CHNa— COOC 2 H B Eriol form Keto form When an acid chloride reacts with sodio-aceto-acetic ester, it is possible to obtain at will a compound in which the acetyl group is linked directly to carbon or through oxygen to carbon. CH3— C=CH— COOC 2 H 6 CH3— CO— CH— COOCHs I .1 O— COCH3 CO— CH 3 O-derivative C-derivative (Insoluble in alkali) (Soluble in alkali) When the sodio-aceto-acetic ester is treated directly with acetyl chloride, the C-derivative only is formed. This compound is soluble in alkali since the hydrogen in the CH group is linked to three negative radicals, two acetyl and one carbethoxyl groups. (Compare malonic ester.) When, however, the aceto-acetic ester is mixed with pyridine and the acetyl chloride added to the mixture, the O-derivative only is formed. As a general rule the solubility in alkali of such deriva- tives as result from the condensation of halogen com- pounds with metallic compounds of substances which show tautomerism is accepted as evidence of the formation of the C type of derivative, since solubility in alkali should be expected where there is an active hydrogen atom which would permit the formation in alkali of a sodium or potassium derivative. 242 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine The study of a large number of such compounds has revealed some in which the change from the keto into the enol form or vice versa takes place slowly even in solution, and a few where one form is a solid and is stable except in solution. It has been found that the enol form gives an intense color reaction with ferric chloride and that the keto form does not. This serves as an easy test for identifying a tautomer. 128. Mesoxalic acid, COOH . is formed when dibrom malonic ester is boiled CO with barium hydroxide solution, the two bromine atoms being replaced by hydroxyl groups : COOH COOC 2 H 5 COOC 2 H s COOC 2 H 5 I /OH CBr 2 + Ba(OH) 2 = C< = CO + H 2 I x OH COOC 2 H 6 COOC2H5 COOC2H5 We have here another instance of the ability of one car- bon atom to hold two hydroxyl groups when it is in close proximity to strongly negative radicals (compare glyoxylic acid and chloral hydrate). Mesoxalic acid is consider- ably more unstable than malonic acid, for on boiling with water it separates carbon dioxide and forms glyoxylic acid : /OH rn CH(OH) 2 H— C^COOH ~ c 7 I X)H COOH COO Hydroxy and Ketone Acids 243 Mespxalic acid is of biological interest owing to its relation to the formation of alloxan (140). 129. Lewilinic Acid, CIL— CO— CH 2 — CH 2 — COQH, is a 7-ketonic acid of interest because it is formed by the decomposition of sugars by means of strong hydrochloric acid. Its structure is revealed by its formation by the condensation of sodio-aceto-acetic ester with chloracetic acid ester, followed by the ketone decomposition: CHs— CO— CH Na+Cl — CH 2 — COOCEU COOC2H 5 = CH3— CO— CH— CH 2 — COOC 2 H B H COO C 2 Hs OH = CH 3 — CO— CH 2 — CH 2 — COOC 2 H 5 Levulinic ethyl ester Levulinic acid is crystalline. It melts at 33.5° and boils with some decomposition at 250°. It behaves like the typical ketones in yielding an oxime, a cyanbydrin, and a hydrazone (37). Levulinic acid when ingested in amounts above five to six grams is excreted unchanged in the urine. 130. Oxalacetic Acid is obtained through the Claisen synthesis by the condensation of ethyl oxalate with ethyl acetate in the presence of sodium ethylate (127). JO /ONa C2H5OOC— C< +NaOC 2 H 5 = C 2 H 6 OOC-C^OC 2 H 5 x OC 2 H 5 x OC 2 H B Diethyl oxalate Addition product 244 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine ,ONa H C 2 H 6 OOC— C^- OC 2 H 5 +H OC 2 H 6 H \ / C— COOCaHo .ONa =GHiOOC— C ^CH— COOC2H5 A B C 2 H 5 OOC— CO -CH 2 COOC 2 H 6 Like aceto-acetic ester oxalacetic ester can hydrolyze in two ways (127) at the points indicated by A and B. The first is accomplished by treatment with alkalies and yields oxalic and acetic acids; the second is effected by the action of dilute sulphuric acid and leads to the forma- tion of pyruvic ester (67), carbon dioxide and alcohol. 131. Acetone Dicarboxylic Acid, COOH— CH 2 — CO— CH 2 — COOH, results from the nitrile formed by the action of potassium cyanide upon symmetrical dichloracetone : CH 2 C1+KCN CH 2 — CN CH 2 — COOH CO •CO +4H 2 Q C Q +2NH 3 CH 2 C1+KCN CH 2 — CN Acetone die yanide Dichlor acetone CH 2 — COOH Acetone dicarboxylic acid It is also formed by the action of strong dehydrating agents upon citric acid, a fact which gives a clue to the structure of the latter acid. Citric acid is formed from acetone dicarboxylic acid by the addition of hydrocyanic acid and subsequent hydrolysis of the oxynitrile. Hydroxy and Ketone Acids 245 132. Citric Acid. — As stated above, the nitrile of citric acid is formed by the cyanhydrin formation from acetone dicarboxylic acid : CH 2 — COOH CH 2 — COOH ] .OH CO +HCN = C< | X CN CH 2 — COOH CH 2 — COOH Cyanhydrin of oitrio acid CH 2 — COOH +2H 2 o \y X COOH +NH CH 2 — COOH The reverse reaction by which citric acid is converted into acetone dicarboxylic acid by dehydrating agents is as follows : CH 2 - -COOH CH 2 — COOH C<^ H COOH -> CO +CO+H 2 CH 2 — COOH CH 2 — COOH Citric acid occurs in the juice of many plants, espe- cially in lemon juice, from which five per cent or more may be obtained, and in gooseberries, which contain about one per cent. It is also a normal constituent of the milk of 246 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine animals, but it is not certain whether it comes from the food or is the product of the milk glands. It has also been detected in certain grains, and is therefore one of the most widely distributed compounds in nature. It crys- tallizes with one molecule of water in large colorless prisms. When it loses its water of crystallization through heating, it forms a fine white powder. It is formed by the fermentative action of certain bacteria and molds, but the nature of the chemical pro- cess by which it is produced from sugars is not clear, since the sugars all contain the normal carbon chain whereas citric acid contains a branched carbon chain. It has been suggested that citric acid may result in fermentation by the condensation with loss of water from three mole- cules of glycolic acid: HO H 2 C— COOH H HO— C— COOH H HO H 2 C— COOH Three molecules of glycolic acid CH 2 — COOH /OH C ^COOH CH 2 — COOH Citric acid CHAPTER XII UNSATURATED DIBASIC ACIDS Maleic and Fumaric Acids and Their Isomerism 133. There appears to be good evidence that two carbon atoms bound together by a single bond are able to rotate freely about their common axis. Thus only one ethylene chloride, CH2CI— CH 2 C1, is known. If free rotation of the carbon atoms in Figure 20 were not possible we should expect three modifications of this compound to exist : If, however, free rotation of the carbon atoms about their common axis is assumed, the three arrangements of the chlorine atoms represent phases of intramolecular movement and not stable positions of the tetrahedra. It is not necessary to assume a continuous movement 247 248 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine of rotation. In fact we should expect that some one arrangement of the atoms would be more stable than any other, and that if the atoms were arranged in any way whatever they would return to the stable position and any movement within the molecule would constitute an oscillation about the stable position. (82). Such freedom of motion of one carbon atom with re- spect to another is in part lost when the double bond is COOH HOOC Ethylene COOH „ Cis form "■ Fig. 21. — Maleic and Fumarie Acids. , L COOH Trans form established, as was pointed out in discussing the isomerism of the crotonic acids (86). Assuming that in the case of the double bond the tetrahedra which represent the carbon atoms are in the position which is illustrated by their having one edge in contact, ethylene would be represented by Figure 21. In such a molecule we should expect two modifications of ethylene dicarboxylic acid : CH— COOH CH— COOH II or || CH— COOH HOOC— CH The carboxyl groups may be arranged on the same or on opposite sides of the molecule. Since in compounds of Unsaturated Dibasic Acids 249 this type there is no asymmetric carbon atom, optical activity is not to be anticipated. Theory agrees with experience, which shows that fumaric and maleic as well as the crotonic acids (86) do not rotate the plane of polar- ized light. Ethylene dicarboxylic acid results from malic acid (122) by the withdrawal of a molecule of water. Its rela- tion to succinic and tartaric acids is shown by the follow- ing reactions : COOH COOH COOH COOH CHOH tt ^ CH „ CHBr A n „ CHOH j -H 2 || +2 Br | 2AgOH | CH 2 *• CH * CHBr ~ *" CHOH I I I I COOH COOH COOH COOH Malic acid Maleic and Dibrom succinic Tartaric fumaric acids acid acid The decision as to which of the configurations in Figure 21 is to be assigned to maleic and which to fumaric acid is determined by the following data : Both are produced from malic acid by splitting off water, but the conditions under which the reaction is effected determines the nature of the product. When the temperature of malic acid is raised to 140-150°. and maintained there during 40 hours, fumaric acid is the principal product. When, however, the malic acid is contained in a distillation flask connected with a condenser and the temperature is quickly raised to 200°, there distills over the anhydride of maleic acid together with water. Fumaric acid does not melt when heated, but sublimes. 250 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine It is but slightly soluble in water, 1 part dissolving in 148.7 parts at 16.5°. It does not form an anhydride which on taking up water regenerates fumaric acid, but 1 when heated to the point of decomposition forms, along with considerable charring, maleic acid and its anhydride. Maleic acid is soluble in 2 parts of water, at 1.0°. It readily forms an anhydride which takes up water, regen- erating maleic acid. When maleic acid is heated in a sealed tube in aqueous solution to 210° it is converted partially into fumaric acid. Since both acids contain the same percentages of carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen, both absorb the same amount of halogen (2 atoms) and yield halogen-substituted succinic acids and both result from malic acid by the loss of one molecule of water, it is evi- dent that their difference is a stereochemical one. The dibrom succinic acids are not identical. That derived from fumaric acid is called dibrom succinic acid, and is but slightly soluble in water. That derived from maleic is called isodibrom succinic acid, and is much more soluble in water. Since fumaric acid does not form an anhydride, it would appear that of the two possible positions which the COOH groups may occupy in Figure 21, the most probable one is that which separates them most. This separation should interfere with the abstraction of water from the two groups, and therefore to fumaric acid the trans structure has been assigned. Maleic is therefore the cis form. HOOC— C— H H— C— COOH H— C— CO II II II ^=o H— C— COOH H— C— COOH H— C— CO Fumaric acid Maleic acid Maleic anhydride Unsaturated Dibasic Acids 251 Another interesting observation which confirms the belief in the structures assigned to these acids is the fol- lowing : Both fumaric and maleic acids add two atoms of ,COOH „ COOH Maleic acid Fig. 22. COOH Iaodibrom succinic acid Fig. 23. bromine, but as stated above the dibrom addition products are not identical. The mechanism of this addition in the HOOC COOH COOH Brom fumaric acid Fig. 25. case of maleic acid is made clear from an inspection of Figures 22-25. The addition of bromine may take place at A and A' or at B and B'. In either case the same compound would 252 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine result. If now in Figure 24 hydrobromic acid is sepa- rated from the isodibrom succinic acid, and a double bond again established, it must involve the rotation of the carbon atom represented by one tetrahedron through 120° in order to bring H and Br together. This, together with the folding of the two tetrahedra together, brings the two carboxyl groups into the trans position, and there results^ from maleic acid, bromfumaric acid. In a perfectly analogous manner there should result from fumaric acid, by the addition of two bromine atoms, followed by the abstraction of hydrobromic acid, brom maleic acid. Experiment has demonstrated that by this process the cis and trans forms are transformed into the opposite isomer. Fumaric acid occurs in nature in various plants. Maleic acid does not occur in nature. Fumaric acid serves as a source of energy for Penicillium glaucum and Asper- gillus niger, while maleic acid is not utilized by these molds. Here we see another example of the fact which ' has been several times emphasized, that living organisms, being themselves constructed of complexes which exhibit the peculiarities of stereochemical configuration, show a decided preference for one isomer as contrasted with another as a source of nutriment. CHAPTER XIII THE UREIDES Ureides of the Monobasic Acids 134. Acetyl Urea. — Urea, which was treated as the amide of carbamic acid (57) (amino formic acid) may also be regarded as a substituted ammonia in which a hydrogen atom of ammonia is replaced by NH 2 — CO. Urea does in fact form a series of compounds in which it acts as does ammonia ; thus it reacts with acid chlorides forming acetyl, propionyl, etc., ureas : CH3— CO— CI + HHN— CO— NH 2 = CH 3 — CO--NH— CO— NH 2 + HC1 Acetyl urea The same derivatives are formed by the action of urea on acid anhydrides : HN— CO— NH 2 CHg— CO x CH 3 — co/ H + H HN— CO— NH 2 = 2 CH 3 — CO— NH— CO— NH 2 +H 2 These compounds are solids. Acetyl urea forms silky needles melting at 214°. It is easily soluble in water and alcohol. Diacetyl Urea, CH 3 — CO— NH— CO— NH— CO— CH 3 , is formed by the action of carbonyl chloride on acetamide :. 253 254 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine CH,— CO— NHH CH 3 — CO— NHH CI I + CO CI = CH 3 — CO— NH— CO— NH— CO— CH 3 +2 HC1 It is slightly soluble in cold water and in alcohol. M. P. 153°. On heating with acids it is hydrolized to acetic acid, carbon dioxide, and ammonia. CHs— CO— iNH , OHIH Hi CO- O NH HH — CO— CH 3 ' OH = 2 CH 3 — COOH + C02 +2 NH 3 135. Glycoluric Acid or hydantoic acid is formed by the condensation of glycolic acid with urea : CH 2 OH HHN— CO— NH 2 CH 2 — NH— CO— NH 2 I _|_ Urea = I COOH COOH +H 2 Glycolic acid Glycoluric acid This compound can further condense the NH 2 and COOH groups with the separation of water and the formation of a cyclic ureide, hydantoin. CH 2 — NH— CO CH 2 — NH--CO I I > \ I COOH NHH CO NH Hydantoin Nearly all of the amino acids, when introduced into the animal body, are either eliminated unchanged, as is the The Ureides 255 case to a considerable extent with the optical form not found in nature, or are completely burned to carbon dioxide, water, and ammonia. In the case of methyl- amino-acetic acid (sarcosine) (63) a part is combined with urea with the formation of methyl hydantoin, the latter appearing in the urine. The mode of formation is prob- ably as follows : y CH 3 CH 2 — N— CH 3 CH 2 — N<^ | | X H + HO— CO— NH 2 = CO+2H 2 COOH Carbamic acid I Sarcosine CO NH Methyl hydantoin 136. Hydantoin is formed by a method entirely anal- ogous to the formation of urea from ammonium cyanate, by intramolecular rearrangement. Glycocoll (glycin) is capable of forming salts with acids. The glycocoll iso- cyanate, obtained by mixing glycocoll sulphate and potas- sium cyanate, when heated rearranges into hydantoic acid. CH 2 — NH— CO HOOC— CH 2 — NH 2 — HOCN > | | Glycocoll cyanate COOH HNH Hydantoic acid CH 2 — NH -H 2 >■ CO I CO— NH Hydantoin The mother substance from which hydantoin is derived may be regarded as glyoxaline : 256 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine HN— CH I HC N— CH This ring structure is likewise referred to as imidazole. Hydantoin is a white crystalline compound which melts at 216°. The formation of substituted hydantoins re- sults from the employment of amino acids other than gly- cocoll. These derivatives of the amino acids are in some cases compounds with much more favorable properties than the amino acids themselves, and serve a useful pur- pose in chemical work with these substances. 137. Allantoin is a urea derivative of hydantoin. It results from the condensation of two molecules of urea with one of glyoxylic acid. Glyoxylic acid (55), although it has the properties of both an acid and an aldehyde, always contains a molecule of water and appears to act as if it contained two hydroxyl groups linked to one car- bon atom. The formation of allantoin is one of the reactions in which it displays this property. NH H HO — CH- OH H HN NH — CH— NH 1 ' | + ,1 1 1 CO + CO NH 2 OH H CO = CO NH NH 2 ( CO 1 :o— NH Urea Glyoxylic acid Allantoin Allantoin is a constituent of various tissues of animals, occurring in small amounts. It is a constant constitu- ent of the urine of various animals, much more in other The Ureides 257 animals than in man. Allantoin is a crystalline com- pound having neither taste nor odor. Its solutions are neutral to litmus. It dissolves in 160 parts of cold water, but much more readily in hot water or hot alcohol. It melts with decomposition at 231°. It is precipitated by silver in ammoniacal solutions, but the precipitate is soluble in excess of ammonia. Lead, copper, and mercury likewise form insoluble compounds with it. It reduces Fehling's solution and is a disturbing factor in the em- ployment of this reagent as a test for sugars in the urine. On hydrolysis with acids or alkalies allantoin yields ammonia, carbon dioxide (from the urea complexes), and acetic and oxalic acids. Its identification is effected by its isolation as the silver compound, which contains 40.73 % of silver and by a positive qualitative test for oxalic acid after hydrolysis of a sample. 138. Histidine. — The glyoxaline or imidazol ring structure is present in one of the amino acids derived from the hydrolysis of many proteins, viz. histidine: CH— NH V CH— NH V CH— NH V II >H || >H || )CH I I I CH 2 CH 2 CH CHNH 2 CH 2 NH 2 CH Histamine [ /^-imidazole- \ J,^^-.^-w COOH Uhyi »™i COOH Histidine Urocanic acid (a-amino-fl- imidazole- \ //3-imidazole-\ propionic acid / ^acrylic acid/ 258 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Histidine crystallizes in platelets which melt at 253° with decomposition. It dissolves readily in water, very slightly in alcohol, and not at all in ether. Its solution is alkaline to litmus. It forms salts with acids, the mono- and dihydrochlorides being of special importance in its iso- lation. It is precipitated from its solutions alkaline with sodium carbonate by mercuric chloride ; by silver nitrate and ammonia or barium hydroxide ; by mercuric sulphate in sulphuric acid solution ; and by phosphotungstie acid. Only 1-histidine occurs in nature. It has a sweet taste. Putrefactive bacteria cause the elimination of carbon dioxide from it with the formation of histamine, or /3-imidazole-ethylamine. While histidine. itself is one of the essential amino acids which must be present in the food proteins, and can be introduced into the body without disturbance, histamine is a base which possesses most marked physiological action. Its action is pri- marily a stimulant effect on plain muscle. One part in 25 millions of Ringer's solution induces distinct contrac- tions in a non-pregnant uterus. "Larger doses induce tonic contraction. Histamine dihydrochloride, C5H9N3 . 2 HC1, is read- ily soluble in water, but sparingly in ethyl alcohol. -It crystallizes in prisms which melt at 140°. The base forms a double salt with hydrochloro platinic acid which is Soluble in hot water but very slightly soluble in alcohol. On boiling with bromine water histamine gives a claret color. It is precipitated by phosphotungstie acid, by ammoniacal silver solutions, and in alkaline solutions by mercuric chloride. The Ureides 259 Urocanic acid or /8-imidazole acrylic acid has been found in the urine of dogs, where it probably has its origin from histidine. It is not a normal constituent of the urine of the dog, but probably represents an abnormal type of metabolism. Pyrazole, pjt qtt differs from imidazole in that the two II nitrogen atoms in the ring are in position N CH adjacent to each other. It is of impor- \ / tance in medicine because of its derivative, NH phenyl-dimethyl-pyrazolone, called antipy- rine and phenazone. Methyl-phenyl-pyrazolone is formed by the action of phenyl hydrazine on aceto-acetic ester : CH3-CO H 2 N I , +1 H 2 C— CO— OGsHb HN— CbHb CH3— C=N V ! )N— C 6 H 6 + H 2 + C 2 H 8 OH H 2 C— CCK Antipyrine is formed in an analogous manner from methyl-phenyl-hydrazine. Ureides of the Dibasic Acids 139. Oxaluric Acid and Parabanic. — Oxalic acid unites with urea with the separation of one molecule of water according to the following equation: CO |OH + H| HN— CO— NH 2 CO— NH— CO— NH 2 COOH COOH Ozaluiio acid 260 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine This type of compound is known as acid ureide. It is not found practicable to stop the condensa- tion of oxalic acid and urea at this stage. Oxaluric acid may be prepared by the careful hydrolysis of. parabanic acid. A second molecule of water may be separated with the formation of a cyclic compound : CO NH CO— NH -H 2 CO CO CO OH HNH CO— NH Oxaluric acid Parabanic (Acid ureide) acid Parabanic acid is the simplest of the ureides. Oxaluric acid occurs in the urine in traces. It is a white crystalline compound soluble with difficulty in water. On warming with alkalies it is hydrolyzed to oxalic acid and urea. Parabanic acid is likewise crystalline and is much more soluble than oxaluric acid. Parabanic acid is obtained by the oxidation of uric acid. Since its structure was understood from its synthesis from, and hydrolysis to, oxalic acid and urea it served to give a clue to the struc- ture of the more complex uric acid molecule. Ureides are also yielded by malonic, tartronic and mesox- alic acids. They are hydrolyzed to urea and the acids from which they were derived on boiling with acids or alkalies, the urea breaking down into ammonia and carbon dioxide. Their structures are illustrated by the following formulae : The Ureides 261 CO— NH CO— NH CO— NH H 2 C CO I I CO— NH Barbituric acid (Malonyl urea) HCOH CO I I CO— NH Dialuric acid (Tartronyl urea) CO CO I I CO— NH Alloxan (Mesoxalyl urea) Malonyl urea is of special interest because of the nar- cotic effect of certain of its derivatives. The compound itself is without noticeable physiological action. Numer- ous derivatives have been prepared by substituting one or both hydrogen atoms of the malonyl group by alkyl and other groups. The following selected list will illus- trate the remarkable influence which is exerted by cer- tain groups as compared with others on the pharmaco- logical action. Especially marked is the effect of accu- mulating alkyl groups, and the position occupied. CO— NH CO— NH CO— NH C^H^s. 1 1 >C CO h/ i | CH3- CH 3 < i >C CO / \ 1 C 2 H 6V 1 1 >C CO CO— NH Monoetbyl malonyl urea (1) CO— NH Dimethyl malonyl urea (2) CO— NH Diethyl malonyl urea (Veronal) (3) CO— NH co- -N— CH3 CsH7\ 1 1 >C CO C 3 H/ | | CO— -NH Dipropyl malonyl urea w c 2 H 6V 1 ! >C CO C 2 H/ | | CO— NH Diethyl-N-methyl malonyl urea (5) 262 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine When the derivatives (1) and (2) above were given to dogs' weighing 6-8 kilograms, in doses of 3 to 4 grams, there was no noticeable effect. The diethyl derivative (3) in doses of 1-15 gm. induced deep sleep in about thirty min- utes, lasting 24 hours*. Of the dipropyl derivative (4) a 1-gram dose produced sleep after 30 minutes, lasting 48 hours, and 2 grams induced sleep within 1 15 minutes, and death. The toxic influence of introducing into diethyl barbituric acid (3) a methyl group linked to nitrogen as in (5) is very marked. A 1-gram dose induced sleep in 10 minutes which lasted two days and ended in death. Veronal and a few other similar compounds have found use as hypnotics. 140. Alloxan, or mesoxalyl urea, is formed from the oxi- dation of uric acid. On treatment with alkali it is hydro- lyzed to mesoxalic acid and urea. . CO— NH COOH NH 2 II II CO CO + 2 H 2 = CO + CO II II CO— NH COOH NH 2 On boiling alloxan with dilute nitric acid it is oxidized to parabanic acid and carbon dioxide. This is an example of the transformation of a six-membered ring to one con- taining but five (113). The formation of alloxan by the oxidation of uric acid served as further evidence as to the structure of a part of the molecule of that substance. On reduction alloxan yields a derivative, alloxantine, containing two alcohol groups, which has double the molec- The Ureides 263 ular weight of alloxan itself. The structure assigned to it is the fpllowing. NH-CO CO-NH ' I l/ 0H H0 \l I co c z -c co A I II NH— CO CO— NH Alloxantine When alloxantine is treated with ammonia, it forms a salt-like derivative which is a purple-red dye called murexide. Murexide decomposes on hydrolysis into uramil and alloxan. NH— CO XTTT CO— NH NH— CO CO— NH I l/ NH \l III II CO C z ^C CO-* CO CHNH 2 +CO CO I I -II I I II NH— CO CO— NH , NH— CO CO— NH Murexide Uramil Alloxan CHAPTER XIV THE PYRIMIDINES, PYRAZINES AND PURINES 141. The Pyrimidines. In the nuclei of animal and plant cells occur the nucleic acids, complex compounds which on hydrolysis yield phosphoric acid, purines (147), pyrimidines, and a carbohydrate group (163). There have been found in nucleic acids three representatives of the pyrimidines : lNH— 6CO N— C— NH 2 NH— CO II II I I 2CO 5C— CH 3 CO CH CO CH 3NH— 4CH NH— CH NH— CH 2, 6-dioxy-5-methyl 2-oxy-6-amino 2, 6-dioxy pyrrolidine pyrimidine pyrimidine (Thymine) (Cytosine) (Uracil) • In the oxy pyrimidines there appears to be in the dis- , solved state a dynamic equilibrium between the mole- cules in which the oxygen is linked doubly to carbon, the keto form, with the enol form in which oxygen is singly linked to carbon and is in union with hydrogen forming a hydroxyl group : NH— CO N=C— OH I I w I I CO CH < > HO— C CH I II II II NH— CH N— CH 264 The Pyrimidines, Pyrazines and Purines 265 When, e.g., uracil is acted upon by phosphorus oxy- chloride, the oxygen atoms are not replaced by two chlorine atoms, but chlorine replaces hydroxyl, and 2, 6-dichlor pyripridine results. This can be reduced to pyrimidine itself itseir. N _ C __ C1 N=CH , II II CI— C CH + 4H = HC CH II II II II N— CH N— CH 2, 6-dichlor pyrimidine Pyrimidine Thymine and cytosine are obtained from animal nu- cleic acids, and uracil and cytosine from plant nucleic acids. 142. Thymine, CsHeQ^, is difficultly 'soluble in cold, but readily in hot, water, and slightly, soluble in alcohol. It is precipitated by silver nitrate in the presence of a slight excess of ammonium or barium hydroxide, the precipi- tate being soluble in an excess of the alkalies. It is likewise precipitated by mercuric chloride and nitrate in the presence of sodium hydroxide. Phosphotungstic acid does not precipitate it, but it is readily carried down where other substances are precipitated by this reagent. Thymine sinters when heated quickly, at 318°, and melts with the evolution of gas at 321°. 143. Cytosine, C4H5ON3H2O, is soluble in 129 parts of water at 25°. It crystallizes from hot water in prisms which decompose with gas evolution at 320°-325°. The salts formed with sulphuric or hydrochloric acids are readily soluble, those with picric acid and hydrochloro- platinic acid difficultly soluble in water. 266 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Cytosine is precipitated by phosphotungstic acid (147), and by potassium bismuth iodide. It gives the Weidel reaction. On treatment with nitrous acid it is converted into uracil. The mechanism of this transformation is the same as in the conversion of methyl amine into methyl alcohol (46). Here however there exists an equilibrium between the keto form usually written for uracil, and a small amount only of the enol form. The apparent re- placement of the amino group by oxygen instead of by hydroxyl as in the primary amines is easily understood in the light of the behavior of urea and thiourea in the, pseudo or iso form (56, 58) and of aceto acetic acid in the enol and keto forms (127). 144. Uracil, C4H4O2N2, is a white crystalline powder easily soluble in hot, difficultly soluble in cold, water. It dissolves readily in ammonia but scarcely at all in alcohol or ether. It is precipitated by mercuric nitrate, but not by phosphotungstic acid. It is precipitated under the same conditions as thymine by silver nitrate and ammonium or barium hydroxide. Uracil melts with decomposition at 335-338°. It likewise gives the Weidel reaction. Numerous experiments in feeding animals with rations, all the constituents of which were known, have demon- strated that, although the nuclei of all cells yield at least two of the three pyrimidines just described, the diet need not contain any of these complexes. They can be syn- thesized in the animal body from certain of the amino acids yielded by the proteins of the food. The mode of forma- tion of these compounds in the body is not understood. The Pyriniidines, Pyrazines and Purines 267 PYRAZINE DERIVATIVES 145. Pyrazines. The paradiazines are represented by several products of biological interest. Amino aldehydes, on oxidation, can condense to form substituted pyrazines. Thus : /NH 2 CH3— CH CHO I I CHO CH— CH3+O NH./ Alanine aldehyde "vy /\ CH3— C CH ' -3H 2 0+ I || HC C— CH3 \y N Dimethyl pyrazine Amino acids are not attacked by reducing agents, but their esters can be reduced to amino aldehydes by means of sodium amalgam. An instance of the occurrence of such a condensation in the animal body is the elimination in the urine of 2, 5- pyrazine-dicarboxylic acid after injection of d-fructose, a ketone sugar (156), and glycocoll into the veins of a rabbit. The mechanism of the reaction is easily understood. Fructose is known to combine with ammonia to form fruc- tosamine. This compound is an amino aldehyde which condenses to the pyrazine ring; thereafter the sugar complex is oxidized to the last carbon atom, which is converted into a carboxyl group : 268 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine /NH 2 C4H9O4— CH CHO II +0 CHO CH— C 4 HA Fructosamine N /\ = C4H9O4 — C CH I || + 3H 2 HC C = — C4H9O4 \/ N Fructosazine N /\ HOOC — C CH > I || + 6C0 2 +8H 2 HC C— COOH V N 2, 5-pyrazine diearboxylic acid Fructosazine is oxidized outside the body by hydrogen peroxide with the formation of the same 2, 5-pyrazine diearboxylic acid. The latter compound gives in neutral or faintly acid solution with ferrous sulphate a fine vio- let color which is easily seen in dilutions of 1 to 100,000 parts of water. By means of this reaction it has been shown that this pyrazine derivative when introduced into rabbits, even in small amounts, passes into the urine. The Pyrimidines, Pyrazines and Purines 269 The above condensation is of interest because it points to the possibility of the reaction of carbohydrates in the body with certain intermediary decomposition products of the amino acids with the formation of heterocyclic compounds, i.e. cyclic compounds containing more than one kind of element in the ring. 146. Piperazine differs from pyrazine in that the double linkages are eliminated by the addition of hydrogen or substituting groups, i.e. it is a reduced pyrazine. N NH HC CH H2C CH2 HC CH H 2 C CH 2 x/ \/ N . NH Pyrazine Piperazine Piperazine is formed by heating the hydrochloric acid salt of ethylene diamine. ,NH 2 HHK .NH / \ / \ CH2 CH2 H2C CH2 < i = | | + 2 NH 3 CH2 CH2 H2C CH2 ^NH 2 HHN' ^NH' Ethylene diamine Piperazine Esters of the amino acids change on standing, with the separation of alcohol, into their cyclic anhydrides, substi- tuted ketone derivatives of piperazine. The change is accelerated by heating. 270 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine HN H C2H5O —CO CH3— CH HC— CH3 NH CO OC2H5 H Alanine ester NH /\ CH3— CH CO I I CO CH— CH3 \/ NH 2, 5-dimethyl-diketo piperazine These cyclic anhydrides have in many cases much more favorable properties for manipulation, as sparing solu- bility, etc., than have the amino acids themselves. On heating with acids they are hydrolyzed to the free amino acids. NH /\ CO CH 2 COOH NH 2 | | 1 1 +2H 2 CH 2 CO \/ NH Diketo piperazine = CH2 + CH2 1 1 NH 2 COOH GlycocoU GlycocoII THE PURINES 147. The researches of Emil Fischer on uric acid made clear the constitution of the group of compounds known as the purines. The constitution of uric acid was arrived at through the observation that on oxidation it yields The Pyrimidines, Pyrazines and Purines 271 attantoin (137). It contains therefore two urea groups in the molecule. The formation of parabanic acid and alloxan, whose structures are known from their formation from glyoxylic acid and urea, and mesoxalic acid and urea respectively, led to the proposal of the following structural formula: NH— CO I 1 CO C— NH\ I II /CO NH— C— NH X Uric acid The formation of allantoin from uric acid, which takes place on oxidation with potassium permanganate in sodium hydroxide solution, may be regarded as proceeding through the following stages : NH— CO NH— CO I- I II CO C— NH\ -> CO C(OH)— HN V I II >0 | | )CO NH— C— NH X NH— C(OH)— HN/ NH 2 [COO| Na I -CO C— (0;H) -NH\ /CO — NEF NH-C i(OH) Uroxanic acid (stable in alkaline solution) NH 2 on acidifying ^ CQ _ NH ! | )C0+CO2+H 2 NH— CH— NH/ Allantoin 272 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Uric acid was synthesized in 1895 by Emil Fischer by the following series of reactions : NH-CO NH-CO CO CH— NH 2 +HCNO -> CO CH— NH 3 CNO NH-CO NH-CO Uramll Cyanic aoid salt of uramil Urea NH— CO rearrangement | | »■ CO C— NH— CO— NH 2 NH— CO Fseudo uric acid \ -H 2 NH— CO I I CO C— NH\ I II >o NH— C— NH' Uric acid The second product in this series of reactions may be looked upon as a substituted ammonium cyanate. It should be expected therefore to rearrange on heating, into a substituted urea (urea in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by barbituric acid), and this is what happens. On heating this last product with oxalic acid it loses a molecule of water, passing into uric acid. Uric acid is present in the urine of all animals. Among birds and reptiles the greater portion of the total nitrogen excreted is in the form of ammonium urate. Mammals excrete the greater part of their waste nitrogen as urea, only 1 per cent being eliminated as purines and this The Pyrimidines, Pyrazines and Purines 273 mostly as uric acid and allantoin. Among mammals man occupies a peculiar position with respect to the excre- tion of uric acid. Studies of a considerable number of animals of diverse types have shown that the greater part of the purine nitrogen is eliminated in the form of allan- toin. In man there is but a trace of allantoin excreted, practically all of the purine nitrogen ap'pearing in the urine as uric acid. This finds its explanation in the fact that the reaction by which uric acid is transformed into allantoin, oxidation and hydrolysis, is catalyzed by a specific enzyme. This enzyme, which can be recognized in a tissue by its ability, under suitably regulated condi- tions, to destroy uric acid, is present in the tissues of all animals except man. In the absence of this catalytic agent the conversion of uric acid to allantoin goes on with extreme slowness. Uric acid has been synthesized by a considerable number of methods starting from widely different materials. The early synthesis (1888) by Behrend and Roosen, which is par- ticularly instructive, is illustrated by the following reactions : NH— CO NH— CO CO CH + HN0 > 3 CO— C— N0 2 I II I II NH— C— CH, NH— C— COOH 4-methyl uracil 5-nitro uracil 4-carbonic acid Potassium salt NH — CO heated to 130° I I ► CO C— NOa+COa I II NH— CH 5-nitro uracil T 274 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Reduction with NH-CO NH-CO Sn+HCl i I +N 2 3 I I ► CO C— NH 2 > CO C— OH I II I II NH— CH NH— CH 5-amino uracil 5-oxy-uracil NH— CO HN— CO + Br I i +AgOH I *■ CO C— OH 2— ► CO C— OH NH— C— Br NH— C— OH 4-bi NH— CO 4-brom-5-oxy 4, 5-dioxy uracil uracil CO c— OH H I + NH— C OH H NH— CO HN +H 2 S0 4 I I XTtJ . V n > CO C — NH\ ,\sVJ Dehydrating l 1 1 N/T4 „„/ agent | || >CU HN NH— C— NH/ Urea Uric acid Uric acid is ordinarily prepared from urine. It exists in the urine in the form of the sodium and potassium salts, which are fairly soluble. One gram of dipotassium urate dissolves in 44 c.c. of water at room temperature, and 1 gram of disodium urate in 77 c.c. The free uric acid is soluble in about 4000 parts of water at room tem- perature. On adding hydrochloric acid to urine, to a distinctly acid reaction, uric acid crystallizes out usually arranged in sheaves, and greatly pigmented. By dissolv- ing in strong sulphuric acid (35 %) and diluting with water the acid crystallizes out and may thus be purified. Uric acid acts like a dibasic acid, forming two series of salts, acid and neutral urates. The ammonium, calcium, and barium salts are more difficulty soluble than are those The Pyrimidines, Pyrazines and Purines 275 of the alkalies. Phosphotungstic acid precipitates uric acid completely, as does also silver nitrate in ammoniacal solution in the presence of magnesium salts. Cuprous oxide (copper sulphate in the presence of sodium acid sulphite) forms an extremely insoluble compound with uric acid and also with purine bases. The acid char- acter of uric acid is due to the existence in solution of the tautomeric enol form in dynamic equilibrium with the keto form which is illustrated by the usual structural formula. That the reactive form of uric acid is represented by the enol formula is shown by the fact that when phosphorus oxychloride acts on uric acid, OH is replaced by one chlo- rine, whereas if the reaction took place between the chlorinating agent and oxygen doubly linked to carbon, oxygen should be replaced by two chlorine atoms (32). The mother substance of uric acid and of a series of biologically important purine bases is purine : N=CH I I HC C — NIL II II >H N— C N Purine The order of numbering the atoms in the purine nucleus for indicating the position of substituted purines is as fol- lows: N c NH-CO I 6 | 7 II 2C 5C-N V CO C-NH X 3N- 4 i /Cs i ii ;co i C — W NH— C— NH/ 9 2, 6, 8-trioxy purine (uric acid) 276 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Purine is formed from tricolor purine, which results directly from the action of phosphorus oxychloride on uric acid. N = C— OH HO— C C— NH X II II >-OH N— C N^ Uric acid (tautomeric form) N = C— Cl + POCI3 C1C C— NH X +H3PO4 || || ;c— ci N— C— NH/ l+HI N = CH N = CI HC C— NH\ +4H ic C— NH V || || )CH < || || )CH N— C N^ N— C N^ Purine 2, 6-diiodo purine The urea complexes behave in these reactions as if they had the iso structure (57, 58). Purine is a crystalline substance which melts at 211— 212°. It is a basic compound and forms salts with various acids. Hypoxanthine, C5H4N4O. — There are besides uric acid two other oxypurines which are of great biological interest, viz. xanthine and hypoxanthine. Their relation to uric acid is shown by their formulae : The Pyrimidines, Pyrazines and Purines 277 NH— CO NH— CO HC C— NHs. OC C— NHv II ,11 >H | || >H N C N^ NH— C— N<^ 6-oxy purine (Hypoxanthine) 2, 6-dioxy purine (Xanthine) NH— CO I I OC C— NHv 'I II >o NH— C— NH/ 2, 6, 8-trioxy purine (Uric acid) Hypoxanthine is a crystalline compound soluble in 69.5 parts of boiling water and in 1400 parts at 19°. It dis- solves readily in mineral acids and alkalies. It is insoluble in alcohol. The hydrochloride, CsB^O . HC1 + H 2 0, is decomposed on crystallization from water, but can be crystallized from concentrated hydrochloric acid. The sulphate and nitrate are likewise decomposed by water. Hypoxanthine picrate is a characteristic salt. Hypoxanthine is precipitated from its solutions by ammoniacal silver nitrate. Hypoxanthine is found in the muscles and organs of the animal body and is accumulated in beef extract. It is likewise widely distributed in plants. Xanthine, C5H4N4O2, is likewise found in animal tissues and widely distributed in plants. It is very slightly sol- uble in water, about 1 to 14,000 parts at 16°, and in 1400 parts of boiling water. It dissolves more readily in alkalies. Xanthine, like hypoxanthine, forms salts with acids. However, it also forms crystalline compounds with alkalies. 278 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine On evaporation with concentrated nitric acid, there remains a yellow residue, which on treatment with sodium hydroxide becomes reddish yellow and on heating purple- red. This is a modification of Weidel's reaction. AMINO PURINES 148. Adenine, C5H5N5. — There is but one amino purine found in nature, viz. 6-amino purine or adenine. It is a product of the hydrolysis of nucleic acids of both plant and animal origin. It is crystalline and decomposes at 360-365°. It is soluble in 155 parts of water at 18°. It forms salts with mineral acids which in contrast to those of hypoxanthine and xanthine can be crystallized from water. Its oxalate and picrate are characteristic salts. The latter serves to separate adenine from hypoxanthine. Adenine does not give the xanthine or murexide tests. It is best prepared from extracts of tea leaves. Adenine is usually associated with the closely related purine base guanine, or 2-amino-6-oxy purine. N = C— NH 2 - NH— CO II II HC C— NH V H 2 N— C C— NH X II II >CH || || \CH N— C— N-^ N— C— N***^ 6-amino purine 2-amino-6-oxy purine (Adenine) (Guanine) Guanine is found widely distributed in both animal and plant tissues, and is present in nucleic acids. It is the principal constituent of the excrement of spiders, and is occasionally found deposited as crystals in the joints of swine in the so-called " guanine gout." Guanine is The Pyrimidines, Pyrazines and Purines 279 insoluble in water, alcohol, and ether, very slightly soluble in ammonia, but readily soluble in sodium hydroxide. On the addition of copper sulphate and sodium bisulphite to its solutions the cuprous oxide compound of guanine is precipitated quantitatively. With acids it forms salts which crystallize, but these are stable only in the presence of an excess of the acid. In water they are decomposed. The metaphosphate, picrate, and silver nitrate compounds are useful in its isolation and purification. -Adenine and guanine are the only purines which are present in the nucleic acid molecule. In the body they react with water through the catalytic agency of enzymes, which accelerate the change, forming oxypurines, from adenine, hypoxan- thine, and from guanine, xanthine: N = C— NH 2 NH— CO HC C— NH. +H 2 HC C— NH V +NH 3 II II >CH * || || )CH N— C— N-^ N— C— N^ Adenine Hypoxanthine This transformation also occurs through the action of nitrous acid on adenine, the amino group being replaced by hydroxyl, which passes in part into the keto form. Hypoxanthine can take up an atom of oxygen, being con- verted into xanthine ; and xanthine can in like manner be oxidized to uric acid. These deaminations and oxidations represent the course of purine metabolism in the body. Guanine is hydrolyzed to guanidine, etc. The enzymes which effect these changes in measurable time are specific in character. Thus there is an adenase which can deam- 280 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine inize adenine to hypoxanthine, and a guanase which cata- lyzes the transformation of guanine into xanthine as de- scribed above. Not all tissues contain all the enzymes necessary to the transformation of the amino purines into oxypurines. Thus adenase is not found in the tissues of the rat. Guanase is absent from the spleen and liver of the pig and from the human spleen, but is present in most other tissues. The enzyme which accelerates the oxidation of hypoxanthine into xanthine is called hypo- xanthine-oxidase ; that which oxidizes xanthine to uric acid is called xanthine-oxidase. The enzyme which accelerates the oxidation of uric acid to allantoin is called uricase. The ending ase is employed to designate enzymes or organic catalysers. The nucleic acids of both animal and plant origin con- tain but two purines, adenine and guanine. The hypo- xanthine, xanthine, and uric acid found in the tissues are formed by the deamination and oxidation of these. Within recent years feeding experiments with young animals have shown that with diets entirely free from any of the purines, growth and hence the synthesis of nucleic acids can take place at the normal rate. Such animals regularly excrete uric acid. There is no doubt that in such experimental animals adenine and guanine are produced synthetically. The substances from which purines are formed in mammals are not known with cer- tainty, but experiments with birds make it highly prob- able that they are urea, ammonia, and lactic acid. In birds the seat of synthesis of uric acid is the liver. When the liver of a bird is excised the bird has been found to The Pyrimidines, Pyrazines and Purines 281 excrete, during the few hours it can live, ammonia and lactic acid instead of uric acid. THE METHYL PURINES 149. Aside from the purines ingested as adenine and guanine or .their degradation products there occur in plant foods two important methylated purines, theo- bromine and caffeine. Theobromine is 2, G-dioxy-3, 7 -dimethyl purine: NH— CO I I /CH 3 CO C— N< I II >H CH 3 — N C— W Occurs in the cocoa bean, and is found in chocolate to the extent of 1 to 2 per cent. It is a dimethyl xanthinel It is a white crystalline powder, soluble in ether, in- soluble in alcohol and water, but somewhat soluble in hot chloroform. It forms crystalline salts with strong acids, but these are decomposed into the base and acid by water. It sublimes unchanged at 290°. It is a powerful diuretic and nerve stimulant. It has a bitter taste. The hydrochloride and salicylate are also much employed. Caffeine is 2,Q-dioxy-l,3,7-trimethyl purine: CH 3 — N CO I I /CH 3 CO C— N< I II >H CH 3 — N C—W 282 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine It occurs in tea and coffee, guarana, and in kola nuts. Coffee contains about one per cent. It is soluble in 80 parts of water ; 55 parts of alcohol, 7 parts of chloroform, and 555 parts of ether at 15°. Caffeine crystallizes from water in white fleecy masses of silky needles, having a bitter taste. It sublimes at 178°. Caffeine is a diuretic and cerebral stimulant and has a pronounced stimulating action on the heart. In passing through the body caffeine and theobromine are partially demethylated, and they appear in the urine to some extent as monomethyl and dimethyl purines. In part the methyl groups are completely removed, the nucleus being excreted as uric acid. CHAPTER XV THE CARBOHYDRATES 150. There is found in nature a large group of compounds to which the general name carbohydrates is applied. These are either aldehyde alcohols or ketone alcohols, or are converted into aldehyde alcohols or ketone alcohols on hydrolysis. The carbohydrates include the sugars, starches, celluloses, gums, pectins, etc. In many of them the composition corresponds closely to the general formula C„(H20) B , or one molecule of water to each carbon atom. Thus, cane and beet sugar have the formula CbH^Oh which corresponds to C12 11(H 2 0) ; glucose and fructose, CeHjsOe = C 6 6(H 2 0) ; starch, the molecule of which is very large, corresponds to the formula C6 5(H 2 0). It was from this relationship that they received the name carbo- hydrate. There are several representatives of the carbo- hydrates which do not conform to this formula ; and there are on the other hand a number of compounds totally unrelated chemically to the carbohydrates which contain carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen, the two latter elements in the proportion to form water. As examples may be cited formaldehyde, CH 2 0, acetic acid, C 2 H 4 2 , and lactic acid, C 3 H 6 3 . The carbohydrates are of the greatest impor- tance as a source of energy to the animal body, and as a rule among the herbivora and omnivora they constitute 283 284 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine the greater part of the diet. In man there frequently occurs a pathological state (diabetes) in which the body is incapable of oxidizing carbohydrates, the absorbed sugars, wholly or in part, being eliminated unchanged in the urine. The exact nature of this disorder is not under- stood, and it is therefore of the first importance that we should have a full understanding of the chemical nature of the carbohydrates and of the changes which they under- go in the course of normal metabolism. The classification of the carbohydrates is based upon the fact that there are found widely disseminated in nature certain aldoses and ketoses which contain six carbon atoms, called hexoses (glucose, fructose, etc.) and others called polysaccharides (starches, dextrine, cellulose, etc.) which are polymers of the hexoses and yield the latter on hydroly- sis. Widely prevalent also are the pentosans, polysac- charides which on hydrolysis yield aldopentoses, or sugars containing five carbon atoms. The four aldohexoses and five aldopentoses are all aldehydes and in addition contain alcohol groups Between these pentoses and hexoses, which are termed monoses, and their complex polymers, are the disaccharides, trisaccharides, etc., yielding on hydrolysis two, three, etc., molecules of monoses. The term sugar is usually applied only to mono-, di-, and trisaccharides. Before discussing the chemistry of the carbohydrates it is necessary to describe in further detail the behavior of phenylhydrazine with several types of compounds. The reaction of hydrazine, NH 2 — NH 2 , and its derivatives with aldehydes and ketones has already been pointed out The Carbohydrates 285 (32, 37). With compounds of the type of acetaldehyde or acetone, mono derivatives, hydrazines, are formed. With glyoxal, phenylhydrazine reacts to form a dihydrazone, or osazone. CHO H 2 N— NH— C 6 H 5 CH=N— NH— C 6 H 6 I + =1 CHO H 2 N— NH— C 6 H B CH=N— NH— C 6 H 5 Glyoxal Phenylhydrazine Glyoxal osazone The same osazone is obtained by the action of phenyl- hydrazine upon glycolaldehyde, the simplest of the carbohydrates. The reaction with glycolaldehyde takes place in three stages, in one of which a hydrazone is formed, in the second the adjacent carbinol group is converted by the with- drawal of two hydrogen atoms into carbonyl, with the destruction of a molecule of phenylhydrazine. In the third step another molecule of phenylhydrazine is con- densed with the newly formed carbonyl group producing the osazone. CH 2 OH I CHO + 2 H 2 N— NH -NH- — CgHb H NH- — C6H5 H + H 2 N - CHO !" . , NH 3 + CH = N— NH— C 6 H 5 C 6 H 6 NH 2 Aniline CHO*' CH = N— NH— C 6 H B +H 2 N— NH— C 6 H B =| CH = N— NH— C„H 6 CH = N- NH— C 6 H 6 Glyoxal hydrazone 286 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine This conversion of the group I I CHOH C = N - NH - C 6 H B ! into | CO C=N— NH— C 6 H 6 I I is characteristic of the action of phenylhydrazine on the simple carbohydrates, and indicates that a secondary alcohol group is attached to the carbon atom adjacent to the aldehyde group. The observation of the formation of osazones by the sugars made possible the ready separation and purification of sugars. The difficulties attending the crystallization of sugars from their solutions, owing to their great solubility and tendency to form sirups, had previously prevented rapid advance in the study of the chemistry of the carbo- hydrates. The osazones are difficultly soluble in water, crystallize well, and have definite melting points. The latter property makes it easy to identify the individual sugars. The aldohexoses all have the formula C 6 Hi2Q6. They all react with phenylhydrazine in the manner described above, showing that they contain the aldehyde group and a hydroxyl in the alpha position to it. Their aldehyde property is further shown by the fact that they exert a reducing action on certain salts of the heavy metals, as alkaline copper and bismuth solutions and ammoniacal silver solutions. They are reduced by nascent hydro- gen to hexahydric alcohols, and are oxidized to penta- hydroxy acids containing six carbon atoms. The Carbohydrates 287 All the aldohexoses contain a normal carbon chain. This is shown by the fact that on reduction with hydriodic acid they yield a n-secondary hexyl iodide. CH 2 OH (CHOH) 4 +6HI CHO = CH3— CH 2 — CHI— CH 2 — CH 2 — CH3 +6 H 2 +5 1 This iodide can be converted into a secondary alcohol by ordinary methods (13, 22) and has been shown to yield on oxidation ethyl, propyl ketone : CH 3 — CH 2 — CO— CH 2 — CH 2 — CH3 . which is oxidizable to acetic, propionic and butyric acids (38). The presence of five hydroxyl groups is further estab- lished by the fact that the aldohexoses react with acetic anhydride to form penta acetyl derivatives (52). When the latter are purified and a weighed sample saponified with standard alkali, it is found that the acetic acid formed corresponds with the theoretical amount for such com- pounds. Since two hydroxyl groups can remain linked to a single carbon atom only in special cases when the latter is in close proximity to one or more strongly negative radicals (32, 55), none of which exist in the sugar molecule, it is assumed that the carbon atoms other than that contained in the aldehyde group each hold a single hydroxyl, since the hypothesis that certain carbon atoms have linked to them 288 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine more than one hydroxyl is untenable. Each one except the end ones must be linked on two sides to carbon and on one to hydroxyl. The remaining bond must be occu- pied by hydrogen. By such reasoning we arrive at the conclusion that the structure of the aldohexoses is the following : CH 2 OH— CHOH— CHOH— CHOH— CHOH— CHO 151. Methods of Synthesis of the Monoses. — 1. By the carefully regulated oxidation of the polyatomic alco- hols. As an example may serve the oxidation of glycerol. It has previously been described (36) how by cautious oxidation of this triatomic alcohol there results glyceralde- hyde, which in the terminology of the carbohydrates is glycerose. The chief product of this reaction is always the isomer dihydroxy acetone : CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH 2 CHOH +2 ? CO + CHOH + 2H 2 I I I CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CHO Glycerol Dihydroxy acetone Glyceraldehyde Glyceraldehyde can be prepared free from dihydroxy acetone by the oxidation of acrolein (86), the aldehyde group of the latter being protected during the process by first converting it into the acetal (32). As in the case of the fatty acids, oxidation of compounds containing doubly linked carbon leads first to the formation of hydroxy groups at this point. The Carbohydrates 289 CH 2 II CH / OCaHs + HOH HOH +0 CH X OC2H 6 Acrylic aldehyde acetal CH 2 OH I = CHOH I CH(OC 2 H 6 )2 +H 2 > CH 2 OH I CHOH + 2C 2 H B OH CHO Glyceraldehyde Alcohol Glyceraldehyde acetal 2. By hydrolysis of brom aldehydes with barium hydroxide. Mention has aleady been made of the forma- tion of glycol aldehyde from brom acetaldehyde by this, method (35). By this method glyceraldehyde may also be prepared. Starting with acrylic aldehyde, two bromine atoms are added. The dibrom propyl aldehyde reacts with water when heated with barium hydroxide, the bromine atoms being replaced by hydroxyl. CH 2 CH 2 Br HOH CH 2 OH CH +2 Br = CH Br H OH CHOH CHO CHO CHO 3. When formaldehyde is treated with weak alkali (limewater) it condenses to a mixture of compounds of the formula CeHi 2 06. The mixture is sirup-like and sweet. It has received the name formose. In its formation six molecules of formaldehyde condense to form a mixture of aldohexoses : 290 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine CH 2 + HHCO + HHCO + HHCO + HHCO + HHCO Six molecules of formaldehyde = CH 2 OH— CHOH— CHOH— CHOH— CHOH— CHO Aldohexose 4. Dilute alkalies cause two molecules of glyceraldehyde to condense, forming an aldohexose. It is called acrose. Like synthetic compounds in general the hexoses formed by the methods just described are optically inactive, whereas all the sugars found in nature exhibit optical activity. 5. A most important method discovered by Kiliani makes possible the building up of tetroses from trioses, hexoses from pentoses, etc. It consists in the addition of hydrocyanic acid to the aldehyde group of the pentose, forming an oxynitrile, in a manner analogous to the for- mation of lactic acid from acetaldehyde (66). The nitrile radical is hydrolyzed to a carboxyl group. This in solution forms a lactone with the hydroxyl in the 7-position (125), and the lactone can be reduced by means of nascent hydrogen (sodium amalgam) to an aldehyde. I I I. I CHOH CHOH CHOH CHOH CHO +HC ? CH + 2 H 2 Q CHOH + 2 ^ CHOH u±1 COOH CHO CN Kiliaui's reaction 6. Wohl discovered a method which makes possible the reversal of the preceding operation (Kiliani's reaction) and the formation of a sugar molecule having one less The Carbohydrates 291 carbon atom in the molecule than is contained in the sugar employed to begin with. It involves (1) the formation of an aldoxime by the condensation of hydroxylamine with the aldehyde group (32). (2) The oxime is treated with acetic anhydride and sodium acetate which abstracts the elements of a molecule of water from the oxime, form- ing a nitrile (40). Incidentally the acetyl derivatives of the hydroxyl groups are produced. (3) Potassium hydroxide removes the acetyl radicals by hydrolysis, and on subsequent treatment with hydrochloric acid hydro- cyanic acid is split off with the formation of an aldehyde group. The reactions will be made clear by the following scheme : CH 2 OH CH 2 OH NH 2 OH I (CHOH)„ > (CHOH)„ CHOH CHOH CHO • CH=N— OH CH 2 OCOCH3 (CH 3 CO) 2 I -> (CHOCOCH 3 ) B -H 2 CHOCOCH3 I CN CH 2 OH Hydrolysis with HC1 > ^ -HCN; -CH 3 — COOH | CHO WoH's reaction 292 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine 7. It has also been found that when a simple sugar, as an aldohexose, is oxidized carefully, the first product of the reaction is an acid having the same number of carbon atoms. On further oxidation of the calcium salt of this with hydrogen peroxide in the presence of a little ferric acetate which acts as a catalytic agent, carbon dioxide is separated and the alcohol group which in the sugar occu- pied the a-position to the aldehyde group is oxidized to aldehyde. There results the aldo sugar having one less carbon atom than that employed in the oxidation. CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH (CHOH) 3 (CHOH) 3 (CHOH)s CHOH CHOf CHO COOH H CHO Aldopentoae Aldohexose Hexonic acid The pentoses are readily distinguishable from the hexoses by their tendency to lose three molecules of water and pass into furfural, a cyclic aldehyde containing four carbon atoms and one oxygen atom in its ring. CH 2 OH CHOH I -3H 2 0?H=CH CH=CH CHOH > I >0 + o \) CH=C<^ — >CH=CCT CHOH ^CHO ^COOH Furfural Pyxomuoic acid CHO Pentose The Carbohydrates 293 The structure of furfural is evident from (1) its mode of formation, (2) its conversion into an acid, pyromucic acid, C4H3OCOOH, on oxidation, (3) the formation of furfurane by the loss of carbon dioxide CH=CH\ _co 2 CH=CH\ I /° > I )o CH = C/ CH = CH' COO H Furfurane on heating in a sealed tube to 275°. That furfurane has its oxygen in the ring and not in the form of a carbinol or carbonyl group is shown by the fact that with metallic sodium no hydrogen is evolved, as is the case with the alco- hols (15), and it does not react with hydroxylamine or other reagents with which aldehydes or ketones condense. Fur- fural is an oily liquid with an agreeable odor which boils at 162°. With paper moistened with aniline acetate it gives an intense red color. Those carbohydrates which contain an aldehyde group are called aldoses, and those which contain a ketone group ketoses. The names of the sugars end in ose and those of the alcohols which result from the reduction of the car- bonyl group end in ite. Glycol aldehyde and glycerose, while chemically sugars, do not occur in nature except possibly as unstable, transitory, intermediary products of the oxidation of the carbohydrates. They are not named in accordance with the systematic nomenclature of the sugars. Since every representative of this group of sub- stances contains in addition to the carbonyl group C =0 294 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine (aldehyde or ketone group) at least one carbinol group I HCOH, it must follow that for each of the aldoses, there are two acids which can be derived by oxidation and an alcohol which can be obtained by reduction. The follow- ing resume of the simple aldoses, together with the cor- responding alcohols and acids, will serve to illustrate their relationships : Diose, C2H4O2 CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH COOH CH 2 OH CHO COOH COOH Glycol Glycol aldehyde Glycolic acid Oxalic acid Triose (glycerose), C 3 H 6 03 CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH2OH COOH CHOH CHOH CHOH CHOH CH 2 OH CHO COOH COOH Glycerol Glycerose Glyceric acid- Tartronic acid Tetrose (erythrose), CJIsOi , CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH COOH CHOH CHOH CHOH CHOH 1 CHOH CHOH CHOH CHOH CH 2 OH CHO COOH COOH Erythrite Erythrose Erythronic acid (Trioxybutyric acid) Tartaric acid The Carbohydrates 295 Pentose (xylose, arabinose, etc.) CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH COOH (CHOH) 3 (CHOH)s (CHOH) 3 (CHOH) 3 CH 2 OH CHO COOH COOH Pentite Pentose Pentonic acid Trioxyglutario acid Hexose (glucose, mannose, galactose, etc.) CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH COOH I I I I ■ (CHOH) 4 (CHOH) 4 (CHOH) 4 (CHOH) 4 I I I I CH 2 OH CHO COOH COOH Hexite Hexose Hexonic acid Tetraoxyadipic acid Glycol has no carbon atom possessing asymmetry and therefore shows no optical activity. All the other aldoses possess one or more asymmetric carbon atoms and there- fore exist in two or more isomeric forms. Glycolaldehyde is an unstable substance and has never been isolated from plant or animal tissues. The same is true of glycer- aldehyde. Both of these are known through the syn- thetic products only. A tetrite, inactive erythrite (i-erythrite) is found free in the Alga, Protococcus vulgaris. Tetroses have never been found in nature, but have been prepared syntheti- cally. There are theoretically possible twelve isomeric aldopentoses, viz., an optically inactive, a dextro- and a levorotatory form of each of the four possible aldo- pentoses, whose formulae are illustrated as follows : 296 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH I I - I I HO— C— H H— C— OH H— C— OH HO— C— H II I I HO— C— H H— C— OH HO— C— H H— C— OH I I II HO— C— H H— C— OH H— C-OH HO— C— H II I I ' CHO CHO CHO CHO (1) l-riboae (2) d-ribose (3) 1-xylose (4) d-xylose CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH I I I I HO— C— H H— C— OH HO— C— H H— C— OH I I I I H— C— OH HO— C— H HO— C— H H— C— OH . I I I I H— C— OH HO— C— H H— C— OH HO— C— H I I I I CHO CHO CHO CHO (5) 1-Iyxose (6) d-lyxoae (7) 1-arabinose (8) d-arabinose From these are obtained on reducing the aldehyde groups to primary alcohol radicals, the following alcohols, the pentites. CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH I I I I H— C— OH H— C— OH H— C— OH HO— C— H I I I I H— C— OH HO— C— H HO— C— H H— C— OH I I I I H— C— OH H— C— OH HO— C— H H— C— OH I I I I CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH Adonite Xylite 1-arabite d-arabite (From 1- and d- (From 1- and d- (From I-lyxose (From d-Iyxose ribose) xylose) and 1-arabinose) and d-arabinose) The Carbohydrates 297 Adonite and xylite are optically inactive although each con- tains two asymmetric carbon atoms. The central carbon atom in the pentose loses its asymmetry when the carbonyl group is changed to carbinol, for in the case of adonite the two groups marked off by the dotted lines are alike and there exists accordingly the same type of internal com- pensation with respect to influence on light, as was seen in mesotartaric acid (123). CH 2 OH CH 2 OH I I I H-C-OH R H-C-OH H— C— OH =H— C— OH H— C— OH I I I TH-C-^0H~~ R H-C-OH | I t CH 2 OH CH 2 OH Adonite When the symmetry of the molecule is destroyed by oxidation of one primary alcohol radical, the central car- bon atom again becomes asymmetric and optical activity is restored. A simple test as to whether a compound is inactive because of intramolecular compensation, is to determine whether by rotating the projection formula 180° in the plane of the paper it can be made to coincide with the projection formula of its mirror image. When- ever the two formulae can be made to coincide, the mole- cules which they represent are identical and therefore can- not be optically different. 1-arabinose and 1-xylose and possibly d-ribose occur in nature, while lyxose does not. 152. Determination of Structure. — We may now in- 298 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine quire in what way it is possible to decide which of the sev- eral formulae (1-8) of the aldoperitoses is to be assigned to each of the naturally occurring sugars. If the pro- jection formula for each one of the four pentoses having different configuration can be determined, the other four, being their mirror images, can at once be properly named. If the four forms in question (page 296) be oxidized at both the aldehyde group and at the primary alcohol group there will result for each pentose form a trihydroxy glutaric acid of similar configuration. CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH . CH 2 OH HO— C— H HO— C— H H— C— OH H— C— OH HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H H— C— OH H— C— OH HO— C— H CHO CHO CHO CHO I I COOH COOH H— C— OH H— C— OH COOH COOH HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H H— C— OH H— C— OH HO— C— H COOH (1) Inactive COOH (2) Active COOH (3) Inactive COOH (4) Active Two of these will be active and two inactive because on converting both end carbon atoms into similar groups (car- The Carbohydrates 299 boxyl), the central carbon atom in (1) and (3) loses its asymmetry and the molecule presents internal optical compensation (151). Arabinose and ribose yield the same osazone, so their difference in configuration must lie in the H and OH on the carbon atom next to the aldehyde group, since these only are displaced in osazone formation (p. 285). The pairs of formulae which fulfill this condition are (1) and (2) or (3) and (4) (p. 298). Arabinose and ribose must be represented by one of these pairs. Arabinose on oxidation yields an optically active trihy 7 droxy glutaric acid, while ribose and xylose produce in- active acids. This necessitates assigning the formulae (1) or (3) to ribose and xylose, and arabinose must be either (2) or (4). Lyxose must then be whichever of the formulae (2) or (4) is not assigned to arabinose. But the fact that arabinose and ribose yield the same osazone shows that if arabinose is (2) ribose must be (1), or if arabinose is (4) ribose must be (3). When a pentose is subjected to Kiliani's reaction (p. 290) the resulting hexose will present two different configura- tions, since when the hydroxyl group is formed in the cyan- hydrin formation there is just as great a chance that it will take up its position on one side as another (see lactic acid, 66). When the hexoses derived from arabinose or xylose are oxidized to dibasic acids, both are found to be active, while those derived from lyxose are one active and the other inactive. The formulas for inactive acids must show internal compensation, since each contains two asymmetric carbon atoms. 300 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine CH 2 OH CH 2 OH HO— C— H H— C— OH HO— C— H HO— C— H I I H— C— OH HO— C— H I I ,CHO /CHQ CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH HO— C— H HO— C— H H— C— OH H— C— OH HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H H— C— OH H— C— OH HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H H— C— OH HO— C— H H— C— OH CHO CHO CHO CHO y v v COOH COOH COOH COOH HO— C— H HO— C— H H— C— OH H— C— OH HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H H— C— OH H— C— OH HO— C— H. HO— C— H HO— C— H H— C— OH HO— C— H H— C— OH COOH COOH COOH COOH Active acid (2) Active acid Active acid (4) Inactive acid The Carbohydrates 301 It follows, therefore, that the formula of arabinose must be (2), and ribose which yields the same osazone must be (1), and lyxose, being the only pentose from which hexoses are derived yielding an active and an inactive dicarboxy- lic acid, must be (4). Xylose must then be represented by (3), the only one remaining. THE PENTOSES 153. The structural formulae for the three biologically important pentoses are the following : CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH HO— C— H HO— C— H H— C— OH HO— C— H 1 HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H 1 H— C— OH i H— C— OH | CHO d-ribose CHO 1-arabinose CHO I-xylose d-ribose has been found only in the nucleic acids. Judg- ing from the amount of furfural obtained from various tissues when these are distilled with acids, the human body contains about 10.5 grams of v pentose. 1-arabinose and 1-xylose are apparently not found in nature in the free state, but only in the form of their polysaccharides, araban and xylan (162) in the gums and woody tissues of plants. The pentoses are water-soluble and show the general properties of alcohols and aldehydes. 1-arabinose is obtained from the hydrolysis of gum arabic, peach gum, cherry gum, etc. It crystallizes in prisms and has a sweet 302 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine taste. It is dextrorotatory, its designation 1-arabinose being due to its stereochemical relationship to glucose (155). It melts at 160°. 1-xylose is formed by hydrolysis of xylan, which is found to the extent of 17-25 % in the straw of wheat, rye, and other cereal grains. It crystallizes in doubly refractive prisms which melt at 144-145°. In marked contrast to the more common hexoses, the pentoses are incapable of oxidation in the animal body except to a very slight extent. After the administration of even small doses by mouth they, appear in the urine. In the case of certain individuals, there is excreted regu- larly in the urine, regardless of the character of the diet, a considerable amount of a pentose which has not been iden- tified with certainty, but is probably arabinose or ribose. As much as 36 grams per day has been reported in the urines of such persons. This chronic pentosuria appears to be without ill effects, and is apparently hereditary. Temporary pentosuria frequently follows the ingestion of fruits and berries, many of which contain pentoses or soluble pentosans. Reactions of Pentoses. — The reaction for the estima- tion of the pentoses or their polysaccharides depends upon the ready formation of furfural on treatment with mineral acids. The furfural produced is distilled off with steam and is precipitated with phloroglucinol (194). The latter is a cyclic trialcohol compound with which furfural forms a very insoluble compound on condensation. From the weight of furfural phloroglucide the pentose content of the sample is estimated. Barbituric acid (139) by virtue of its The Carbohydrates 303 > hydroxyl group likewise condenses with furfural to form a very insoluble product, which has been made the basis of a quantitative estimation of the pentoses. With certain other cyclic polyalcohols the pentoses in acid solution give characteristic color reactions. Most important is the colored derivative with orcin (196). 154. Methyl Pentoses. — There is found in nature a class of compounds called glucosides (161) which contain a hexose, a disaccharide, or a methyl pentose in union with some other substance. .The second substances vary greatly in their chemical character, but in most instances they are alcohols. They are found in seeds, roots, leaves and bark of plants, and are broken up by acids or by spe- cific enzymes, but not by alkalies, into their constituents. Among these glucosides quercitrin, xanthorhamnin and certain of the saponins (161) yield the methyl pentose rhamnose. This sugar is still occasionally referred to as isodulcite, a name which it once held owing to the mis- taken belief that it was a hexahydric alcohol. Its for- mula is CHs— CHOH— CHOH— CHOH— CHOH— CHO Rhamnose is crystalline, the crystals containing one molecule of water. It melts at 93°. Other methyl pentoses found in nature are fucose in the form of the polysaccharide fucosan in certain seaweeds, and chinovose in the form of the glucoside chinovin found especially in cinchona bark. 155. The Hexoses. — There are sixteen possible stereo- chemical isomers of the sugars having the formula 304 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine CH 2 OH— (CHOH) 4 — CHO. These represent eight forms and their mirror images. Of the eight pairs of sugars possible, two pairs are unknown, so that but six need be considered. Their structural formulae are arrived at through their relation to the pentoses and the optical prop- erties of the dibasic acids which they yield on oxidation. When Kiliani's reaction (151) is applied to arabinose, there are obtained on reducing the resulting lactone two aldohexoses which are very common in nature, viz., glucose and mannose. It has been pointed out in describ- ing the synthesis of hexoses from pentoses that the only difference possible must be due to the difference in position of the hydroxyl group on the carbon atom adjoining the aldehyde group. Glucose and mannose must be repre- sented by the following two structures, A and B : — CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH I I ' I HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H I I I HO— C— H <-HO— C— H -> HO— C— H II I H— C— OH H— C— OH H— C— OH H— C— OH CHO HO— C— H I I CHO CHO A Arabinose B When glucose is oxidized, it yields a dibasic acid called saccharic acid (p. 313). One of the hexoses not found in nature, but obtained by Fischer by synthesis, viz. gulose, also yields on oxidation saccharic acid. This being the The Carbohydrates 305 case, the arrangement of the H and OH groups on all the four central carbon atoms must be alike in glucose and gulose, for these carbon atoms and their H and OH groups are not affected in any way by transforming the sugar into saccharic acid. It follows that the difference between glucose and gulose must be explainable as the re- sult of the asymmetry due to the difference in position of the aldehyde and primary alcohol groups with respect to the peculiar arrangement of the rest of the molecule. It also follows that any formula which is the same when the CHO and CH 2 OH groups are transposed cannot represent glucose and gulose, for such a formula could not represent two different sugars. In the following formulae C fulfills the last condition, while D, on transposing the end groups, leads to a different sugar. CH 2 OH CHO CH 2 OH CHO II I I HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H H— C— OH* H— C— OH H— C-OH H— C— OH H— C— OH H— C— OH HO— C— H HO— C— H CHO CH 2 OH CHO CH 2 OH C D Same sugar after transposing Different sugar after transposing terminal groups terminal groups Glucose is therefore represented by the formula D and mannose is C. The formula F must accordingly represent gulose. 306 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine CH^OH CH 2 OH H— C— OH H— C— OH HO— C— H HO— C— H I I H— C— OH H— C— OH I I H— C— OH HO— C— H CHO CHO F G Idose, another sugar not found in nature but ob- tained synthetically, yields the same osazone as gulose, and their difference in structure rests therefore in the positions of the H and OH adjacent to the aldehyde group, since only these two are affected in osazone formation. This is further supported by the fact that xylose when subjected to Kiliani's reaction yields a mixture of gulose and idose. It has been already shown that gulose is represented by F, so idose must have the structure G. d-galactose is a naturally occurring sugar. On reduc- tion it yields an inactive hexahydric alcohol and on oxida- tion an inactive dibasic acid. When converted by Kiliani's reaction into two heptonic acids and on further oxidation of the latter into pentahydroxy pimelic acids, both prod- ucts are optically active. From considerations anal- ogous to those described in arriving at the structures of other hexoses, the formula ascribed to galactose is the following : The Carbohydrates 307 CH 2 OH HO— C— H H— C— OH I H— C— OH I HO— C— H I CHO 156. The Ketoses. — There are found in nature but two representatives of the ketohexoses, viz. fructose and sorbose. The latter is very rare, but the former is one of the very widespread and important sugars. d-fructose is found together with glucose in sweet fruits and is chemically combined with it in cane sugar, with glucose and galactose in raffinose, a trisaccharide found in cotton seed, with mannose as mannotetrose found in manna, and with galactose in lupeose, a tetrose found in the seeds of the lupine. There is a starch-like polysac- charide, inulin, in the tubers of the dahlia, which yields fructose on hydrolysis. d-fructose is found in nature. It is levorotatory, not- withstanding its designation as d-fructose. Fischer de- signated as the d-, 1-, or i- form all monoses which are derived from a d-, 1-, or i-hexose respectively, d-fructose can be derived from d-glucose, hence its name. The letter denoting the form of a monose signifies to what optical form of hexose the monose is related, and not the direction of its rotation of the plane of polarized light. 308 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine It is distinctly sweeter than any other sugar, and is more unstable than the aldohexoses. The constitution as- signed to it is : CH 2 OH I HO— C— H I HO— C— H I H— C— OH I c=o I CH 2 OH On oxidation it yields formic, glycolic, tartaric, and tri- hydroxy glutaric acids. CH 2 OH COOH I I HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H + 4 ? HO— C— H H— C— OH H— C— OH I I C=0 COOH CH 2 OH HCOOH Trihydroxy glutaric and formic acids Since the cleavage may take place on one side of the carbonyl group as well as on the other, this group of oxi- dation products shows that the carbonyl group is but one removed from the terminal carbon atom. The Carbohydrates 309 CH 2 OH COOH HO— C— H +2 HO— C— H HO— C— H > HO— C--H 1 H— C— OH 1 COOH c=o 1 COOH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH Glycolic and tartaric acids Whereas the aldopentoses and aldohexoses yield normal carbon chain derivatives when subjected to the cyanhy- drin synthesis (page 287), fructose yields an acid with the following structure : CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H H— C— OH H— C— OH H— C— OH C=0 ±?cn A/? H ±!*2 C Z2E ( I | X CN ■ | CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH Fructose Cyanhydrin Heptonio acid This harmonizes with the assumption that the structure assigned to fructose is correct, for the ketone structure of fructose must necessarily lead to the formation of a branched carbon chain. 310 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine This heptonic acid when reduced by heating with hydri- odic acid (149) is changed into methyls-butyl acetic acid CH3 CH2 CH2 CIl2\ >CH— COOH CH/ which has been synthesized by the Claisen reaction (127). The same osazone is obtained from d-fructose as from d-glucose. It is therefore evident that the configuration of the molecules of these hexoses differ only in the ketone group and its adjacent terminal carbon atom. The identity of the osazones serves to confirm the idea that in glucose the a-earbon atom and in fructose the terminal carbon atom react with a second molecule of phenyl- hydrazine after hydrazone formation has taken place. In other words, it is definite evidence that in the osazones the two phenylhydrazine groups are united to adjacent carbon atoms. The osazone from these two sugars, which may properly be called glucosazone or fructosazone, has the fol- lowing constitution : CH 2 OH (CHOH), C =N— NH— C 6 H B I CH=N— NH— C 6 H B Glucose may be converted into fructose by warming the osazone with hydrochloric acid. The two phenylhydra- zine groups are separated by hydrolysis and there results The Carbohydrates 311 an osone, a compound containing an aldehyde and a ketone group : CH 2 OH CH 2 OH I I (CHOH) 3 (CHOH) 3 C=N— NHC 6 H 6 HOH C=0 H 2 N— NH— C 6 H 5 + -> | + CH=N— NHC 6 H B HOH CHO H 2 N— NH— C 6 H 6 Osazone Osone Phenylhydrazine On careful reduction the aldehyde group is reduced to a primary alcohol and fructose is formed. This reaction is general for the conversion of aldoses into ketoses. In harmony with what has been said regarding which two carbon atoms react in the formation of the osazones, it is found that while d-glucose and d-mannose yield different hydrazones they yield the same osazone. It has been shown already that the molecules of these sugars differ only in the positions occupied by the H and OH linked to the o-carbon atom (152). Heptoses, octoses, and nonoses, aldoses containing seven, eight, and nine carbon atoms, have been prepared by Fischer from the hexoses by the cyanhydrin synthesis. These compounds are not found in nature.) It is of biological interest that they are not fermentable by yeast. 157. Special Properties of the Hexoses. — Among the many possible aldo- and keto-hexoses, there are only four which are of great importance as natural products : 312 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H I I I I HO— C— H HO— C— H HO— C— H H— C— OH I I I I H— C— OH H— C— OH H— C— OH H— C— OH I I I I H-C-OH HO-C-H C=0 HO— C— H CHO CHO CH 2 OH CHO d-mannoae d-glucose d-fructose d-galactose Mannose is seldom found in nature as such and only in small amounts. It forms in plants a cellulose-like sub- stance, mannocellulose (mannan), in the cell walls, and in this form occurs in large quantities, an especially good source being the ivory nut. Mannose is obtained as a hard, solid amorphous mass which is deliquescent and dissolves easily in water, slightly in alcohol and is insoluble in ether. It is identified as the phenylhydrazone which melts at 195-200°. On reduction with nascent hydrogen mannose is con- verted into the hexahydric alcohol, mannite. The latter is found in considerable amounts in manna, that from the ash containing 30-60 %. Mannose is easily fermentable by yeast. It is crystalline and melts at 132°. d-glucose (dextrose, grape sugar) is found widely dis- tributed with fructose in ripe fruits and other parts of plants, including the nectar of flowers. It is formed from the hydrolysis of cane sugar, malt sugar, and milk sugar, starch, etc. It is the sugar which is a normal con- stituent of the blood and lymph, being present to 1 part The Carbohydrates 313 in 1000. In diabetes, a disease of the pancreas, it occurs in the urine sometimes in large amounts. On reduction of glucose the hexahydric alcohol d-sorbite is formed, and on oxidation gluconic acid, analogous to mannonic acid, and on further oxidation the dibasic saccharic acid, analogous to manno-saccharic acid. d-glucose crystallizes from alcohol in water-free form, and from water as a hydrate, C 6 Hi 2 06 + H 2 0. Water- free glucose melts at 146° and at 170° loses water from its H and OH groups, several molecules of glucose condensing to a polysaccharide glucosan. By treating glucose with dehydrating agents, such as strong acids, several molecules are condensed to form polysaccharides, complexes having a high molecular weight. On oxidation of d-glucose the aldehyde group is first attacked and is converted into gluconic acid, and on further oxidation the primary alcohol group is converted succes- sively into an aldehyde and then into a carboxyl group : CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CHO COOH (CHOH) 4 -+Q (CHOH) 4 .+2. (CHOH) 4 +0 (CHOH) 4 I I I I CHO COOH COOH COOH d-glucose d-gluconic acid d-glycuronic acid Saccharic acid Although this is the course of the oxidation of glucose in the laboratory, and although animals regularly oxidize large amounts of glucose, these acids do not represent the course of the first steps in the destruction of sugar by the living organism. Instead the glucose molecule is disso- ciated into simpler compounds containing but three and 314 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine two carbon atoms, and it is these which are oxidized. The first step in the biological degradation of the sugars is therefore not oxidative but hydrolytic (164). d-glucose is the most easily utilized of the hexbses. In healthy persons the capacity to utilize this sugar is as great as the capacity of the digestive tract to absorb it. Healthy young men have been known to absorb more than a pound of glucose within twenty-four hours without the appearance of sugar in the urine. It is likewise easily fermented by yeasts, in which process it is converted into - alcohol and carbon dioxide (see fermentation). ACTION OF ALKALIES. ON GLUCOSE When allowed to stand for several months with dilute alkali glucose is converted to the extent of 50-60% into inactive lactic acid, .5-2 % into formic acid, and 30-50% into several hydroxy acids. Among other cleavage prod- ucts formed by alkalies is methyl glyoxal, the aldehyde of pyruvic acid. A reaction of biological interest is the formation of methyl imidazole by the action of ammonia - and zinc hydroxide on glucose. This illustrates in a suggestive way the possibility of the formation of certain cyclic compounds within the animal body through the participa- tion of carbohydrate. It will be recalled that one of the amino acids, histidine (138), derived from proteins, contains the imidazole ring. The formation of methyl imidazole from glucose and ammonia is best explained as the result of the interaction of ammonia with the dissociation pro- ducts of glucose, methyl glyoxal, and formaldehyde : The Carbohydrates 315 CH3— CO H.NH^ C /H Methj'l glyoxal Ammonia Formaldehyde CH 3 — C— NH > CH— N^ Methyl imidazole CH+3H 2 In solution in water containing the slightest trace of alkali (OH ions), glucose is in part transformed into d- fructose arid d-mannose. The explanation of this change, first studied by de Bruyn and van Eckenstein is as follows : The aldose d-glucose, in water solution passes to some extent into the forms illustrated by the following structural formulae : CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH (CHOH) 3 CHOH CHO d-glucose (CHOH) 3 (CHOH) 3 CH? and /CH 1 >o 0■ or CHOH 1 (CHOH) 1 CO CHO d-glucose or d-mannose CH 2 OH d-fructose 316 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine The change is believed to take place through the lability of one hydrogen atom marked X in the intermediate forms whereby it can wander from one to the other of the two neighboring carbon atoms. By the shifting of a hydrogen from the end carbon atom to the second an aldose would be regenerated, but by the law of chance the hydroxyl group would take its place on one side of the chain as frequently as the other, and d-glucose would be regenerated or d-man- nose would be formed accordingly. By a shifting of the hydrogen atom from the second to the end carbon atom a ketone sugar d-fructose would result. When therefore any one of the three sugars d-glucose, d-mannose, or d- fructose is in solution in the presence of a low concentra- tion of hydroxyl ions, it will pass in part into the other two, until a certain proportion exists among the three kinds of molecules, i.e. each form is in dynamic equilib- rium with the other two. If by some means the glucose is removed from the system, more will be formed. This observation is of the greatest importance in that it enables us to understand how an animal may absorb from the digestive tract mannose or fructose and yet these never be present in the blood. They are always trans- formed into d-glucose if the absorption is not too rapid, in which case the fructose and mannose are said to exceed the assimilation limit since they escape into the urine. d-glucose yields a phenylhydrazone which melts at 144-146°, and an osazone which melts at 206°. On reduc- tion it yields the hexahydroxy alcohol d-sorbite. d-fructose is actually levorotatory, but is called the dextro form because of its structural relationship to d- The Carbohydrates 317 glucose. Although d-fructose yields the same osazone as do d-glucose and d-mannose, it is easily distinguishable from these by its peculiar behavior with methyl phenyl- hydrazine : C 6 H B — N— NH 2 / CH3 With this methyl-substituted phenylhydrazine d-fruc- tose and other ketoses yield osazones. The aldoses, on the other hand, do not react with this reagent beyond the hydrazone stage under ordinary conditions. The methyl phenylosazone of fructose melts at 158-160°. The capacity of the animal organism to utilize fructose is much less than for d-glucose. d-fructose is easily fer- mentable by yeast. An extremely interesting observation is the formation of d-fructose from d-mannite by a kind of fermentation induced by Bacterium xylinum Brown, through which the alcohol is oxidized to a ketone. d-galactose is present in milk sugar in union with d-glucose. It also occurs in certain polysaccharides, as agar-agar, and in certain glucosides. It exists in the brain in considerable amount in union with a fatty acid and a base of unknown chemical nature. The hexose itself has never been found in the free state in either plants or animals. Galactose is easily distinguishable from the other hexoses by the insolubility in dilute nitric acid of the dicarboxy acid, mucic acid, which results on oxidation of the sugar with nitric acid. Mucic acid is so insoluble and is formed so nearly quantitatively that its formation 318 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine serves as the best available method of estimating galactose or galactose-yielding polysaccharides. d-galactose is much less readily utilized in the animal body than is either glucose or fructose, and on the inges- tion of even moderate amounts is eliminated in part unchanged in the urine. 158. The Disaccharides. — There are three sugars of great biological interest which yield on hydrolysis two molecules of hexose. The molecular weights of all of them correspond to the formula C12H22O11. They are sucrose, or cane sugar, which yields on hydrolysis one mole- cule of d-glucose and one of d-fructose; maltose, or malt sugar, which yields two molecules of d-glucose; and lactose, or milk sugar, which yields one molecule of d-galactose and one of d-glucose. Sucrose, Ci2H 22 0n, occurs in the juices of many plants, especially sugar cane and sugar beet. As much as 16-20 % of the dry substance of the plant is sucrose. It crystallizes readily. The sugar is extracted from the finely rasped beets with warm water and the solution treated with lime, which causes the neutralization of acids in the juice, and is then boiled to coagulate the proteins. The solution is then treated with carbon dioxide to precipitate most of the calcium, and after this with sulphur dioxide whose reducing action discharges the color. It is again boiled and filtered, and the filtrate evaporated under diminished pressure to crystallization. The mother liquor from the crystals is molasses. The molasses yields another portion of sucrose on treatment with lime or strontium hydroxide, an insol- uble calcium or strontium saccharate being formed. The The Carbohydrates Sl9 latter is decomposed by carbon dioxide and the liquid, freed from solid calcium or strontium carbonate, yields a crop of crystals of sugar. The molasses, which contains much glucose, is in great part fermented for the preparation of rum or alcohol for industrial purposes. Sucrose forms large monoclinic crystals which are easily soluble in water and melt at 160°, then solidify to a glassy mass and on further heating become brown with the formation of caramel. The specific rotation of cane sugar is, for a solution of about 25 % strength : [a] D =+66.5° The rotatory power is made use of in the estimation of sucrose. On boiling with dilute acids, it is converted into d-glucose and d-fructose. The 'resulting solution rotates the plane of polarized light to the left, since the levorotatory power of fructose is [a] B = — 93° while for d-glucose or dextrose [a] D =. +52.7°. Since the direc- tion of rotation changes when cane sugar is hydrolyzed, the process is called inversion, and the product invert sugar. The same conversion of sucrose into glucose and fructose is brought about by an enzyme invertase, which is present in yeast and in the mucous membrane of the small intes- tine. The rate of inversion of cane sugar by acids has been very carefully studied, and it has been found that it is proportional to the concentration of the hydrogen ions present. The hydrogen ion is therefore the catalytic agent for this hydrolytic reaction. Sucrose does not reduce the oxides of the heavy metals 320 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine (e.g. Fehling's solution) as do glucose, fructose, mannose, and the other aldoses and ketoses, nor does it form com- pounds with hydrazines. It does not therefore contain a carbonyl (aldehyde or ketone) group, but on hydrolysis to glucose and fructose an aldehyde and a ketone group are formed. It contains, however, eight hydroxyl groups, since it yields an octa-acetyl derivative. Sucrose is regarded as a glucoside of d-f ructose (161) . It cannot be utilized directly by an animal, being excreted in the urine when introduced directly into the blood. In the digestive tract it is hydrolyzed into glucose and fruc- tose before absorption. Maltose, C12H22O11 + H 2 0, is found in small amounts in many plants. It is the end product of the action on starch of the enzyme amylase of the saliva of the omniv- orous animals, including man. It has been found in human urine in disease of the pancreas, but in the normal organ- ism maltose is readily utilized either when introduced into the alimentary tract or directly into the blood. The blood contains an enzyme maltose which converts maltose into two molecules of d-glucose. This change is likewise effected by heating with dilute acids. There is no cor- responding enzyme in the blood or tissues for the hydroly- sis of sucrose or lactose. Maltose reduces solutions of the oxides of the heavy metals, which indicates that it contains a carbonyl group. Maltosazone melts at 205°. Isomaltose is a disaccharide which is formed by the dehydrating action of strong hydrochloric acid on a con- centrated solution of glucose. Its osazone melts at 200° The Carbohydrates 321 and is more soluble in water than is maltosazone. Its stereochemical configuration is sufficiently different from maltose to make it non-fermentable with yeast. The enzymes of yeast do not hydrolyze it to hexoses, but the enzyme emulsin found in the almond converts it into two molecules of glucose. Lactose or Milk Sugar, C12H22O11 + H 2 0, is found nowhere but in the milk of animals. It contains a carbonyl group, since it reduces certain oxides of the heavy metals. Its osazone melts at 200°. In the animal organism lactose behaves as does cane sugar. When taken into the alimentary tract, it is hydro- lyzed by the enzyme lactase into d-glucose and d-galactose before being absorbed ; and if introduced directly into the blood, is principally excreted unchanged in the urine. The lactose of the milk is derived from d-glucose and not from the food. Melibiose is isomeric with lactose and yields the same hexoses on hydrolysis. It results together with d-fructose from the action of dilute acids or of invertase upon the trisaccharide raffinose. Like lactose, it is a reducing sugar. It resembles lactose in being hydrolyzed by emulsin, but differs from it in not being cleaved by lactase. 159. The Stereochemical Configuration of the Sugars Determines their Biological Value. — Of the sixteen isomers of the aldohexoses only three are readily utilized by the higher animals, and of these three, d-glucose, d-fructose, and d-mannose, only the former has a high assimilation limit. Galactose is utilized with more difficulty than the three first named. 322 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine A similar relationship holds in the case of the disaccha- rides. Before these can be utilized biologically they must be converted into the C 6 sugars, and there is a marked difference in the extent to which various organisms are prepared with the specific enzymes necessary for their cleavage. Thus the invertase of yeast, but not the malt- ase and lactase, act on cane sugar. Invertase and lac- tase do not cleave maltose. Emulsin does not hydrolyze any of these disaccharides. Certain of the molds are provided with all of these enzymes. The limitations of the digestive tract are similar to those of yeasts. The mucous membrane of the intestine in all animals contains invertase and maltase and usually lactase. The blood contains maltase, but no invertase or lactase. Yeasts show among the races great variation in their capacity to effect the hydrolysis of the disaccharides. Thus, the yeast which induces alcoholic fermentation of milk, forming hephir, contains lactase, while beer yeast does not. The latter, however, can cleave cane sugar and ferment the resulting sugars. Many yeasts 'contain both invertase and maltase, and can ferment both these sugars, but Saccharomyces Marxianus contains only invertase and can ferment therefore sucrose, but not maltose. Saccharomyces octosporus, on the other hand, can ferment maltose but not sucrose, and Saccharomyces apiculatus, which is capable of fermenting d-glucose, d-mannose, and d-fructose, contains no enzyme for the hydrolysis of any of the disaccharides, and cannot ferment the latter. The Carbohydrates 323 160. Raffinose, C18H32O16 — 5H 2 0, is a trisaccharide found in small amount in the sugar beet and therefore in considerable amount in molasses. It is especially plenti- ful in the cotton seed (10 %) and is a constituent of Eucalyptus manna. On hydrolysis with dilute acids it is first converted into fructose and melibiose, and the latter into d-glucose and d-galactose. Top yeast effects the cleavage of raffinose into d-fructose and melibiose, and bottom yeasts ferment it completely. Emulsin converts raffinose into galactose and cane sugar. THE GLUCOSIDES 161. In a manner analogous with the reaction of the aldehydes with alcohols to form acetals (32), the aldoses can react with alcohols to form the glucosides. Many such compounds occur in nature in plants, these usually contain- ing an aromatic alcohol, aldehyde, or acid, but also other classes of compounds. The carbohydrate group is in most cases glucose, but glucosides are also known which yield galactose, rhamnose, and disaccharides. The leaves of Indigofera tinctoria and of Isatis tinctoria contain a glucoside indican, from which the dye indigo results by a process of fermentation. The madder root contains among other glucosides ruberythric acid, which yields the red dye alizerin. The leaves of Digitalis purpurea yield the glu- coside digitalin, which exerts a peculiar action on cardiac muscle. Willow bark contains salicin, from which salicylic acid (209) is derived. The roots of fruit trees, as apple, peach, etc., yield the glucoside phlorizin, which is much em- ployed in inducing an experimental glycosuria in animals 324 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine for biochemical studies. The roots of Spiraea contain gaultherin, mustard seeds yield myrosin, etc. One of the best known of the glucosides is amygdalin, from the bitter almond. Solutions of amygdalin do not reduce solutions of the heavy metals, a fact which is taken to indicate that there is no free aldehyde group. After hydrolysis with dilute acids the presence of glucose can be detected by the reduction of Fehling's solution, and by the formation of an insoluble osazone (p. 286) which melts at 205°. Benzaldehyde can be detected by its odor, and HCN by its precipitate with silver nitrate. It is soluble in alcohol and can be crystallized from this solvent. Emulsin, an enzyme contained in the almond, hydrolyses amygdalin into benzaldehyde (204), hydro- cyanic acid, and two glucose molecules. Water extract of beer yeast contains an enzyme which splits off hydro- lytically but one molecule of glucose and leaves the com- bination benzaldehyde, hydrocyanic acid, and glucose, the glucoside of mandelic acid nitrile (206). CONSTITUTION OF THE GLUCOSIDES The best-known synthetical glucosides are those from glucose and methyl alcohol. When a concentrated solu- tion of d-glucose in methyl alcohol is treated with gaseous hydrochloric acid, there result two compounds known as a-methyl glucoside and /3-methyl glucoside. The a-form is dextrorotatory and is soluble in 200 parts of alcohol; while the /3-form is levorotatory and is soluble in 66.7 parts of alcohol at 100°. They can therefore be separated by their different solubilities. Maltase hydrolyzes the The Carbohydrates 325 a-glucoside but not the /3-form, while emulsin hydrolyzes the /3-form but not the a-form. The natural glucosides are in general hydrolyzed only by emulsin, and for this reason they are termed /3-glucosides. The structural formulae assigned to a- and /J-methyl glucosides are as follows : • CH 2 OH CH 2 OH HO— C— H H— C^-OCHs CH 3 0— C— H a-Methyl glucoside /3-Methyl glucoside The reasons for assigning these constitutional formulae are the following : 1. Only a single molecule of alcohol reacts with one of glucose, with the elimination of a molecule of water. One of the secondary alcohol radicals must therefore enter into the reaction. This is in all probability the 7-hy- droxyl group, since this is the one which reacts in the forma- tion of lactones (125), and since no compounds other than those containing 7-hydroxyl groups form glucosides. The ease with which the glucosides are decomposed by hy- drolysis argues strongly against the union of the alcohol radical directly to carbon, and for the assumption of link- age through oxygen as in the ethers. The mechanism of glucoside formation may therefore be represented thus : 326 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine CH 2 OH H— C— OH (?) H— C— 0[H (jS) HO— C— H I (a) H— C— OH C= O +H OCHs Methyl alcohol H Glucose CH 2 OH I H— C— OH 0+H 2 Mutarotation. — Freshly prepared solutions of glucose rotate the plane of polarized light nearly twice as much as they do after standing for a time. If the water is evaporated and the sugar crystallized it will, on again dissolving it, show the high rotation value. There must The Carbohydrates 327 occur a reversible change during evaporation. It is believed that the change in rotatory power is the result of the interaction of a molecule of water with one of glucose, analogous to methyl alcohol and glucose, with the loss of a molecule of water and the formation of a structure analogous to a glucoside, but with OH in place of the OCH3. Maltose is regarded as a glucoside of glucose : CH 2 OH CHO H— C- 1 -OH + H— C— OH HO— C— H H-€-OH 1 1 HO— C- 1 -H H— C— OH 1 H— C— OH 1 H— C— OH 1 1 C = = H 1 d-glucose 1 1 H d-glucose CH 2 OH 1 CHOH 1 CH V 1 \ = chohX CHOH/ 1 / >0 CHO 1 (CHOH) 4 1 1 / HC^ _o — — CH 2 Maltose 328 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Sucrose, which contains no carbonyl group, is represented as : CH 2 OH I H— C— OH H— C— OJTT HO— C— H H— C— OH I _ C= H d-glucose CH 2 OH H— C— OH H— C— OH HO— C— OH I o=c I HOH 2 C d-fructose CH 2 OH I CHOH O' CH 2 OH Sucrose Emil Fischer has suggested the comparison of the spe- cific action of enzymic action in the hydrolysis of sugars and other compounds, with the relationship between lock and key. The stereochemical structures of both the enzyme and the molecules of the substrate determine whether they can interact. This specificity of ferment The Carbohydrates 329 action is of the greatest significance for the life of the anfmal or plant cell. The union of galactose in the galactolipins of the brain and of ribose in nucleic acids is probably of the nature of glucosides. THE POLYSACCHARIDES 162. Starch (C 6 Hi Ob)„ (amylum) is a non-crystalline carbohydrate produced by plants as a reserve material. It is closely related to cellulose on the one hand, a compound whose peculiar properties fit it to be the skeletal tissue of plants, and to the simple hexoses and disaccharides on the other, into which it is readily converted by hydrolysis. Starch is insoluble in water and exists in grains, tubers, fruits, etc., in the form of grains. These consist of at least two kinds of carbohydrates: granulose, which is colored blue by iodine, and starch cellulose, which is not. The blue color produced by iodine is discharged on heating but reappears on cooling. Starch has a very high molec- ular weight (32,000) and when boiled with water under- goes incipient hydrolysis and is changed into soluble starch. The latter forms an opalescent colloidal solution. The amylase of the saliva of certain animals rapidly causes hydrolysis of starch into a series of simpler car- bohydrates, the dextrines, the final product being maltose. Acid hydrolysis converts starch into d-glucose. The form and appearance of the starch grains vary with their origin. It is a simple matter for one familiar with the forms to identify by microscopical methods the source of the starch. Starch is not the first product of the synthetic activity 330 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine of the plant. The latter absorbs carbon dioxide from the air and water and inorganic salts, including nitrates, from the soil. It is generally assumed, since formaldehyde is present in minute amounts in functioning leaves, and, as pointed out earlier (151), is polymerized to a mixture of hexoses, that it is the first product formed : COz + H 2 = HCHO + Qj 6 HCHO = CeHtfOe glucose The formation of starch is not dependent on the forma- tion of glucose. Leaves which have been kept in the dark until they are starch-free and then in the dark are floated on sugar solutions quickly form starch, d-glucose and drfructose are most readily utilized for this purpose, but certain plants can use mannose and even galactose for starch synthesis. Stereochemical transformation is, of course, necessary in these cases. Starch is easily hydrolyzed by acids, but only with great difficulty by alkalies. Dextrines correspond to the same empirical formula as starch, but their molecular weight is much smaller.^ It is assumed that there are a large number of dextrines of different molecular complexities, but only two can be readily distinguished. Erythrodextrine, which gives a red color with iodine, is first formed by the action of amylase on starch; and achroodextrine, which gives no color with iodine, is formed somewhat later. Cellulose is much more resistant than is starch. It is not acted upon by enzymes formed by the higher animals The Carbohydrates 331 or plants, and is not easily decomposed by acids or alkalies. On treatment with strong acids under appropriate condi- tions the only product of its hydrolysis is d-glucose. Cellu- lose is found nearly pure in the cotton fiber, in linen, and in hemp, and is the principal constituent of wood. The latter, however, contains about half its dry weight of incrusting substances, known as lignin, pectins, and gummy substances. There occurs in the covering of the tunicata, a group of animals, a polysaccharide tunicin which appears to be identical with cellulose. This is the only instance of the occurrence of cellulose in the animal kingdom. When acted upon by concentrated nitric acid or by a mixture of nitric and sulphuric acids, cellulose is nitrated. According to the conditions, from one to six nitro groups are introduced in ester linkage for each of the C6H12O5 complexes in the molecule. A mixture of tri- and tetra- nitrates dissolved in a mixture of alcohol and ether con- stitutes collodion. Gwncotton, or pyroxylin, is the hexanitrate of cellulose. When dissolved in acetone or ethyl acetate and the solu- tion evaporated, the residue in granular form constitutes smokeless powder. A mixture of cellulose hexanitrate with nitroglycerine arid other substances forms ballistite, cordite, blasting gelatin, etc. Cellulose forms several acetates when treated with glacial acetic acid and acetic anhydride in the presence of strong sulphuric acid. These are insoluble in water, but soluble in various organic solvents. Artificial gutta- percha is produced by evaporating a solution of tetra- 332 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine acetyl cellulose in a,cetone. When a solution of cellulose acetate in glacial acetic acid is poured into alcohol, a precipitate is formed which contains much alcohol and burns without melting or leaving an ash and is sold as " solid alcohol." Cellulose is indigestible in the alimentary tract of ani- mals, but certain bacteria present there ferment it with the formation of carbon dioxide, methane, hydrogen, and formic, acetic, butyric, valerianic, and other acids. Cer- tain molds and saprophytic plants secrete an enzyme, cytase, which dissolves cellulose. The products formed are not known. Cellulose is insoluble in all ordinary solvents, but dissolves in an ammoniacal solution of copper oxide (Schweitzer's reagent), and in a solution of zinc chloride in hydrochloric acid. Hemicelluloses are important constituents of nut shells and stony seeds pf fruits, coconut rind, etc., and are present in considerable amounts in the seeds of legumes (pea, bean, etc.). On hydrolysis with acids they yield mannose, and those of the legumes especially galactose. A certain amount of arabinose and xylose is also usually formed. They are not well-characterized compounds therefore, and appear to be either mixtures of mannans, xylan, araban, galactan, or complex carbohydrates com- posed of complexes representing several kinds of sugars. Pentosans are polysaccharides which correspond to the celluloses, but they yield on hydrolysis a pentose sugar. Thus xylan, which is present in the straws to the extent of 18-28 %, yields xylose ; and araban, which occurs in cherry, The Carbohydrates 333 peach, and other gums and is the principal constituent of gum arabic, yields arabinose on hydrolysis. They are soluble in alkalies and are precipitated by alkaline copper solutions, as copper xylan, etc. Like the pentoses, they yield furfural on distillation. Pectins are the constituents of fruit juices which cause the setting of jellies. Carrots, beets, and rhubarb are especially rich in these constituents. Their chemistry is not well understood. Preparations of pectins made by precipitation with alcohol yield both pentoses and hexoses, and in addition acids which seem to be of the type of gluconic acid. Plant Mucilages are substances which swell in water and form mucilaginous solutions. As examples may be cited flaxseed mucilage, and those of the roots of salep and althea. They yield both pentoses and hexoses on hydrol- ysis, but their chemistry has not been thoroughly studied. Gums contain the salts of as yet unidentified organic acids, and yield these acids and certain reducing sugars on hydrolysis. Arabinose, xylose, fucose, and galactose have been identified. Glycogen is a polysaccharide contained in animal and in certain plant tissues which resembles soluble starch in certain respects, but gives a reddish color with iodine. , It is soluble in cold water, forming an opalescent solution. It is formed by the condensation of a number of molecules of glucose, water being separated in the union of each two molecules. It is acted upon by amylase, which converts it into maltose as in the case of starch. The glycogen content is higher in the liver than any 334 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine other tissue, usually from 1 to 4 %, but the livers of highly fed animals have shown contents as high as 15 %. It is found in other tissues, especially muscles. Among plants yeast is richest in glycogen. When animals or yeasts are starved the glycogen content de- creases markedly, being slowly converted into glucose which passes into the blood to keep up the normal content of one part to one thousand of the latter. Glycogen is formed in the animal body from certain sugars other than glucose, as mannose, levulose, etc., but only as these are converted into glucose (157). 163. Chitin is a peculiar polysaccharide which forms the matrix of the shells of the Crustacea (lobsters, etc.), the external covering and the lining of parts of the alimentary canal of insects, and the covering of certain worms (Hiru- dinea). When freed from incfusting calcium salts in the case of lobster shells chitin forms a leathery substance , which on hydrolysis with mineral acids yields an amino derivative of glucose, glucosamine, the only nitrogen-con- taining carbohydrate. On heating chitin with strong alkali, a treatment which does not change cellulose or tunicin, it is decomposed by hydrolysis into acetic acid and chitosan; which is soluble in acetic acid but is precipitated by alkalies. Chitosan is a base and forms salts with acids. On boiling it with acids it is hydrolyzed to glucosamine and a further amount of acetic acid. Glucosamine, CeHuOsNEt, is an amino sugar derived from many proteins on hydrolysis. It contains an alde- hyde group, as is shown by its formation of an oxime with The Carbohydrates 335 hydroxylamine, and a hydrazone. Its constitution has been approximately established by E. Fischer, who syn- thesized it by the following procedure : CH 2 OH CH 2 OH CH 2 OH (CHOH) 3 +NH 3 (CHOH) 3 +HCN (CHOH) 3 I »• I /NH 2 ► I /NH 2 CHO CH( CH( X>H X CN Arabinose Arabinose ammonia Arabinoso cyanhydrin CH 2 OH CH 2 OH 1 H— C— OH + H,0 (, j HOH) ' CHNH 2 1 HC HO— C— H^\ 1 ^ COOH CHNH, / 1 / Glucosaminic acid CO x Lactone of glucosaminic acid CH 2 OH ; H— C— OH TT P XI \j Reduction > HO— C— H o o CHNH 2 CB \r ^OH Glucosamine 336 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine It is not certain whether the amino group is on one or the other side of the carbon chain, and the compound may be either glucosamine or mannosamine. That the amino group is united to the carbon atom neighboring the alde- hyde is made highly probably by the decomposition de- scribed by Neuberg, of glucosamine into erythronic acid (150) by boiling with barium hydroxide. H OH OH HOC— CHNH 2 -! -C CH 2 OH Glucosamine OH H H OH OH HOOC— C C— CH 2 OH Erythronic acid H H On treatment of glucosamine with nitrous acid the amino group is replaced by hydroxyl. The resulting hexose is however not glucose or mannose. It is known as chitose. It does not ferment, and does not yield a difficultly soluble osazone. By comparison with the synthetically prepared compound, Fischer assigned to chitose the following cyclic structure: HOHC— CHOH HOH 2 C-HC CH— CHO V Chitose Inulin (CeHioOs),, is a polysaccharide entirely analogous to starch, which is found as a reserve carbohydrate in The Carbohydrates 337 dahlia roots and other tubers of the Compositse. On hydrolysis it yields only d-fructose. In the plant tissues where inulin occurs there is formed an enzyme, inulase, which effects its hydrolysis whenever growth begins. There is no inulase in the digestive secretions of animals and therefore no provision for the utilization of this carbohydrate. CHAPTER XVI THE CHEMICAL CHANGES IN THE FERMENTATION OF THE SUGARS 164. The nature of the chemical changes involved in the fermentation of sugars has been very carefully investi- gated, and the mechanism of the change of hexose into alcohol is fairly definitely understood. . On the one hand the method of investigation consisted of the careful study of the compounds which result from the decomposition of glucose by chemical agents, especially alkalies, since they induce decompositions of a profound character resembling a certain type of fermentation (lactic acid). There is a certain degree of probability that the cleavage of the glucose molecule by alkalies will follow the same lines as those on which sugar normally tends to dissociate, and it is along these lines that the enzymes of the yeast accelerate change. On the other hand the inquiry may be directed toward testing under carefully regulated conditions the ability of yeast to take any supposed intermediary product in the process of cleavage in fermentation and to complete the process of conversion of this into alcohol. Any compound which can be so converted is regarded as a possible inter- mediary product, and any one which cannot be converted into alcohol must be excluded. Another procedure possible of application in certain instances is to conduct the trial with the yeast in the pres- 338 Fermentation 339 ence of some harmless substance which will combine with a supposed intermediary product whose existence in ordinary practice is but transient, and to remove it from the sphere of influence of the living organism, thus causing its accumulation. The results of extensive inquiry by many investigators have been the proposal of the following explanations of the process of fermentation : CHO CHO CHO CHOH COH CO CHOH " i HO II 1 M2 V CH -+ CH 2 CHOH CHOH CHOH 1 CHOH CHOH CHOH . 1 CH 2 OH 1 CH 2 OH CH 2 OH 11 in Glucose Unstable dissociation products CHO CO CH 3 Methyl glyoxal m v CHO CHO CHO CHOH _H2 ° 1 CHO II CH 2 V -+ CO 1 CH 2 OH IV Glyceric aldehyde CH3 VI 340 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine CHO COOiH C0 2 CO +Hg 9 CHOH ~ CQ > 2 CH 2 OH CH3 CH3 CH3 VII VIII Lactic acid Alcohol The central idea is the alternate dissociation and re- addition of the elements of water. When alkali acts on glucose, lactic acid is formed to the extent of 54 per cent of the theoretical amount, formic acid to .5-2 per cent, and 40 per cent of a mixture of hydroxy acids containing iour and six carbon atoms. About 1 per cent of alcohol and CO2 are also formed. There is no glycolic or oxalic acid, nor glycol or glycerol formed. If lactic acid were formed by a separation of the carbon chain into two three- carbon aldehydes and subsequent oxidation and reduction, the resulting lactic acid should be optically active, which is not the case in lactic acid fermentation, and this lends support to the view that some three-carbon aldehyde other than glyceraldehyde is first formed. Pyruvic acid, CH3— CO— COOH Methyl glyoxal, CH3— CO— CHO Glyceric aldehyde, CH3OH— CHOH— CHO Dihydroxyacetone, CH 2 OH— CO— CH 2 OH have all been proposed as the most probable intermediary cleavage product. Methyl glyoxal is not fermentable by yeasts, while the results are positive for glyceraldehyde and dihydroxy Fermentation 341 acetone. The most satisfactory explanation is probably the following : CeH^Oe = 2 CH3— CO— COOH + 4 H Pyruvic acid 2 CH 3 — CO— COOH = 2 CH 3 — CHO + 2 C0 2 2 CH3— CHO + 4 H = 2 CH 3 — CH 2 OH This scheme receives strong support from the now well- substantiated observation that yeast juice free from living cells contains the enzyme, carboxylase, which accelerates the decomposition of pyruvic acid into acetaldehyde and carbon dioxide. Acetaldehyde is readily reduced to alcohol. Another theory of alcoholic fermentation deserves to be mentioned. Schade showed that lactic acid treated with dilute sulphuric acid formed acetaldehyde and formic acid : CH3— CHOJH— COOH = CH 3 — CHO +H— COOH 1 showing a tendency for this line of cleavage which might be accelerated by a yeast enzyme. Formic acid is rapidly decomposed catalytically by means of metallic rhodium into hydrogen and carbon dioxide. Schade held that the latter reaction might also be catalyzed by a ferment, thus producing through Tactic acid as a first product from hexose, acetaldehyde, and hydrogen in a nascent state to reduce it, together with one molecule of carbon dioxide for each molecule of alcohol produced. This is the pro- portion actually observed in yeast fermentation. Yeasts do not however ferment a mixture of acetaldehyde and sodium formate. 342 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Lactic Acid Fermentation is equally in harmony with the assumption that pyruvic acid is first formed from hexose. Lactic acid can be oxidized to pyruvic acid or the latter reduced to lactic acid : CH3 CH3 CH3 CHOH ±_2 CO +21 ? CHOH COOH Lactic acid COOH Pyruvic acid COOH Lactic acid Butyric Acid Fermentation. — Bacillus holobutyricus has been shown capable of converting lactic acid into butyric acid in considerable amounts. The products are n-butyric acid, carbon dioxide, and hydrogen. The destruction of lactic acid by bacteria leads to the accumu- lation of appreciable amounts of the following products: }H3 CH 3 CH 3 H co 2 H 2 :hoh CH 2 1 COOH 1 COOH Carbon dioxide Hy- drogen IOOH 1 COOH Acetic acid Formic acid Lactic acid Propionic acid The most plausible explanation of butyric acid fer- mentation from lactic acid is that based on the condensa- tion of acetaldehyde with acetic acid, analogous to the condensation of benzaldehyde with acetic acid to form cinnamic acid in Perkin's synthesis (207) : CH 3 — CH |Q + Ha] HC— COOH = CH 3 -CH=CH— COOH The resulting crotonic acid would be reduced to butyric acid. Fermentation 343 FORMATION OF FATTY ACIDS FROM CARBOHYDRATES 165. The nature of the process by which carbohydrate is changed into fatty acids for fat synthesis within the body is not fully understood. There is satisfactory ex- perimental proof that pigs and geese have become fat at the expense of the carbohydrate moiety of the diet. A significant fact which any hypothesis must recognize is the existence among the ordinary fatty acids of those only which contain an even number of carbon atoms, chiefly 12, 14, 16, and 18 carbon atom acids. Myristic and palmitic acids with 14 and 16 carbon chains refute the supposition that three molecules of hexose condense to form a chain which by reduction of hydroxyls and oxida- tion of the terminal carbonyl could fofrn a fatty acid. An adequate explanation must account for the addition of two carbon atoms at a time to some of the lower members of the series, or to a compound which is readily oxidizable to a fatty acid. Lieben has shown that butyric aldehyde can condense with acetaldehyde in the presence of dilute alkali, but the resulting aldehyde is not a straight chain : CH3— CH 2 — CH 2 — CHO + CH 3 — CHO Butyric aldehyde Acetaldehyde = CHs— CH 2 — CH— CHO CHOH CH 3 344 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine This cannot therefore be considered a very probable explanation of what takes place in the animal body. The most plausible hypothesis yet advanced concerning the biological method of forming fats is that of Smedley, who condensed croton aldehyde with pyruvic acid, and by oxidizing the resulting ketonic acid with hydrogen peroxide, C0 2 was split off and the doubly unsaturated sorbic acid was formed : 1. CH 3 — CH = CH— CHO + CH 3 — CO— COOH Croton aldehyde Pyruvic acid = CH 3 — CH = CH— CH = CH— CO— COOH 2. CH 3 — CH = CH— CH = CH— CO— COOH + O =f CHs— CH = CH— CH = CH— COOH + CQ, Sorbic acid It is easy to understand how the double bonds could be removed from such an acid by reduction. Smedley suggests pyruvic acid and acetaldehyde as the starting point for fat synthesis in the body: The following reactions will illustrate the process : 3. CH3— CO— COOH + CH 3 — CHO Pyruvic acid Acetaldehyde = CH 3 — CH |OHl-CH^ — CO— COOH 4. CH 3 — CH = CH— CO— COOH + O Pentylenic a-keto acid = CH,— CH = CH— COOH + C0 2 Crotonic acid 5. CH 3 — CH = CH— COOH + 2H = CH 3 — CH 2 — CH 2 — COOH Butyric acid Fermentation 345 6. CH3— CH = CH— CO— iCOOlH — COa Fentylenic a-keto acid = CH 3 — CH = CH— CHO Cro tonic aldehyde 7. By reactions 1 and 2 sorbic acid is formed. 8. CH3— CH = CH— CH = CH— COOH + 4 H Sorbic acid = CH3— CH 2 — CH 2 — CH 2 — CH 2 — COOH Caproic acid By an extension of this synthesis the higher fatty acids would result. CHAPTER XVII THE AROMATIC COMPOUNDS 166. The hydrocarbons of the aliphatic series, or the fatty compounds, are not products of animal or plant metabolism, with the exception of methane, which results from the bacterial fermentation of cellulose. None of them have highly agreeable odors. There are in cer- tain products of vegetable origin compounds which con- tain only carbon and hydrogen, and are very poor in hydrogen, suggesting compounds of a highly unsaturated character, as isoprene (82). These differ in every re- spect in their properties from the unsaturated or the sat- urated hydrocarbons of the aliphatic series. Thus toluene, C7H8, from Tolu balsam, and cymene, C10H14, from oil of eucalyptus, oil of thyme, oil of caraway, and other essen- tial oils, are hydrocarbons of pronounced and charac- teristic aromatic odors. They do not form addition products with the halogens as do the unsaturated hydro- carbons. Benzoic acid, which is found in gum benzoin, in cranberries, and elsewhere in plants, yields when its calcium salt is subjected to dry distillation, a hydro- carbon, CeH 6 , benzene. Toluene is oxidized to benzoic acid and is therefore closely related to benzene. Cymene yields on oxidation a dibasic acid, teraphthalic acid, which on distillation of its calcium salt likewise yields benzene. 346 The Aromatic Compounds 347 Benzene may be regarded as the mother substance of a large number of compounds of great biological and tech- nical interest, and its chemistry should be considered in some detail. The constitution of its molecule was. first suggested by Kekule in. 1867, and was based principally on the following evidence: Since benzene does not behave like an unsaturated compound, its structure must be of a special nature to account for this property, for it is not possible to write the formula C 6 H 6 as an open chain without the employment of double or triple bonds. It has therefore a closed ring structure. Benzene is formed when acetylene is passed through a heated tube or subjected to high pressure. The molec- ular weight is 78, so it follows that in the polymerization three molecules of acetylene' condense into one : CH CH # CH /\ riTT I HC CH C ^ CH HC CH . CH CH Benzene (Kekule formula) The correctness of the view that the benzene molecule represents a closed ring of six carbon items linked alter- nately by single and double bonds is supported by the observation that when the vapors of benzene mixed with , hydrogen are passed through a heated tube containing finely divided nickel, six atoms of hydrogen are absorbed and hexamethylene (112) is formed : 348 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine CH /\ HC CH HC CH \/ CH Benzene + 6H CH 2 /\ H2C CH2 H2C CH2 CH 2 Hexamethylene Kekule also emphasized the fact that all of the six hydrogen atoms of benzene are equal, since each is attached to a carbon which is alternately singly and doubly bound, i.e. to carbon atoms which are alike. If this is true there should be but one mono-substitution product of benzene as chlor, brom, nitro, amino, etc., benzene, all of which derivatives are known. Actually but a single compound of these types is known. On the nor- mal aliphatic hydrocarbon containing six carbon atoms, three isomeric mono-substitution products exist, depend- ing on whether the substituting group is at 1, 2, or 3, C — C — C — C 3 — C2 — Ci On the other hand, theory calls for three disubstitu- tion products of such a hexagonal ring, and three dichlor, dinitro, dihydroxy, etc., benzenes, but no more than three, are known. These are called ortho-, meta-, and para- derivatives (designated as o-, m-, and p-) according X 6 2" X X X 5 3 V \/ X \/ Ortho Meta X Para The Aromatic Compounds 349 to whether the substituting groups occupy positions on neighboring carbon atoms (1:2) or on atoms separated by one (1 : 3) or by two carbon atoms (1 : 4) respectively. The position 1 : 5 is the same as 1 : 3 and 1 : 6 is the same as 1:2. The number of isomers should be the same for disubstitution products whether these are similar or dis- similar. There should be, according to theory, three isomers of a trisubstitution product of benzene provided all substi- tuting groups are similar, but more if two are similar and one dissimilar. X A X X A X A 5 3 V X X \y X \/ X Adjacc ( ■nt or v L : 2 : 3) icinal s 3 ■mmc-tr (1:3:5 ical Un ) X symme (1:3:' trical I) Of the vast number of derivatives of benzene which have been prepared and studied, theory has in all cases accorded with observation. It is essential, if we accept this structure for benzene, to assume that the double bonds are alternating between the 1 : 6 and the 1 : 2 positions, otherwise there should be observed different properties for a disubstitution prod- uct in which the groups were separated by a single and double bond respectively. Such a vibration was assumed by Kekule. To obviate this difficulty, since but one ortho disubstitution product has been observed, the centric formula was proposed by Armstrong. According ,350 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine to his assumption the fourth bond of each carbon atom in the ring is directed toward the center : HC HC rt V CH \CH N / CH CH Such a structure accounts for the extreme stability of benzene, which is much greater than that of the aliphatic hydrocarbons, and also accounts for the peculiar isom- erism of its derivatives and for its " aromatic " char- acter. The six-membered ring is referred to as the benzene nucleus, and since many derivatives of benzene are known in which one or more aliphatic groups replace the hydrogen atoms of the nucleus, these are called " side chains." Substitution can be effected either in the nucleus or in the side chain. DETERMINATION OF POSITION OF SUBSTITUTING GROUPS IN THE NUCLEUS 167. This has been determined by very extensive and elaborate study for a few substitution products of benzene by a method, the principle of which was enunciated by Korner. It depends upon the fact that when a third substituent y is introduced into an ortho compound, in which both substituting groups are similar, but two isomers can be formed. This is true whether y is like or unlike x : The Aromatic Compounds 351 x \/ 1 X y (2) /\ \/ /\ \y (1) (2) (3) (4) Two and 3 are the same and 1 and 4 are the same. In the case of the meta compound three isomers can be formed : xxx y \/ While in the case of a para compound but one trisubsti- tution product can result: x V x No matter what position y may take, it occupies the same relative positions with respect to the other substituents, viz. it is always in the ortho- position to one and in the meta position to the other. The experimental evidence in support of the theory of structure consists in the prep- aration of compounds having the percentage composi- tion called for by the theory and efforts to separate the product by crystallization, distillation, etc., into fractions 352 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine which have the same composition, but different physical properties; i.e., isomers. The fact that patient search has revealed the existence of all the isomers demanded by theory, and in no instance more than these, is convinc- ing evidence of the validity of the theory. Benzene, C6H 6 , is a colorless liquid with a character- istic odor, which boils at 80°. When strongly cooled it crystallizes, the crystals melting when warmed to 5.4°. Its specific gravity at 20° is .874. It burns with a smoky flame and its vapors are inflammable. It dis- solves in all proportions in alcohol or ether, but is in- soluble in water. It dissolves fats, resins, etc., and is a good solvent for sulphur, phosphorus, iodine, and many other substances. The benzene of commerce, also called benzole, was for- merly obtained from coal tar, which on distillation yields in the fraction obtained up to 150°, from 3-5 per cent of a mixture of benzene and its homologues, toluene and xylene. Recently Rittmann has perfected a process by means of which the aliphatic hydrocarbons of petro- leum can be made to yield 10-15 per cent of these cyclic hydrocarbons. This process consists in heating the petro- leum under pressure for a time, and then distilling the product. The principle involved depends upon the dissociation of the aliphatic hydrocarbons under these conditions into various unsaturated hydrocarbons, among which are a small content of acetylene and of its alkyl derivatives (see p. 164). At high temperatures and pres- sures acetylene condenses to benzene, an irreversible reaction. The Aromatic Compounds 353 PHYSIOLOGICAL PROPERTIES OF BENZENE 168. The aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons show considerable differences in their physiological properties. The lower members of the methane series produce sleep if inhaled, and death by asphyxia. The toxicity in- creases as the carbon atoms become more numerous. Hexane is actively intoxicant, producing a long stage of excitement followed by deep anaesthesia. It acts on the sensory side. Benzene and other aromatic hydrocarbons act principally on the motor centers, producing convul- sions and paralysis. Benzene has furthermore a selective toxic effect for the white blood corpuscles, producing leucopenia, and is employed in medicine in cases of leucaemia. HOMOLOGUES OF BENZENE 169. Friedel and Crafts Reaction. When benzene is treated with an aliphatic halogen compound in the pres- ence of aluminum chloride a reaction takes place in which hydrochloric acid gas is evolved and the aliphatic group is linked to the benzene nucleus : +ch 3 ci +AIC j 3 \/ \/ +HC1 -CH 3 For the sake of simplicity the hexagonal ring is employed to represent benzene. By the employment of the homologues of methyl chlo- ride, ethyl, propyl, etc., groups can be substituted for a hydrogen atom in the benzene ring. The benzene nucleus 2a 354 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine less one hydrogen is called the phenyl group. Several of these compounds are of great importance, and their chemical behavior is of considerable interest. Toluene, C 6 H 6 CH 3 , is formed by the dry distillation of tolu balsam, and of many resins. It occurs in coal tar and is separated from it by distillation along with benzene. It boils at 110° and by fractional distillation can be sep- arated from benzene and other homologues. It is much employed as an antiseptic in biochemical work. When oxidized by chromyl chloride, CrQzClj, it is converted by the oxidation of the " side chain," the methyl group, into an aldehyde, C6H5CHO, called benml- dehyde, which may be regarded as phenyl formaldehyde. More vigorous oxidizing agents convert toluene directly into benzoic acid, CeHsCOOH, which is the acid corre- sponding to benzaldehyde. It may be regarded as phenyl formic acid. It has been noted that on heating the cal- cium salt of benzoic acid carbon dioxide is removed from the carboxyl group and benzene is formed. The follow- ing transformations for toluene illustrate the general behavior of the compounds containing both an aromatic and an aliphatic group : CH3 Toluene CHO + 20 > COOH + /\ -CO2 >■ Benzaldehyde Benzoic Acid Benzene Longer side chains as in ethyl-, propyl-, isopropyl-, etc., benzene oxidize, no matter how many carbon atoms con- The Aromatic Compounds 355 tained in them, into carboxyl. Hence the three deriva- tives just named all yield benzoic acid.- 170. Chlor toluenes. It is obvious that derivatives of two types can be produced by the action of chlorine on toluene, viz. derivatives in which the chlorine occu- pies the ortho-, meta- or para- position to the methyl group in the benzene nucleus, or those in which one, two or three of the hydrogen atoms in the methyl group are replaced by chlorine. The position taken by , chlorine when it reacts with toluene depends upon the conditions under which the reaction takes place.' At low temper- atures and in the absence of light ortho- and para-chlor toluenes are formed in about equal proportions, with very little of the meta-. compound. When CI acts on p- toluidine (176) the CI enters the m- position to the CH3 group. The action is greatly accelerated by the presence of halogen carriers, such as iodine, ferric chloride, antimony trichloride, etc. At high temperatures (110°) even in the absence of light chlorine substitutes in the side chain exclusively. In the presence of halogen carriers, however, the chlorine enters the nucleus even at high temperatures. At ordinary temperatures in direct sunlight the chlorine enters the side chain exclusively. The terms chlor-, brom-, and iodo-toluenes refer to the o-, m-, p-, derivatives. The derivatives in which the halogen is in the side chain are named as follows : C 6 H 6 CH 2 C1 C 6 H 6 CHC1 2 C 6 H 6 CC1 3 Benzyl chloride Benzal chloride Benzo trichloride 356 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine The group C 6 H 5 — CH 2 — is called the benzyl-radical; C 6 H 6 CH= benzal-, and C 6 H 5 CH= benzo-, radical. The behavior of these will be further described later. 171. Xylenes. Dimethyl, benzenes, C 6 H4(CH 3 ) 2 , are formed by the Fittig reaction, employing brom toluenes and methyl bromide : CH3 CH3 /\ /\ + CH 3 Br + 2Na = Br + 2NaBr ch 3 The same result is obtained by means of the Friedel and Crafts reaction (169), by means of which all of the hydrogens of the benzene nucleus have been successively replaced by methyl groups. Ortho-, meta-, and para-xylenes can yield by oxidation either monobasic o-, m-, and p-toluic acids, or the three corresponding dibasic acids : COOH COOH \y COOH COOH COOH Phthalic acid COOH Teraphthalic acid Isophthalic acid Phthalic acid when heated loses a molecule of water, forming an anhydride. This is employed extensively in the preparation of dyes. 172. Mesitylene, symmetrical trimethyl benzene, C 6 H 3 (CH 3 ) 3 , is formed by methods analogous to the for- The Aromatic Compounds 357 mation of xylene (171), and also by the polymerization of acetone in the presence of strong sulphuric acid : CH3 H- CH3- c / -c H 2 H 2 -C \ c H2 C— H C— CH ; CH 3 I C •\ H— C C— H = CH3— C C-CH 3 + 3H 2 X/ C I H H Another class of hydrocarbons is known in which two or three phenyl groups replace as many hydrogen atoms in the methane group : C6H5 — CH3 C 6 H 5 \ C 6 H b \^ Toluene CH 2 CeHs — CH phenyl methane C6H5/ C6H5/ Diphenyl methane Triphenyl methane Diphenyl methane is formed by the interaction of benzyl chloride with benzene by the Friedel and Crafts reaction. Triphenyl methane is prepared in large quantities in the dye industry from chloroform, CHCI3, and benzene, likewise by the Friedel and Crafts reaction (169). 173. Cymene, or methyl-p-isopropyl benzene, occurs 358 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine CH 3 CH CH3 CH3 in numerous essential oils. It yields successively on oxi- dation p-toluic acid and teraphthalic acids (171). Halogen Derivatives of Benzene. Chlorine acts upon benzene, substituting its hydrogen atoms in a manner analogous to the aliphatic hydrocarbons. ' CI /\ + 2 CI Benzene + HC1 The action is greatly accelerated by the presence of iodine. This action is in part due to the fact that in the formation of iodine chlorides, IC1 and ICI3, the molecule of chlorine Cl2,is broken up with the formation of nascent chlorine ; and in 'part to the instability of the chlorides of iodine which causes them to dissociate into active, nascent, chlorine. There will be in the system containing chlorine and iodine, some of the chlorides of iodine to- gether with their dissociation products. Bromine likewise acts directly on benzene with the evolution of hydrobromic acid gas. The action is greatly accelerated by the presence of metallic aluminum. The Aromatic Compounds 359 Benzene is not acted upon directly by iodine, but iodo benzene can be prepared from aniline by the diazo reaction (177). The halogen derivatives of benzene are more stable than the aliphatic halogen compounds. The halogen is not replaceable by other groups, as hydroxyl, etc. 174. Nitrobenzene is produced when concentrated nitric acid acts upon benzene. This action is in marked contrast to the behavior of the aliphatic compounds, which cannot be directly nitrated. +hno 3 = \x Nitrobenzene + H 2 Nitrobenzene is a yellowish oily liquid, which crystal- lizes when cooled and melts at 3°. It boils without decom- position at' 210°. It has the odor of bitter almonds and is employed as a scent for soap. It is but slightly soluble in water, but dissolves in alcohol and ether and in con- centrated sulphuric acid. From the latter solution it is precipitated unchanged on dilution with water. Nitro- benzene is prepared on a large scale for the manufacture of aniline. 175. Aniline, C 6 H5NH 2 , aminobenzene, results from the action of nascent hydrogen on nitrobenzene : + 6H = x/\ + 2H 2 NO2 Aniline NH 2 360 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Aniline may be regarded as a substituted ammonia. The benzene nucleus with one hydrogen atom re- moved is termed the phenyl group and is commonly ab- breviated to C6H5 — N except where the illustration of structure is desired. Aniline may therefore be called phenyl amine. It is a weak base, but forms salts with acids. From these the free base is liberated by treat- ment with alkalies. It is appreciably soluble in water, and readily so in alcohol and ether. It has a character- istic odor and is highly toxic, producing muscular spasms of central origin and causing destruction of the red blood corpuscles. The presence of an amino group on the benzene nucleus greatly increases the ease with which the other hydrogen atoms can be substituted. Thus bromine acts but slowly on benzene and by direct action the principal end-product is monobrom benzene, while it reacts readily with aniline, forming symmetrical tribrom aniline : • Br/ + 6 Br = Br + 3HBr NH 2 y r ^NH 2 The favorable influence of the amino group on either halogenation or nitration is so great that in order to pre- pare the monobrom or mononitro aniline the amino group must be acetylated. This is effected by boiling aniline with glacial acetic acid. The acetyl group serves to " protect " the benzene nucleus : The Aromatic Compounds 361 +H 2 +HOOC— CH 3 = \/\ NH 2 \/ \NH— CO— CH, Aniline Acetic acid Acetanilide Acetanilide is a colorless crystalline substance, which melts at 116° and boils at 304°. It is an important antipyretic. It is hydrolyzed into aniline and acetic-, acid. 176. Alkyl Anilines. Aniline will react with one or two molecules of alkyl halide to form alkyl anilines : CeHs— NH 2 + CH 3 I = C 6 H B — NH— CH 3 + HI CH C 6 H 5 — NH— CH 3 + CH 3 I = C 6 H 5 — N ho/ ^o +H 2 or C 6 H 6 0— S0 3 H 181. Phenol Sulphonic Acids. On dissolving phenol in concentrated sulphuric acid the sulphonic acid group is readily introduced into the benzene nucleus and phenol sulphonic acids are formed. The o- and p- derivatives are thus obtained. When two sulphonyl groups are introduced into benzene they take the meta position and on fusion with potassium hydroxide one is replaced by hydroxyl, forming m-phenol sulphonic acid. The Aromatic Compounds 367 182. Phenol Ethers. Phenol also forms ethers, but not readily by the direct action of phenol with an alcohol. They are easily produced by the action of alkyl iodides upon the phenolates (also called phenates) : + CH 3 I = + Nal Phenol when pure is a colorless crystalline compound which is very deliquescent and turns pink on contact with the light and air. It is volatile with steam, melts at 42°, and boils at 182°. Its specific gravity at is 1.084°. Its odor is characteristic, and it is highly toxic and cor- rosive, the latter action being due to its great affinity for water. One part of phenol dissolves in fifteen parts of water. It is much more soluble in alcohol. It is an excel- lent antiseptic. Phenol can be formed by the direct oxidation of benzene in the presence of palladium black or aluminum chloride. Like aniline, phenol is readily brominated. When bromine watej" is added to a solution of phenol, symmetri- cal tribrom phenol, a very insoluble compound, crystallizes out. This compound has served for the quantitative estimation of phenol. Phenol in water gives a violet coloration on adding a few drops of a solution of ferric chloride. CeHi — > CeHi — >■ \S0 3 H \S0 2 C1 /CH 3 /COOH CO C6H4. — > C6H4. — >■ / \ \S0 2 NH 2 \S0 2 NH 2 C 6 H 4 NH \/ so 2 Saccharin 202. Hippuric Acid (201) is normally found in very small amount in the urine especially of the herbivora. It is not, however, a product of metabolism, but is present there because the foodstuffs of the herbivorous animal, The Aromatic Compounds 379 and to a less extent of the omnivora, contain substances which are oxidized to benzoic acid in the tissues., Hippuric acid is not very soluble in cold water and less so in hydrochloric acid ; and if much is present in the urine, it will crystallize out on acidifying with hydrochloric acid or better with the addition of ammonium sulphate. Glycocoll therefore serves as a protective substance against the foreign substance, benzoic acid. 203. Benzyl Alcohol, C6H5CH2OH, occurs as such and also in ester combination with benzoic and cinnamic acid (207), in Tolu balsam, Peru balsam, and in the resin storax. It is isomeric with the cresols (183). Benzyl alcohol is formed by the method described in (201), and by the reduction of benzaldehyde. It is a liquid which boils at 206°, sparingly soluble in water, but more readily in alcohol and ether. It has all the typical properties of the alcohols. 204. Benzaldehyde, C 6 H B CHO, is found in the gluco- side amygdalin from bitter almonds, where it is in union with two molecules of glucose and one of hydrocyanic acid. For its preparation from benzal chloride see (201). It is a colorless liquid with the odor of bitter almonds. It boils at 179°, is very slightly soluble in water, but readily in alcohol and ether. It behaves in most respects like the aliphatic aldehydes, but differs from these in the fol- lowing respects : It does not reduce Fehling's solution or ammoniacal silver solutions. It does not polymerize, and when heated with alkalies one molecule is reduced to benzaldehyde and another is simultaneously oxidized to benzoic acid (p. 61). 380 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine On shaking an alcholic solution of benzaldehyde with potassium cyanide two molecules condense to form the ketone alcohol benzoin. Benzaldehyde yields nitro derivatives, sulphonic acids, etc. o-nitrobenzakjehyde condenses with acetone to form indigo blue. PHENYL FATTY ACIDS 205. Phenyl Acetic Acid is formed in small amounts in putrefaction of proteins. It is closely related to mandelic acid, the nitrile of which occurs in amygdalin: C 6 H 5 CH 2 — COOH C 6 H 6 CHOH— COOH Phenylacotic acid Mandelic acid Its nitrile is formed from benzyl chloride by the action of potassium cyanide : C 6 H B CH 2 C1 +KCN = C 6 H 5 CH 2 CN +KC1 206. Phenyl Amino Propionic Acid, C 6 H 5 — CH 2 — CH — COOH, or phenyl alanine, is a constant constituent I NH 2 of proteins. On putrefaction it gives rise to phenyl propionic acid : C 6 H 6 — CH 2 — CH— COOH +2H I NH 2 = C 6 H 5 — CH 2 — CH 2 — COOH+NHs Phenyl alanine is not readily isolated from among the products of hydrolysis of proteins. The form which occurs in nature is levorotatory. It is crystalline and melts at 275-280°. The Aromatic Compounds 381 207. Cinnamic Acid, C 6 H 5 — CH=CH— COOH, phe- nyl acrylic acid, is found in the resin storax. It is the most important phenyl derivative containing an un- saturated side chain. A synthesis described by Per- kin is of unusual interest. Benzaldehyde condenses with sodium acetate when the two are heated together in the presence of a dehydrating agent (acetic anhydride). C 6 H 5 — CH lO+H 2 | CH— COONa Benzaldehyde Sodium acetate = C 6 H 8 — CH = CH— COONa Alcohol, aldehyde and acid derivatives of phenol are also found in nature. The first of these is represented by salig- enin, which occurs in the glucoside salicin in willow bark. It is a crystalline solid easily soluble in water and melting at 82°. The phenol group is in the ortho position. /OH vCHO compound is found in certain volatile oils. /OH 209. Salicylic Acids. — C 6 H 4 . . The ortho- com- \COOH pound is of greatest importance. It occurs as the methyl ester in oil of wintergreen, and the acid is likewise found in the flowers of Spiraea. 210. Aspirin is acetyl salicylic acid: /OH /O.OC— CH 3 CeH/ + CH3-COCI = C 6 H/ nCOOH Acetyl chloride \COOH Salicylic acid Acetyl salioylic acid 208. Salicylic Aldehyde, C 6 H/^ . The ortho- V 382 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine 211. Salol is phenyl salicylate : /OH \COOC 6 H 6 OH H0/\ 212. Gallic Acid, HO , is found in many COOH plants, as gall nuts, tea, etc.. It is formed when tannin is hydrolyzed. It is a crystalline compound melting at 220°. It gives the same reaction with ferric chloride as does pyrogallol. 213. Tannic Acid, or digcdlic acid, CO O /\ /Noh HOL iOH HOOC OH Tannic acid \y OH is an ester formed between two molecules of gallic acid. It occurs in gall nuts, sumach, and other barks. 214. Tannins are of several varieties, distinguished by the color reactions which they give with various reagents. ' There are distinguished two general classes, the pyrogallol and the catechol varieties. The former give a dark blue color with ferric salts (ink) and the latter a greenish black. The latter forms a dark red ring at the juncture of the liquids when its solutions are treated with concentrated sulphuric acid. The Aromatic Compounds 383 Tannin on hydrolysis yields 7-8 per cent of glucose, and gallic acid. Its constitution has not been determined with certainty, but it is in some samples the penta digallic ester of glucose : CH 2 0— t t represents digallic or tannic acid in this formula. One of the tannins recently synthesized by Fischer has nearly double the molecular weight of the most highly complex compound hitherto synthesized. CHAPTER XVIII CONDENSED BENZENE RINGS { 215. Naphthalene, GoH 8 , is present in considerable amount in coal tar. Its structure is made clear by the behavior of its nitro and amino derivatives on oxidation. Naphthalene on oxidation yields phthalic acid (171), which shows that it contains a benzene nucleus and two substituting groups in the ortho position. On oxidizing the nitro compound, nitrophthalic acid is formed. When the nitro group is reduced to an amino group and the naphthyl amine oxidized, phthalic acid is formed. The molecule must therefore consist of two benzene rin'gs hav- ing two carbon atoms in common : X \X\ /\cOOH COOH /\X\ + 90 =>■ \/X/ Naphthalene Phthalic acid cooh /y^/\ COOH \>r N0 2 Nitronaphthalene /\ +9 \/ V N0 2 NH 2 Nitrophthalic acid Amino naphthalene 384 COOH COOH Phthalic acid Condensed Benzene Rings 385 Naphthalene derivatives are extensively employed in the manufaqture of dyes. Naphthalene yields two mono substitution products «- and /3- : w p 216. Anthracene, C w Hi , is formed by the Fittig synthe- sis from a-brom benzyl bromide, with subsequent oxida- tion: -2H= CH 2 Anthracene The structure of an anthracene derivative is arrived at through a study of the structure of its simpler oxidation products. Anthracene is a constituent of coal tar, and is the mother substance of the red dye derived from the madder root. It is a colorless crystalline solid with a blue fluorescence, which melts at 213° and boils at 351°. It is easily soluble in benzene but difficultly in water, alcohol, and ether. 2c 386 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Nitric acid oxidizes anthracene to anthraquinone, a pale CO CO i Anthraquinone yellow crystalline substance with the nature of a ketone It is used in making the dye alizerin. CHAPTER XIX ALIZERINE DYES 217. Alizerine occurs in the madder root in the form of a glucoside, ruberythric acid. It is hydrolyzed by an enzyme in the plant or by dilute acids, forming glucose and the dye " Turkey red." It is now made from anthraquinone. Its structure is : CO OH A/V\oh \/\ The hydroxyl groups are introduced by first making the sulphonic acid derivative by the direct action of H 2 S0 4 and then heating with sodium hydroxide (178). Other alizerine dyes are : /V^Nnn nn/X/V^ CO pH Noh CO OH Purpuric CO Anthropurpurin 387 388 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine :o OH HO H CO Flavopurpurin Only those phenol derivatives of anthracene containing two hydroxyls in the ortho position to each other are dyes. THE TRIPHENYL METHANE DYES 218. Malachite Green is formed by heating benzalde- hyde with dimethyl aniline and a dehydrating agent (ZnCl 2 ). y-CR Benzaldehyde H + H V > -N(CH 3 ) 2 o N(CH 3 ) 2 = CeHs— CH ,C 6 H 4 — N(CH 3 ) 2 \c 6 H 4 — N(CH») 2 Malachite green It is an excellent dye for silk and wool, but for dyeing cotton a mordant is required. Brilliant Green is prepared in the same way as is mala- chite green, but diethyl aniline is employed. Acid Green is also analogous to malachite green except that ethylbenzylaniline is employed. Pararosaniline is prepared from p-toluidine and aniline by the action of an oxidizing agent : Alizerin Dyes H+Q H^ 389 H 2 N p-toluidine C— H / -NH 2 H+Q H^ ~\- Aniline -NH 2 /C 6 H 4 — NH 2 = H 2 N— C 6 H 4 — CH< X C 6 H 4 — NH 2 p-roaaniline Rosaniline, fuchsine, or magenta, is prepared from a mix- ture of p-toluidine, o-toluidine, and aniline in an analogous manner. Rosaniline and pararosaniline are reddish-blue dyes and can be converted into dyes having a bluer tint by methyla- tion with methyl iodide (176). Ethylation of the amino groups forms deeper blue dyes, while phenylation forms a pure blue dye known as aniline blue. Phenolphthalein is another triphenyl methane derivative formed from phenol and phthalic anhydride : OH -C 6 H 4 OH /C\ Cel^OH = C 6 H 4 < >0 Phenolphthalein 390 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Fluorescein, eosin, erythrosin, and many other dyes are derivatives of triphenyl methane. THE AZO DYES 219. By substituting the hydroxyl of diazo-benzene (177) by amines, phenols, etc., a great number of dyes of both basic (from amines) and acid (from phenols) charac- ter have been produced : C 6 H 6 — N = N— OH + H< / V-NH 2 = C 6 H 6 -N = N— C 6 H4— NH 2 C 6 H B — N = N— OH+h/ ~\ -OH = C 6 H 5 — N = N— C 6 Hr- OH Congo red, bismarck brown, chrysoidin, helianthin, resorcin yellow, belong to this class. CHAPTER XX HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS 220. Pyrrole, pyrimidines, and imidazoles have been already described as representing compounds of cyclic structure in which both carbon and nitrogen were present. It remains to describe the six-membered ring containing five carbon atoms and one nitrogen. The simplest mem- ber of this group is pyridine. Neither pyridine nor its derivatives play a role in the biological processes of ani- mal life as do the heterocyclic compounds mentioned above, but it is found widely distributed in plants, espe- cially in the alkaloids.' Pyridine itself is a highly toxic substance. It is represented as follows: CH HC CH P \ P hc Ah a '\J a \S N N Its structure is arrived at by a method for its formation. Pentamethylene diamine (74) hydrochloride on dry dis- tillation loses a molecule of ammonium chloride with the formation of the reduced cyclic structure piperidine which on oxidation yields pyridine : 391 392 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine CH 2 < X CH 2 - — CHss. . ^NH H -CH2-NH2HCI CH 2 /\ H2C CH2 HC CH 2 Pentamethylene-diamine hydrochloride NH Piperidine CH /\ _i_ r\ HC CH ±^> II I HC CH \^ N Pyridine Pyridine and certain of its homologues are present in coal tar, and in " Dippel's Oil," the foul-smelling product of the dry distillation of bones. Pyridine is a colorless liquid with the odor of tobacco smoke. It is a strongly alkaline substance which mixes with water in all proportions. It boils at 115°. It is one of the most stable of organic substances, being unattacked by boiling nitr ( ic or chromic acid. With sulphuric acid it reacts, forming a sulphonic acid. Halogens scarcely attack it. On heating pyridine with hydrlodic acid at 300° it is destroyed, yielding normal pentane and ammonia. Pyridine forms salts with acids. It does not form a nitroso derivative with nitrous acid. As a tertiary amine pyridine combines with alkyl halides. These show an interesting rearrangement when heated, Heterocyclic Compounds 393 the alkyl group changing its position from the nitrogen to the a-carbon atom. /\ + CH 3 I = /\ /\ + N N /\ CH 3 I Pyridine methiodide wCHj N t-methyl pyridine A delicate test for pyridine consists in heating the sub- stance to be tested with a few drops of methyl iodide, then adding a small quantity of solid potassium hydroxide and heating again. Methyl pyridine hydroxide, having an extremely disagreeable odor, is formed when pyridine is present. Piperidine, C 6 Hi NH, is formed by heating the hydro- chloride of pentamethylene diamine (74) or by the reduc- tion of pyridine with sodium and alcohol. It behaves like a secondary amine in forming a nitroso derivative when treated with nitrous acid. Piperidine occurs as a constituent of the alkaloid piperine found in pepper. It is a strong base, which boils at 106°. HOMOLOGUES OF PYRIDINE The methyl pyridines are known as picolines; the di- methyl pyridines, as lutidines; and the trimethyl pyridines, as collidines. Their properties are closely similar "to those of pyridine. 221. Nicotinic Acid is the /8-pyridine carboxylic acid : 394 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine / /^COOH N Picolinic acid COOH COOH N Nicotinic acid N Isonicotinio acid Nicotinic acid is derived from the alkaloid nicotine by oxidation. Picolinic acid is distinguished from the other isomeric acids by its property of giving a red color with ferrous sulphate. Quinolinic Acid is an a-/3-dicarboxy pyridine. At 190° /\ COOH COOH N Quinolinic acid it loses carbon dioxide and is converted into nicotinic acid. 222. Quinoline is a compound containing a benzene ring condensed with a pyridine ring : /\/\ N Quinoline /V\ Isoquinoline N Both isomers occur in coal tar, but quinoline is usually prepared by synthesis. Its structure is made clear by its synthesis from allyl aniline by oxidation : Heterocyclic Compounds 395 /\ \y\ + OHC— CH=CH 2 Allyl aldehyde NH 2 Aniline CH 2 CH + CH N /N/\ N + H 2 and further by the fact that quinoline yields on oxidation quinolinic acid : \y\/ N HOOC v N It is a colorless liquid of an oily consistency which boils at 239° and has a characteristic rather pleasant smell. Isoquinoline closely resembles quinoline, but is a solid which melts at 23° and boils at 241°. Both quinoline and isoquinoline are constituents of alkaloids. INDOLE AND ITS DERIVATIVES 223. Indole is a compound which contains a condensed benzene and a pyrole ring, the two having two ortho- car- bon atoms in common. It is found in coal tar and is a constituent of one of the important amino acids contained 396 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine in proteins, o-amino mandelic acid is converted by the elimination of water into dioxindole, from which by vigor- ous reduction indole is formed : /\_, -CHOH— CO V\- NHH OH o-amino mandelic acid /\ -CHOH /\ •co \/\/ v NH , Dioxindole 20 — >■ -CH W •NH Indole CH Indole is crystalline and melts at 52°. It has a fecal-like odor, and is volatile with steam. It is soluble in various organic solvents. It is the complex which gives the red color with sul- phuric acid and glyoxylic acid (Hopkins and Cole's re- agent) which is characteristic of many proteins. 224. Methyl Indole, or Scatole, is found in putrefaction mixtures and in feces, where it results from tryptophane, one of the amino acids : /\ -CH3 225. indican. NH Scatole Indoxyl occurs in Isatis tinctoria as a glucoside, Heterocyclic Compounds /\_OH 397 NH This is hydrolyzed by an enzyme in the plant and the free indoxyl undergoes oxidation to the blue dye indigo. Indoxyl is a product of the putrefaction of trypto- phane and is formed in the intestine from proteins and being absorbed is eliminated in the urine, principally as indoxyl sulphuric acid, which is analogous to phenol sul- phuric acid (180) in its constitution. The formation of indigo is the basis of the indican reaction of urine. 226. Indigo : /^ C— O IH O Hi O— C- + NH CH O HC NH 2 Indoxyl /\ CO oc- /\ NH NH Indigo blue Indigo white is a reduction product of indigo blue /% rnw Trnr /\ NH COH HOC I C— C Indigo white NH 398 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine 227. Tryptophane, or a-amino, yS-indole propionic acid, is /\ p-CHs— CH— COOH NH a constituent of many proteins. It is the complex which gives Adamkiewic's reaction for proteins (Hopkins-Cole reaction). It is a colorless crystalline compound readily soluble in hot water, but difficultly soluble in cold. Insoluble in absolute alcohol-and in ether. It is soluble in hot pyridine. It melts at 252° after becoming brown at 240°. It is a weak base and forms salts with acids. Some of its acyl derivatives formed by the action of acid chlorides are of experimental value because of their properties. Trypto- phane is destroyed in the hydrolysis of proteins by mineral acids, but is stable to barium hydrate. Tryptophane gives a red color when a trace of bromine is added to its solutions acid with acetic acid. With con- centrated sulphuric acid and glyoxylic acid it gives a reddish violet color. Persons suffering from melanotic tumor excrete a pig- mented substance called melanin in the urine. It has been rendered highly probable that the tryptophane complex in the protein molecule is the chief precursor of melanin in such subjects. The more important products resulting from trypto- phane in biological processes are represented by the fol- lowing transformations : Heterocyclic Compounds 399 CHAPTER XXI THE TERPENES 228. Many of the volatile oils of plants are esters, but others which are contained especially in the flowers and stems of various coniferae consist of .hydrocarbons of several types and their derivatives. These are grouped together as terpenes. Turpentine consists of a mixture of these, some liquid and holding in solution the solid forms. On distilling with steam the lighter members pass over, and the solid residue remaining behind is colophony. Most of the terpenes correspond to the formula CioHi 6 . They are with few exceptions unsaturated, and are color- less, highly refractive liquids, boiling between 155 and 180°. Camphene is, however, a solid. They can be distilled with steam and have pleasant odors. They are soluble in many organic solvents, but not in water. The terpenes dissolve sulphur, phosphorus, iodine, rubber, and resins, and are much employed as solvents in varnishes, paints and in, the arts. In most cases they contain one or more asymmetric carbon atoms and are therefore optically active, since, generally speaking, but one form occurs in nature. There are a few instances in which both optical forms occur naturally. They are easily decomposed by acids. The terpenes yield addition products with nitrosyl chloride. From this on heating with alcoholic potassium 400 "The Terpenes 401 hydroxide HC1 is split off, leaving a nitroso compound. They add on ozone at the points of double linkage, form- ing ozonides of the general type : \ CH \CH + 3 = ^X)3 The ozonides on treatment with water are decomposed into aldehydes : x:h v r— cho I >03+H 2 0= +HA yCW R— CHO R/ The terpenes by virtue of their unsaturated character form addition products with halogens. On reduction they are converted into hydroterpenes. On exposure to air they are oxidized to resins. They polymerize also to form resins. On oxidation with potassium permanganate they are in many cases oxidized to benzene derivatives. The terpenes may be considered as derived from hydro- carbons of the composition CfiH 8 , of which isoprene (82) is an example. Two or more molecules of this substance can polymerize to form in the first instance a hydrocarbon, C10H16, or to a polyterpene, (C 6 H8)„, of unknown mole- cular weight. The compounds of this series found in nature warrant the classification : 2d 402 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine 1. Hemiterpenes CsHs 3. Sesquiterpenes C15H24 2. Terpenes C10H16 4. Diterpenes C2 0H32 5. Polyterpenes (C 5 H 8 > The structure of many natural terpenes has been deter- mined and many have been prepared synthetically. The formulae assigned to a few of those possessing open and closed chains are shown, but it would be beyond the scope of this book to give in detail the methods employed in proving their structures : CH 2 ^ / CHs y-C CH2 CH2 CIl2 CH ch/ \ rn „_ ( CH 2 — CH2OH Citronellol (Lemon oil) > >C=CH— CH 2 — CH 2 — C^ CHa/ ^CH— CH2OH 8~ Geraniol (Oil of geranium) GIl3y /CH3 i CH3. / CB3 >C=CH— CH 2 — CH 2 — C— CH=CH 2 Ch/ \ 0H Linalool (Oil of lavender) CH 3 v ^CH 2 ~H 2 — C< Myroene \c=CH— CH 2 — CH 2 — c/ CH/ X CH=CH 2 Another class of terpenes are derivatives of hydro ben- zene. Thus menthane is closely related to cymene, which is a constituent of many volatile oils of plants : The Terpenes 403 CH3 I C /\ HC CH II I HC CH c CHs I CH I A TI HtC CH2 ±12 1 1 H 2 C CH \^ C CH /\ CH3 CHs Cymene + 2H CH /\ CH3 CH3 Menthene CHs I CH /\ H2C CH2 . I I H2C CH2 \/ CH I CH /\ CH3 CHs Menthane In certain cases it is necessary, in order to account for all the facts, to assign still more complex structures to individ- ual terpenes. Thus pinene, CioHie, is believed to have the structure : H 2 C HO- \ CH 2 /CHs \CH3 CH CH3 Finene 404 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine CH CH 3 Borneol Assuming the skeleton illustrated and a union between carbon atoms 2 and 8, pinene consists of a six-membered and a four-membered ring. Borneol is believed to have a union between 8 and 1, giving the formula shown above. d-pinene is the chief constituent of turpentine from America, Algeria, and Greece, while that from France and Spain is 1-pinene. d-borneol is found in the product from Borneo and Sumatra. Camphor is a sesquiterpene from the camphor tree. It is now made from pinene by oxidation. It differs from pinene in containing a ketone group. 229. The Cholesterols are closely related to the ter- penes. While they resemble the hard fats in their phys- ical properties, they differ from these in their remarkable stability toward oxidation. Micro-organisms do not attack them and they appear to be formed in every cell for protective purposes, and they play an important role in the living protoplasm by reason of their peculiar physi- The Terpenes 405 cal properties. The structure of cholesterol is not entirely known, but Windaus assigns to it the following partial provisional constitution : 3N >CH— CH 2 — CH 2 — CuHxr CH^ CH CH H2C CH CH — CH3 I I I H 2 C CH2 CH \/ II CHOH CH 2 The nature of the complex CuHn is entirely unknown. The properties of cholesterol have already been described (99). CHAPTER XXII THE ALKALOIDS The term alkaloid now includes those basic substances occurring in plants which are derived from pyridine, quinoline, isoquinoline, tropaine, or pyrrolidine. 230. Piperine, G7H19NO3, is a derivative of pyridine. On hydrolysis it yields piperidine and an acid, piperic acid, which may be regarded as the methylene ester of cinna- menylacrylic acid : CH 2 X/ =CH— CH =CH— CO OH + H J Methylene cinnamenyl group Acrylic acid group H 2 C H 2 C N CH 2 CH 2 \/ CH 2 Piperidine Piperine is a white solid substance melting at 128°. It does not dissolve in water, but is soluble in alcohol and ether. Black pepper contains about 8 per cent of this alkaloid. 231. Coniine, CsHnN, is the poisonous principle of the hemlock. It is dextrorotatory «-n-propylpiperidine. It is a strong base which distills with steam when the seeds 406 The Alkaloids 407 of hemlock are distilled with sodium hydroxide. It was the first of the alkaloids to be synthesized. The steps by which Ladenburg accomplished this are as follows : /\ /\ /\ ' N Pyridine CH 3 I > Heat — CH3 N CHs I Pyridine methiodide N a-methy t pyridine (a-picoline) OHC— CH 3 >■ (acetaldehyde) /\ V N + 6H > CH 2 /\ H2C CH2 -CH=CH— CH» a-allyl pyridine H2C CH — CH2 — CH2 — CH3 \^ N a-propyl-piperidine (coniine) 232. Nicotine, C10H14N3, contains both a piperidine and a pyrrolidine ring. It is a colorless oily substance which CH2 H2C — CH2 /\ I I H 2 C CH CH CH 2 I I \/ H 2 C CH 2 N \y 1 . NH CH, 408 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine boils at 247° and has an unpleasant smell and an ex- tremely burning taste. Naturally occurring nicotine is levorotatory. The synthetic product is inactive, and d-nicotine has been prepared from it and from the natural product after racemization. The physiological effects of the natural form are twice as pronounced as are those of the optical isomer d-nicotine. It is extremely poisonous. The alkaloids are not found generally distributed in plants, but certain ones are produced only by particular plant groups. The formation of pyrrolidine from tetra- methylene diamine (117) and piperidine from pentamethyl- ' ene diamine (320) give a clue to their mode of formation in the metabolism of the plant. These are formed from ornithine and lysine respectively, both of which amino acids occur in the course of protein decomposition. The formation of alkaloids is doubtless, closely associated with the protein metabolism of the plant. 233. Hygrine, an alkaloid found in coca leaves, is /3-acetyl-N-methyl pyrrolidine : H 2 C— CH— CO— CHa I I H2C CH2 V N I CH3 234. Atropine and Hyoscyamine differ chemically only in respect to their optical properties, the former being the d,l- and the latter the 1-hyoscyamine. Atropine is found in the deadly nightshade and in henbane, and The Alkaloids 409 hyoscyamine in the Jamestown weed, Datura stramonium. It is a white crystalline substance melting at 115°, readily soluble in alcohol, ether, and chloroform, but sparingly soluble in water. It is one of the most poisonous substances known. On hydrolysis atropine yields tropic acid and tropine. Tropic acid has been shown to be «-phenyl-/8-hydroxy propionic acid: CH 2 OH "I CH — CeHs I COOH Tropine is made up of two condensed rings, one with five members, the other with six, a nitrogen atom serving as a " bridge." H2C CH CH2 H 2 C N— CH 3 I -CH Tropine H 2 C- H 2 C- CHOH I -CH 2 CH- -CH— COOH N— CH 3 I -CH CHOH I -CH 2 Ecgonine Atropine is the ester of tropic acid with the secondary alcohol tropine. 235. Cocaine, Ci 7 H 2 iN0 4 , is an alkaloid in coca leaves. It is crystalline and melts at 98°. On hydrolysis it yields methyl alcohol, benzoic acid, and ecgonine. Its formula is : 410 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine H 2 C CH HC— COOCH3 I I N— CH3 CH— OOC— CeHs I I H 2 C CH CH2 236. Cinchonine, C19H22N2O, present with quinine in cinchona bark, yields cinchonic acid or quinoline car- boxylic acid and a piperidine derivative. The structure of quinine is similar but is not known with certainty. It yields both quinoline and pyridine deriva- tives on hydrolysis. 237. Strychnine, C21H22N2O2 ; Brucine, C23H26N2O4, and Curarine are all present in the seeds of Strychnos nux vomica and other plants of that family. They are all extremely poisonous. Strychnine yields both quinoline and indol on fusion with alkalies. The constitution of these alkaloids is not known. 238. Morphine, C17H19NO3, occurs in the juice of the poppy. There are a number of other alkaloids in the plant. Opium is the dried juice of the seed capsule of Papaver somniferum, a variety of poppy. It contains other alka- loids as well as a large number of substances such as fats, resins, proteins, sugars, inorganic salts, etc. 239. Papaverine, Narcotine, Narceine, Laudanosine, are all found in opium along with morphine. They are derivatives of isoquinoline. CHAPTER XXIII ORGANIC ARSENIC COMPOUNDS 240. Cacodylic acid, (CH 3 ) 2 AsO— OH. This organic arsenic derivative is formed when potassium acetate is distilled with arsenic trioxide. The principal reaction is represented by the following equation : ASA + 4CH3— COOK = (CH 3 ) 2 =As— O— As=(CH,), + 2 K 2 CO s + 2 CO* Caoodyl oxide The distillate is an oily liquid with an overpowering odor and extremely poisonous properties. The radical — As(CH3) 2 corresponds to — N(CH 3 ) 2 . In the distillate ' is also a substance called cacodyl: (CH 3 ) 2 =As— As=(CH3) 2 Cacodyl Cacodyl and its homologues are analogous to the sub- stituted hydrazines R 2 =N — N=R 2 . Cacodyl oxide when treated with hydrochloric acid yields cacodyl chloride : (CH3) 2 =As— O— As=(CH3) 2 + HC1 =2(CH3) 2 As— CI Both cacodyl and cacodyl oxide are converted into caco- dylic acid by oxidation. The most important salt is the sodium salt, which has been much used in medicine. It corresponds to the formula (CH 3 ) 2 AsO— ONa+3H 2 411 412 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine This salt is a white crystalline powder which dissolves readily in water. It is much less poisonous than are the salts of arsenious acid. 241. Arrhenal, sodium methyl arsenate, CH 3 — AsO(ONa) 2 , is formed by the action of methyl iodide on sodium arsenate in alkaline solution : /ONa /CH 3 O = As^ONa + CH 3 I = O = As— ONa + NalO \ONa \ONa The great stability of these arsenic derivatives containing aliphatic radicals, and the correspondingly slight arsenical effect which follows their administration, has led to the substitution in great measure of aromatic arsenic com- pounds in medicine. 242. Atoxyl, sodium p-amino-phenyl-arsenate, is formed when aniline and arsenic acid are heated together. As an intermediate product, aniline arsenate, is formed : /OH C 6 H 6 NH 2 + As(OH)3 = C6H 6 NH3— OAs=0 Anilin arsenate >vOTT /OH NH 2 — C 6 H 4 As==0 \0H p-amino-phenyl-arsenic acid /ONa Acetyl atoxyl, CH 3 — CO— NH— C 6 H 4 — As=0 , is also \OH Acetyl atoxyl employed as a compound for the slow administration of arsenic in medicine. Organic Arsenic Compounds 413 Salvarsan, an arsenic compound having a peculiar specific toxic effect upon the protozoa causing syphilis, is one of the most valuble remedies yet discovered. It is p-dihydroxy-m-diamino-arseno-benzene. The following reactions illustrate its preparation : NH 2 NH 2 HO<^ ^>As = As/ ~\0H )As = As/ ~\( p-dihydroxy-m-diamino-arseno-benzene On heating phenol with arsenic acid, condensation takes place at the para position : /OH RO^~ ^>H + HO— As =0 \)H Am = H0/ Nas=0 +H 2 ^OH p-phenol arsenic acid On nitration this yields a nitro derivative having the — N0 2 group in the o- position to the — OH. On complete reduction of this compound the nitro group is converted into an amino group and the oxygen is removed from the arsenic acid group, the two residues are condensed : N0 2 JOB. 2 HO/" "\As=0 +20H V - y ,\)H NH 2 NH 2 = H0<^ ^>As=As/ ~\)H + 10 H 2 414 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Salvarsan is a derivative of arseno-benzene, C 6 H B — As=As— C 6 H 6 which is analogous to azo benzene : CeH 6 — N=N — CeH 6 . THE PROTEINS 243. The proteins form a very important group of sub- stances which constitute the greater part of the solids of animal tissues and are present in all tissues of both animal and plant origin. Typical proteins are the white of egg, casein of milk, which is the part separated in the curdling of milk, hair, nails, silk, etc. Chemically the proteins are made up of amino acids ; seventeen of these, glycocoll, alanine, valine, leucine and isoleucine, phenylalanine, tyrosine, serine, cystine, pro- line, oxyproline, aspartic acid, glutaminic acid, arginine, lysine, histidine, and tryptophane have been isolated and identified. These have all been described in this book. It is possible that there are others as yet unidentified. The proteins differ most widely in their physical properties, some being soluble in water (albumins), others insoluble in water, but soluble in dilute salt solutions (globulins), others insoluble in both these solvents, but soluble in dilute acids or alkalies (glutelins). There is a class called prolamines, which are especially abundant in wheat, rye, barley, and maize, which are insoluble in water or salt solutions, but dissolve readily in 70-80 per cent alcohol. Nearly all proteins contain sulphur, and a few also contain phosphorus; the latter occur only in milk and in eggs. The Proteins 415 Simple proteins on hydrolysis with mineral acids yield only a-amino acids. The structure of the proteins has been made clear by the work of E. Fischer, who has produced numerous synthetic products closely similar to the natural. The proteins consist of amino acids in " peptide " union with each other. This union results from the interaction of the carboxyl group of one with the a-amino group of another : CHjs— CH— CO l OH +H| HN— CH 2 — COOH ! Glycine (glycocoll) NH 2 = CH,— CH— CO— NH— CH 2 — COOH Alanine I NH 2 Alanyl-glycine CH3— CH— CO— NH— CH 2 — CO . I NH 2 OH H [HN- CH 2 — CbHb I -CH COOH Phenylalanine = CH3— CH— CO— NH— CH 2 — CO— NH— CH CH 2 — CeHg I NH 2 COOH Alanyl-glycyl phenylalanine Such complexes are called di-, tri-, tetra-, etc. peptides ac- cording to the number of amino acid molecules which they contain. The number of compounds which it is possible to form from seventeen amino acids arranged in different orders is extremely great and readily accounts for the very numerous proteins found in the plant and animal world. 416 Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Proteins are known which consist of the three diamino acids arginine, lysine, and histidine, and arginine in one instance constitutes about 85 per cent of the total nitro- gen content. These are termed protamines and occur only in the heads of the spermatozoa of animals. Proteins differ greatly in the proportions of the different amino acids which they yield. Glutamic acid occurs to the extent of 40 per cent in certain of the wheat proteins (gliadin) and as little as 2 per cent in the globulin globin of the blood. Silk is more than half made up of peptide combinations of glycocoll and alanine. Tryptophane, tyrosine, and cystine are all lacking from gelatin, derived by the incipient hydrolysis of connective tissue, the organic matrix of bones, etc. A few yield no glycocoll. In digestion by enzymes such as pepsin or trypsin the peptide linkages are broken, the elements of water being taken up to form an amino and a carboxyl group, i.e. digestion is the reverse of the process described in the for- mation of the peptides. THE CONJUGATED PEOTEINS The proteins also exist in nature in certain instances in union with other substances as phosphoric acid (phos- phoproteins), glucosamine (glycoproteins), nucleic acids (nucleoproteins), etc. The chemistry of the proteins is so extensive and involves a consideration of their physical properties as colloids, as well as their chemical constitution, that it properly belongs in the special branch of physiological chemistry and will not be further dealt with here. INDEX Absolute alcohol, 25. Acetal, 59. Acetaldehyde, 53, 65. Acetaldoxime, 63, 72, 88. Acetamide, 104. Acetanilide, 361. Acetate, ethyl, 103. Acetic acid, 53, 71, 77, 99, 101, anhydride, 126. ester, 103. Aceto-acetic acid, 236, 237. ester, 238-241. Acetone, 68, 69, 73, 102, 236. dicarboxylic acid, 244. Aceto nitrile, 78. Acetoxime, 72. Acetylation, 103, 188. Acetyl chloride, 95. number, 188. urea, 253. Acetylene, 163, 166, 347. Acetylenes, 161, 162. Achroodextrine, 330. Acid amides, 104. anhydrides, 126. chlorides, 95, 103. number, 183. ureides, 260. Acids, amino, 120, 137, 139, 206, 208, 368, 398. dibasic, 199. fatty, 95-151. monobasic, 95. Acrolein, 168, 289. Acrose, 290. Acrylic acid, 173, 407. Acylation, 122, 127. Addition compounds, 58. Adenase, 279. Adenine, 278. 2e Adipic acid, 208, 212. Adonite, 296. Adrenin, 376. iEtioporphyrin, 221. Alanine, 137, 415. Alanyl-glycine, 415. Alanyl-glycyl-phenylalanine, 415. Albumins, 414. Alcohol, 24, 106, 201, 340. Alcoholates, 26. Alcoholic fermentation, 338. Alcohols, 22. Aldehyde, 53. ammonia, 58, 66. Aldehydes, 53, 56. aromatic, 354, 379. Aldol, 61. condensation, 61. Aldose, 284. Aldoximes, 63, 72. Aliphatic series, 1—21. Alizerin, 386, 387. Alkaloids, 406. Alkaptonuria, 376. Alkyl ammonias, 85, 90. anilines, 361. cyanates, 112. cyanides, 77, 78. i ! 7, halides, 12. isocyanates, 80, 81. isocyanides, 79, 80. thiocyanates, 80, 81. Allantoine, 256. Allene, 161. Alloxan, 261, 262. Alloxantine, 263. Allyl alcohol, 167. isothiocyanate, 169. pyridine, 407. sulphide, 169. 417 418 Index Aluminum carbide, 166. Amides, 98, 104. Amines, 84, 87, 94. Aminoaoetie acid, 120. o- Amino acids, 109. /3-Amino acids, 169. 7-Amino acids, 237. Amino benzene, 359. ' glucose, 334. glutaric acid, 208. isocaproic acid, 147. iso valerianic acid, 143. naphthalene, 384. nitrogen, 121. oxypurine, 278. propionic acid, 137, 415. purine, 278. Ammonium carbamate, 110. formate, 77. isocyanate, 111. thiocyanate, 115. urate, 272. Amygdalin, 324. Amyl alcohols, 30. nitrate, 48. nitrite, 48. Amylase, 329. Amylum, 329. Anhydrides, acid, 126. Aniline, 359, 36.1. Anthracene, 385. Anthraquinone, 386. Antipyrine, 259. Araban, 332. Arabinose, 296. Arabite, 296. Arachic acid, 151. Arginine, 118. Argol, 231. Aromatic compounds, 346. Arrhenal, 412. Arsenic, compounds, organic, 411. Asparagine, 207. Aspartic acid, 206. Aspirin, 381. Asymmetric carbon atom, 34, 206. Atoxyl, 412. Atropine, 408. Azeliac acid, 173, 213. Azo benzene, 414. dyes, 390. Barbituric acid, 261. Beeswax, 192. Behenic acid, 151. Benzal chloride, 355, 377. Benzaldehyde, 354, 379. Benzene, 347, 352, 363. sulphonic acid, 364. sulphonyl chloride, 364. Benzoic acid, 354, 377. Benzoin, 380. Benzo nitrile, 363. trichloride, 355, 377. Benzoyl glycine, 378. Benzyl alcohol, 377, 379. chloride, 355, 377. Betaine, 125. Betaines, 125. Beverages, alcoholic, 27. Biuret, 112. Bone oil, 392. Borneol, 403. Brilliant green, 388. Brom benzene, 363. Brucine, 410. Burning point, 15. Butane, 13, 18. Butter fat, 176. Butyl alcohols, 28. Butylenes, 162. Butyric acids, 140. fermentation, 342. Butyro betaine, 125. Cacodyl compounds, 411. Cadaverine, 147. Caffeine, 281. Calcium carbide, 165. Camphor, 403. Cane sugar, 318, 328. Cannizarro reaction, 61. Capric acid, 151, 240. Caproic acid, 146, 151, 345. Caprylic acid, 151. Caramel, 319. Carbamic acid, 110, 255. esters, 116. Index 419 Carbamide, 111, 113. Carbides, 165. Carbinol, 23, 57. Carbohydrates, 283-337. action of enzymes on, 319-329. fermentation, 338-342. in nucleic acids, 301. in proteins, 334. Carbolic acid, 365. Carbon atom, asymmetric, 31-35. monoxide, 97, 98. tetrachloride, 9. Carbonyl, 57. chloride, 9. Carboxylase, 341. Carboxyl group, 57. Carbylamine reaction, 89. Carnauba wax, 191. Carnaubyl alcohol, 36. Carvicrol, 374. Casein, 414. Castor oil, 177. Catalytic action, 55. Catechol, 376. Cellulose, 330. acetates, 331. Centric formula of benzene, 349. Cerebrosides, 197. Cerotic acid, 151. Ceryl alcohol, 36, 191. Cetyl alcohol, 36. Chinese wax, 191. Chinovose, 303. Chitin, 334. Chitoaan, 334. Chitose, 336. Chloracetic acids, 107, 205. Chloral, 60, 66. hydrate, 60, 67. Chlor benzenes, 358. Chlorhydrins, 39, 41. Chloroform, 9. Chlorophyll, 222. Chlor propionic acid, 137. Chlortoluenes, 365. Cholesterols, 404. Choline, 92, 125, 196. Cinchonine, 410. Cinnamic acid, 381. Cis form, 171. Citric acid, 245. CitroneUol, 402. Coal gas, 1. tar, 352. Cocaine, 409. Cocoa butter, 176. Collidines, 393. Collodion, 331. Colophony, 400. Color reactions of proteins, 368,398. Congo red, 390. Coniferin, 375. Coniferyl alcohol, 374. Coniine, 406. Conjugated proteins, 416. Constitution of proteins, 415. Coprosterol, 19,8. Cordite, 40. Cream of tartar, 231. Creatine, 123. Creatinine, 124. Cresols, 367. Crotonic acids, 1'69, 173, 236. Croton oil, 177. Cyanamide, 83, 116, 118. Cyanates, 82, 112. Cyanides, 78, 79. alkyl, 78. Cyano benzene, 363. Cyanogen, 199. Cyanuric acid, 113. Cyclohexane, 211. Cymene, 357. Cystine, 139. Cytosine, 264, 265. Deamination of amino acids, 121, 370, 399. Denatured alcohol, 26. Desaturation of fats, 172. Dextrins, 330. Dextrose, 304. Diacetyl urea, 253. Dialuric acid, 261. Diamines, 147, 408. Diamino acids, 118, 125, 146, 257. caproic acid, 147. valerianic acid, 29, 143. 420 Index Diastase (see amylase). Diatomic alcohols, 37. Diazo benzene, 362. reaction, 362. Diazonium salts, 363. Dibasic acids, 199. acid ureides, 259. Dichlor acetic acid, 107. hydrin, 41. Diethyl aniline, 361. arsine, 11. sulphite, 47. Digallic acid, 382. Digitalin, 323. Dihydroxy acetic acid, 256. acetone, 75, 340. benzenes, 371. succinic acid, 227, 249. Dimethyl amine, 85, 91. aniline, 361. benzenes, 352, 356. selenide, 11. sulphate, 44. > telluride, 11. xanthine, 281. Diolefines, 161. Diose, 294. Dioxypurine, 277. Dipeptides, 415. Diphenyl amine, 361. methane, 357. Disaccharides, 318. hydrolysis by enzymes, 319, 321. Diterpenes, 402. Dodecyl alcohol, 36. Double bond, 154, 169, 172. Dry distillation of wood, 100. Drying oils, 176. Dulcite, 303. Dyes, 387-390. Ecgonine, 409. Egg albumen, 414. Elaidic acid, 172. Elaidin test, 189. Empirical formula, 8. Emulsin, 324. Emulsions, 182. Enantiomorphs, 134. Enol form, 241. Enzymes, 338, 341. Eosin, 390. Erythrite, 42, 294. Erythrodextrine, 330. Erythrose, 294. Esters, 44. Ethanal, 65. Ethane, 10. Ethanol, 24. Ethers, 44, 48. Ethyl acetate, 103. alcohol, 24'. amine, 78, 79, 85, 91. carbinol, 24. chloride, 12, 13. ether, 48. mercaptan, 43. nitrate, 48. ; nitrite, 47. radical, 12. sulphates, 44, 49. sulphuric acid, 44, 45. sulphurous acid, 47. Ethylate, sodium, 26. Ethylene, 154. chloride, 14, 247. cyanide, 205. dibromide, 158, 163. glycol, 37. oxide, 38. Ethylidene .chloride, 14. cyanhydrin, 58. glycol, 59. Fats,' 175, 178. emulsiflcation of, 182. saponification of, 179. Fatty acids, 95-151, 343. Fehling's solution, 58. Fermentation, 338-342. Fittig's reaction, 11. Flash point, 15. Fluorescene, 390. Formaldehyde, 54, 63. Formalin, 63. Formamide, 98. Formic acid, 61, 71, 77, 96. nitrile, 77. Index 421 Formol titration, 88. Formose, 64, 289. Formula, empirical, 8. general, 14. graphic, 6, 8. Friedal and Crafts reaction, 353. Fructosazine, 268. Fructose, 307. Fruit sugar, 307. Fucose, 303. Fulminic acid, 82. Fumaric acid, 247-252. Furfural, 292. Furfurane, 293. Fusel oil, 29, 31, 145. Galactan, 317, 332. Galactose, 306, 317. Gallic acid, 382. Gelatin, 416. Geraniol, 402. Glacial acetic acid, 102. Gliadin, 416. Globulins, 414. Gluconic acid, 313. ■ Glucosamine, 334, 416. Glucosan, 313. Glucose, 304, 312. Glucosides, 323, 324. Glutamic acid, 208. Glutamine, 208. Glutaric acid, 207. anhydride, 215. Glutarimide, 216. Glyceraldehyde, 68, 288, 340. Glyceric acid, 230. Glycerides, 175. Glycerol, 39, 288. Glycero-phosphoric acid, 193. Glycerose, 294. Glyceryl esters, 175. Glycine, 120. Glycocoll, 120. Glycogen, 333. Glycol, 37, 106, 109, 201. aldehyde, 67, 106, 109. chlorhydrin, 39. Glycolic acid, 108, 225, 254. ureides, 254. Glycolide, 225. Glycoluric acid, 254. Glycuronic acid, 313. Glyoxal, 68, 285. Glyoxaline derivatives, 256. Glyoxylic acid, 109. Granulose, 329. Grape sugar, 312. Gualtherin, 324. Guanase, 280. Guanidine, 117. Guanine, 278. Guiachol, 371. Gums, 333. Guncotton, 331. Hfflmatin, 219. Hremin, 220. Haemoglobin, 220. Hsemoporphyrin, 221. Halogen derivatives of fatty acids, 107. derivatives of hydrocarbons, 3, 12, 13, 358. Hedonal, 117. Helianthin, 390. Hemicellulose, 332. Hemiterpenes, 402. Heptadecane, 16. Heptamethylene, 213. Heptanes, 16. Heptyl alcohol, 36. Heterocyclic compounds, 391. Hexabromide test, 189. Hexahydric alcohols, 295. Hexahydro benzene, 347. Hexamethylene, 213, 347. tetramene, 63. Hexane, 16. Hexoses, 295, 296, 303, 311. Hexyl alcohol, 36. iodide, 287. Hippuric acid, 378. Histamine, 257. Histidine, 125, 257. Homogentisic acid, 375. Homologous series, 12. Hormones, 376. Hydantoic acid, 255. 422 Index Hydantoin, 254, 255. Hydrazine, 62. Hydrazones, 72, 285. Hydro aromatic compounds, 347. Hydrocarbons, 1, 154, 163, 347. saturated, 1-21. unsaturated, 154, 163. Hydrocyanic acid, 77, 199. Hydroquinone, 372. Hydroxy acids, 108. aldehydes, 67, 109. benzoic acid, 381. butyric acid, 169, 235. Hydroxyl group, 220, 383. Hydroxyphenyl acetic acid, 370. alanine, 368. ethyl amine, 370. propionic acid, 370. Hydroxyproline, 224. Hydroxypropionic acid, 129. Hygrine, 408. Hyoscyamine, 408. Hypoxanthine, 277. Idose, 306. Imidazoles, 257. acrylic acid, 257. amino-propionic acid, 125, 257. ethyl amine, 257. Imides, 216- Imino group, 216. Inactive tartaric acid, 229, 232. India rubber, 161. Indican, 397, 399. Indigo, 397. white, 397. Indole, 395, 399. acetic acid, 399. amino-propionic acid, 399. ethyl amine, 399. propionic acid, 399. Indoxyl, 396, 399. Ink, 382. Inosite, 373. Internal compensation, 229, 297. Inulin, 336. Inversion, 319. Invertase, 319. Invert sugar, 319, Iodine number, 186. Iodobenzene, 359, 363. Iodoform, 74. Isoamylamine, 92. Isobutane, 18. Isobutyl alcohol, 29, 145. amine, 92. Isobutyric acid, 75, 141. Isocyanates, alkyl, 80. ' Isocyanides, alkyl, 78, 80. Isohsemopyrrol , 219. Isoleucine, 149. Isomaltose, 320. Isomers, 19, 34. Isonicotinic acid, 394. Isonitrile reaction, 89. Isonitriles, 77, 78, 80. Isophonopyrrol carboxylic acid, 219. Isophthalic acid, 356. Isoprene, 161. Isopropyl alcohol, 28, 70. iodide, 42. Isoquinoline, 394. Isothiocyanates, alkyl, 80, 81. Isourea, 112. Isovalerianic acid, 143. Japan wax, 191. Keratins, 414. Kerosene, 15. Keto acids, 236, 237, 242. form, 241. Ketones, 53, 68. Ketoses, 307. Kiliani's reaction, 290. Kryptopyrrol, 219. Lactam, 237. Lactase, 321. Lactic acid, 129, 340. fermentation, 342. Lactones, 237. Lactose, 318, 321. Lanolin, 192. Laurie acid, 151. Lavender oil, 402. Lecithins, 93, 193. Index 423 Leucine, 147. Levulinic acid, 243. Levulose, 307. Lignin, 331. Ligroin, 15. Linoleic acid, 174. Linolic acid, 173. Lipase, 178, 180. Lutidines, 393. Lysine, 146. Lyxose, 296. Magenta, 389. Magnesium in chlorophyll, 222. Malachite green, 388. Maleic acid, 247-251. Malic acid, 226, 249. Malonic acid, 202. Malonic ester synthesis, 203. Malonyl urea, 261. Maltose, 318, 320, 327. Mandelic acid, 324, 380. Mannan, 312. Mannite, 312. Mannose, 312. Marsh gas, 1, 2, 3, 6. Melibiose, 323. Melissic acid, 151, 191. Melting point, 183. Menthane, 403. Menthene, 403. Mercaptans, 42, 81. Mesitylene, 356. Mesotartaric acid, 229, 232. Mesoxalic acid, 242. Mcsoxalyl urea, 261. Meta derivatives, 348. Metaldehyde, 66. Methane, 1. Methylal, 64. Methyl alcohol, 22. amine, 85, 90. aniline, 361. benzene, 352, 354. chloride, 3. glycosides, 325. glyoxal, 340. guanidine acetic acid, 124. imidazole, 315. iodide, 10. mercaptan, 43. methylene amine, 88. nitrile, 77. nonyl-ketone, 240. pentose, 303. phenylhydrazine, 317. urea, 112. Methylene, 5, 9, 154. amino acids, 122. chloride, 4, 9. Millon's reaction, 369. Mixed ethers, 52. Molasses, 318. Monochlorhydrin, 41. Morphine. 410. Mucic acid, 235, 317. Mucilages, 333. Murexide reaction, 263. Muscarine, 125, 196. Mustard oil, 169. Myrcene, 402. Myricyl alcohol, 36, 191. Myristic acid, 151. Myrosin, 324. Myrtleberry wax, 191. Naphtha, 15. Naphthalene, 384. Narcotine, 410. Neurine, 93, 195. Nicotine, 407. Nicotinic acid, 393. Nitriles, 77. Nitrobenzene, 359. Nitrocellulose, 331. Nitroglycerine, 40. Nitroso compounds, 393. Nonyl alcohol, 36. Normal carbon chains, 18. Nucleic acids, 301. Octadecyl alcohol, 36. Octane, 16. Octyl alcohol, 36. Oil, olive, 176. Oils, 176. drying, 176. defines, 153. 424 Index Oleic acid, 169, 172. Olein, 175. Optical activity, 32. Orein, 372. Ornithine, 119, 142. Ortho derivatives, 348. Osazones, 285, 311. Osones, 311. Oxalaeetic acid, 243. Oxalic acid, 106, 109, 199, 201, 202 nitrile, 199. Oxaluric acid, 259. Oxalyl urea, 260. Oximes, 63, 72. Oxy acids, 129, 237. /3-Oxybutyric acid, 169, 235. Oxydases, 54. Oxyethylamine, 92. Oxyphenylpropionic acid, 370. Oxyproline, 224. Oxypurines, 274, 277. Ozonides, 401. Palmitic acid, 151. Palmitin, 176. Papaverine, 410. Parabanic acid, 259. Para derivatives, 348. Paraffin, 16. Paraldehyde, 65. Pararosaniline, 388. Pectins, 333. Pelargonic acid, 173. Pentamethylene, 211. diamine, 147, 408. Pentanes, 19, 32. Pentosans, 332. Pentose in nucleic acids, 301. Pentoses, 295, 301. Peptides, 415. Petroleum, 15. benzine, 15. ether, 15. naphtha, 15. Phenates, 365. Phenol, 363, 365. ethers, 367. sulphonic acid, 366. Phenolphthalein, 389. Phenyl acetic acid, 380. alanine, 380. amine, 360. cyanide, 363. hydrazine, 285. methane, 352, 354. propionic acid, 380. radical, 360. sulphuric acid, 366. Phlorizin, 323. Phloroglucinol, 373. Phosphatides, 193. Phospho-proteins, 416. Phthalic acid, 356, 384. anhydride, 356. Phyllopyrrol, 219. Phytic acid, 372. Phytosterols, 197. Picolines, 393. Picolinic acid, 394. Picric acid, 368. Pimelic acid, 209, 213. Pinene, 403. Piperazine, 269, 270. Piperic acid, 406. Piperidine, 391, 392, 393. Piperine, 406. Polymerization, 64, 65, 164. Polysaccharides, 329. Polyterpenes, 402. Primary alcohols, 28. amines, 85. Proline, 223. betaine, 125. Propane, 13, 17. Propionic acid, 71, 127, 204. Propionitrile, 78. Propyl alcohol, 28. chloride, 17. Propylene, 159. glycol, 39. Propylidene chlorides, 160. Protamine, 416. Proteins, 414. conjugated, 416. Constitution, 415. hydrolysis, 416. putrefaction, 369. Protocatechuic acid, 374. Index 425 Pseudo urea, 112, 116. uric acid, 272. Psylla wax, 191. Purine, 275, 276. Purines, 270-282. Putrefaction, 369. Putrescine, 143. Pyrazines, 266. Pyrazole, 259. Pyridine, 392, 407. Pyrimidines, 264, 391. Pyrocatechin, 371. Pyrogallol, 373. Pyroligneous acid, 100. Pyromucic acid, 292. Pyroracemic acid, 230. Pyrrol, 216, 389. Pyrrolidine, 216, 222. carboxylic acid, 223. Pyrrolidone carboxylic acid, 224. Pyrroline, 216. Pyruvic acid, 131, 230, 340, 344. Quaternary amines, 86. Quinine, 410. Quinoline, 394. Quinolinic acid, 394. Quinone, 372. Racemic acid, 229, 232. Raffinose, 307, 323. Reichert-Meissl number, 187. Resorcin, 390. Resorcinol, 372. Rhamnose, 303. Rhigoline, 15. Ribose, 296. Ricinoleic acid, 177. Rochelle salt, 231. Rosaniline, 389. Ruberythric acid, 387. Saccharic acid, 235, 304, 313. Saccharin, 378. Salicin, 323, 381. Salicylic acid, 381. aldehyde, 381. Salol, 382. Salvarsan, 413. Sandmeyer reaction, 364. Saponification, 179, 180. number, 183. Sarcolactic acid, 133. Sarcosine, 124, 255. Scatole, 396, 399. Secondary alcohols, 28. Serine, 140. Sesquiterpenes, 402. Side chains, 350, 354. Silk, 416. Soaps, 179, 190. Sorbic acid, 344. Sorensen titration, 88, 122. Spermaceti, 192. Stachydrine, 125. Starch, 329. Stearic acid, 151. Stearin, 175. Stereoisomerism, 34. Sterols, 197. Strychnine, 410. Suberic acid, 209, 213. Succinic acid, 205. anhydride, 215. Succinimide, 216. Sucrose, 318, 328. Sugars, 283-323. Sulphonal, 74. Sulphur alcohols, 42, 81. Tannic acid, 382. Tannins, 382. Tartar emetic, 232. Tartaric acid, 227, 249, 294. Tartronic acid, 225, 294. Tartronyl urea, 261. Tautomerism, 276. Teraphthalic acid, 356. Terpenes, 400. Terpentine, 400. Tertiary alcohols, 28, 31. amines, 210. Tetrahydroxy dibasic acids, 235. Tetramethylene, 211. diamine, 143. Tetramethyl methane, 19. Tetroses, 294. Theobromine, 231. 426 Index Thio alcohols, 42, 81. Thiocyanates, alkyl, 80, 81. Thiourea, 115. Thymine, 264, 265. Thymol, 374. Toluene, 352, 354. Toluidines, 361, 389. Trans form, 171. Tribrom aniline, 360. phenol, 367. Trichlor acetic acid, 107. methane, 9. Trihydric alcohols, 39. phenols, 373. Trihydroxybenzenes, 373. Trihydroxy glutaric acid, 235. Triiodo propane, 39. Trimethyl amine, 85. Trimethylene, 210. Triolein, 172. Trioses, 294. Trioxyglutaric acid, 295. Trioxymethylene, 64. Trioxy purine, 271, 274. Tripeptides, 415. Triphenylamine, 362. Triphenyl methane, 357, 388. Triple bond, 163. Trisaccharides, 307, 323. Tropic acid, 409. Tropine, 409. Tryptophane, 398. Tunicin, 331. Turpentine, 400. Tyramine, 370. Tyrosine, 368, 375. Unsaponifiable residue, 184. Unsaturated acids, 169, 172, 173. aldehydes, 168. hydrocarbons, 153, 161. Uracil, 264, 266. Uramil, 263, 272. Urea, 111, 113. Urease, 115. Ureides, 253-263. Urethane, 117. Uric acid, 271, 274. Urocanic acid, 257. Urotropin, 63. Valerianic acid, 142. Valine, 29, 143. Vanillin, 374. Van Slyke reaction, 90. Varatric acid, 374. Vaseline, 16. Veratrol, 371. Veronal, 261. Vinegar, 53. Vinyl alcohol, 167. bromide, 159. Volatile fatty acids, 176, 177, 187. Walden's transformation, 138. Waxes, 190. Wohl's reaction, 290. Wood alcohol, 22. distillation, 100. Wool wax, 192. Xanthine, 277. oxidase, 280. Xylan, 332. Xylenes, 352, 356. Xylite, 296. Xylose, 296. Yeast, 24, 340. Zinc methyl, 10. Printed in the United States of America. HP HE following pages contain advertisements of a few of the Macmillan books on kindred subjects. NEW MEDICAL BOOKS The Treatment of Acute Infectious Diseases By FRANK SHERMAN MEARA, M.D. Professor of Therapeutics, Cornell Medical School Cloth, 8vo, $j.jo A widely known teacher has written this book along new and very unusual lines. The chapters deal with in- dividual diseases in a thoroughly practical manner, each little detail of procedure being explained so that the reader may actually apply it. The reason for each pro- cedure as based on our latest information is given with respect to both physical therapy and drugs. Of especial importance is the Summary at the end of each chapter, where the most important points of the chapter are tabulated for the use of the student's review and for the busy practitioner. In this way procedures that necessarily must be referred to again and again will have separate consideration and will be referred to in the individual instances. All material is thus imme- diately at hand without constant reference to other sources or other parts of the book. The work is unique in its conception and the material is authoritative in every way. THE MACMILLAN COMPANY Publishers 64-66 Fifth Avenue New York Medical and Veterinary Entomology By WILLIAM B. HERMS Associate Professor of Parasitology in the University of California Consulting Parasitologist for the California State Board of Health, etc. Cloth, 8vo, illustrated, $4.00 A work of interest to physicians, veterinarians, health officers, and sanitarians as well as to students. Herein is contained a discussion of all the more important insects and arachnids relating to disease and irritations of man and beast. The author has placed special emphasis on control and prevention. He has aimed to familiarize the student with the spqcific parasite treated in a chapter, its identity, life history, habits, relation to disease trans-, mission or causation, and to indicate methods for its control and prevention. There are 228 illustrations in the text, largely made from original photographs or drawings. Manual of Bacteriology By ROBERT MUIR, M.A., M.D., F.R.C.P. (Ed.) Professor of Pathology, University of Glasgow AND JAMES RITCHIE, M.A., M.D., F.R.C.P. (Ed.) Superintendent of the Royal College of Physicians' Laboratory, Edinburgh Formerly Professor of Pathology in the University of Oxford Sixth edition. With one hundred and seventy- four illustrations in the text and six colored plates. Cloth, 736 pp., bibliog., index, col. ill., izmo, $3.23 A new edition of this valuable work embodying im- portant recent additions in nearly every department of bacteriological research. Several new illustrations and a series of colored plates have also been added. THE MACMILLAN COMPANY Publishers 64-66 Fifth Avenue New York Infection and Resistance An Exposition of the Biological Phenomena underlying the Occurrence of Infection and the Recovery of the Animal Body from Infectious Disease. By HANS ZINSSER, M.D. Professor of Bacteriology at the College of Physicians and Surgeons Columbia University, New York With a Chapter on Colloids and Colloidal Reactions BY Professor STEWART W. YOUNG, Department of Chemistry Stanford University Crown 8vo, ill., bibliography, index, j^o pp., $3.50 Students and physicians will find this book an authoritative work which presents, with clearness and simplicity, the subjects of immunity and the forces of resistance to infectious diseases in the body. Recent developments have shown the great practical importance of these subjects to the student and general practitioner, as well as to the laboratory specialist. The material dealt with is fundamental to the comprehension of the processes involved in the occurrence and cure of infectious diseases, and a thorough study of it is essential as a. preparation for the study of infectious diseases in the clinic. A Laboratory Guide in Serum Study By HANS ZINSSER, M.D., J. G: HOPKINS, M.D., REUBEN OTTENBERG, M.D. Svo, $1.25 This book consists of a series of experiments and diagnostic tests in Im- munology, carried out in a course given to medical and graduate students in the Department of Bacteriology at Columbia. The prerequisite theoretical knowledge is presented in a series of lectures based on Dr. Zinsser's textbook, " Infection and Resistance," to which this Laboratory Guide is complementary. It will, therefore, be of immense help to both student and teacher in this course, which is of ever-increasing importance in the medical schools. The full details of the course are given in the Laboratory Guide so that the theoretical side con- tained in the textbook may be practically applied and the two thoroughly coordinated. THE MACMILLAN COMPANY Publishers 64-66 Fiftft Avenue New Tork Diseases of Nutrition and Infant Feeding By JOHN LOVETT MORSE, A.M., M.D. Professor of Pediatrics, Harvard Medical School, Visiting Physician af trie Children's Hospital, etc. FRITZ B. TALBOT, A.B., M.D. Instructor in Pediatrics, Harvard Medical School, Chief of Children's Medical Department, Massachusetts General Hospital, etc. Cloth, Crown 8vo, 34.6 pp., index, $2.30 This important new work is based on the unique methods of the Pediatric Department of the Harvard Medical School. By these methods the food is fitted to the baby and not the baby to. the food, while all procedures are presented for a definite reason and on a scientific basis. There has, up to the present, been no book in English presenting in detail the physiology of digestion and metabolism in infancy — which must form the basis of all scientific and rational , infant feeding — and none describing in detail how to feed babies according to the indications in the individual case. The authors first present the scientific facts on which each condition is based, and then apply them practically and in detail. This is a book which medical men in this country have long been looking for, in that it now makes available, in practical form, the best medical knowledge on this subject. Lectures on the Nervous and Chemical Regulators of Metabolism By D. NOEL PATON, M.D., B. Sc. Professor of Physiology in the University of Glasgow Cloth, 21J pp., bibliog., 8vo, $2.00 The majority of books thus far published on the action of the ductless glands are so technical, elaborate and large, that they are obsolete before they can be thoroughly studied by the average practitioner. Particularly timely, therefore, is this monograph, which presents the subject in a brief and comprehensive manner, well summarized and not too technical. Three factors are chiefly con- sidered: (1) Hereditary Inertia of Inherited Developmental -Tendencies; (2) The Nervous System ; (3) The Chemical Products of Various Organs, the so-called Internal Secretions. THE MACMILLAN COMPANY Publishers 64-66 Fifth Avenue New York